B.

Tech
APJ Abdul Kalam Technological University
 RAJAGIRI SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY

Department of Computer Science & Engineering

RSET Vision

To evolve into a premier technological and research institution, moulding

eminent professionals with creative minds, innovative ideas and sound
practical skill, and to shape a future where technology works for the
enrichment of mankind.

RSET Mission

To impart state-of-the-art knowledge to individuals in various

technological disciplines and to inculcate in them a high degree of social
consciousness and human values, thereby enabling them to face the
challenges of life with courage and conviction.

Department Vision

To become a Centre of Excellence in Computer Science & Engineering, moulding

professionals catering to the research and professional needs of national and international
organizations.

Department Mission
To inspire and nurture students, with up-to-date knowledge in Computer Science &
Engineering, ethics, team spirits, leadership abilities, innovation and creativity to come out
with solutions meeting the societal needs.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

A graduate of the Computer Science and Engineering Program will demonstrate:

PSO1: Computer Science Specific Skills:

 The ability to identify, analyze and design solutions for complex engineering
problems in multidisciplinary areas by understanding the core principles and
concepts of computer science and thereby engage in national grand challenges.
PSO2: Programming and Software Development Skills
 The ability to acquire programming efficiency by designing algorithms and
applying standard practices in software project development to deliver quality
software products meeting the demands of the industry.

PSO3: Professional Skills:

 The ability to apply the fundamentals of computer science in competitive research
and to develop innovative products to meet the societal needs thereby evolving as
an eminent researcher and entrepreneur.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

Engineering Graduates will be able to:

1. Engineering Knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering
problems. (Level 3)

2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex
engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of
mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences. (Level 6)

3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and

design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate
consideration for the public health and safety, and the cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations. (Level 6)

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge including

design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the
information to provide valid conclusions. (Level 5)

5. Modern Tool Usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and
modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations. (Level 6)

6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge
to assess societal, health, safety, legal, and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice. (Level 5)

7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional

engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the
knowledge of, and need for sustainable development. (Level 3)
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice. (Level 3)

9. Individual and Team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member

or leader in teams, and in multidisciplinary settings. (Level 3)

10. Communication: Communicate effectively with the engineering community and

with society at large. Be able to comprehend and write effective reports
documentation. Make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
(Level 6)

11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a
member and leader in a team. Manage projects in multidisciplinary environments.
(Level 5)

12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to
engage in independent and lifelong learning in the broadest context of technological
change. (Level 5)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Computer Science and Engineering

CURRICULUM FROM SEMESTERS I TO VIII

Every course of B. Tech. Programme shall be placed in one of the nine categories as listed in
table below.

Sl.
Category Code Credits
No
Humanities and Social Sciences including Management
1 HMC 5
courses
2 Basic Science courses BSC 26

3 Engineering Science Courses ESC 22

4 Program Core Courses PCC 79
5 Program Elective Courses PEC 15

6 Open Elective Courses OEC 3

7 Project work and Seminar PWS 10

8 Mandatory Non-credit Courses (P/F) with grade MNC --

9 Mandatory Student Activities (P/F) MSA 2

Total Mandatory Credits 162

10 Value Added Course (Optional) VAC 20

No semester shall have more than five lecture-based courses and two laboratory and/or
drawing/seminar/project courses in the curriculum. Semester-wise credit distribution shall
be as below:

Sem 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Total
Credits 17 21 22 22 23 23 15 17 160

Activity Points 50 50 ---

Credits for Activity 2 2

G.Total 162

Basic Science Courses: Maths, Physics, Chemistry, Biology for Engineers, Life Science etc

Engineering Science Courses: Engineering Graphics, Programming in C, Basics of

Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Basics of Civil and Mechanical Engineering,

146
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Engineering Mechanics, Thermodynamics, Design Engineering, Materials Engineering,

Workshops etc.

Humanities and Social Sciences including Management courses: English, Humanities,

Professional Ethics, Management, Finance & Accounting, Life Skills, Professional
Communication, Economics etc

Mandatory Non-credit Courses: Environmental Science, Constitution of India/Essence of

Indian Knowledge Tradition, Industrial Safety Engineering, Disaster Management etc.

Course Code and Course Number

Each course is denoted by a unique code consisting of three alphabets followed by three
numerals like CSL 201. The first two letter code refers to the department offering the course.
CS stands for course in Computer Science & Engineering, course code MA refers to a course
in Mathematics, course code ES refers to a course in Engineering Science etc. Third letter
stands for the nature of the course as indicated in the following table.

Code Description
Theory based courses (other than lecture hours, these courses can have tutorial
T
and practical hours, e.g., L-T-P structures 3-0-0, 3-1-2, 3-0-2 etc.)
Laboratory based courses (where performance is evaluated primarily on the basis
L
of practical or laboratory work with LTP structures like 0-0-3, 1-0-3, 0-1-3 etc.)
N Non-credit courses
D Project based courses (Major-, Mini- Projects)

Q Seminar courses

Course Number is a three digit number and the first digit refers to the Academic year in
which the course is normally offered, i.e. 1, 2, 3, or 4 for the B. Tech. Programme of four year
duration. Of the other two digits, the last digit identifies whether the course is offered
normally in the odd (odd number), even (non-zero even number) or in both the semesters
(zero). The middle number could be any digit. CSL 201 is a laboratory course offered in
Computer Science and Engineering department for third semester, MAT 101 is a course in
Mathematics offered in the first semester, EET 344 is a theory course in Electrical
Engineering offered in the sixth semester, PHT 110 is a course in Physics offered both the
first and second semesters, EST 102 is a course in Basic Engineering offered by one or many
departments in the second semester. These course numbers are to be given in the curriculum
and syllabi.

147
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Departments
Each course is offered by a Department and their two-letter course prefix is given in Table 2.

Sl. Course Sl. Course

Department Department
No. Prefix No. Prefix
1 Aeronautical Engg AO 16 Information Technology IT
Applied Electronics &
2 AE 17 Instrumentation & Control IC
Instrumentation
3 Automobile AU 18 Mandatory Courses MC
4 Biomedical Engg BM 19 Mathematics MA
5 Biotechnology BT 20 Mechanical Engg ME
6 Chemical Engg CH 21 Mechatronics MR
7 Chemistry CY 22 Metallurgy MT
8 Civil Engg CE 23 Mechanical (Auto) MU
9 Computer Science CS 24 Mechanical (Prod) MP
10 Electrical & Electronics EE 25 Naval & Ship Building SB
11 Electronics & Biomedical EB 26 Physics PH
Electronics &
12 EC 27 Polymer Engg PO
Communication
13 Food Technology FT 28 Production Engg PE
14 Humanities HU 29 Robotics and Automation RA

15 Industrial Engg IE 30 Safety & Fire Engg FS

148
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER I

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

LINEAR ALGEBRA AND

A MAT 101 3-1-0 4 4
CALCULUS

B PHT 100 ENGINEERING PHYSICS A 3-1-0 4 4

1/2
CYT 100 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3-1-0 4 4

C EST 100 ENGINEERING MECHANICS 2-1-0 3 3

1/2 EST 110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 2-0-2 4 3

B A S I C S OF C I V I L &
EST 120 M E C H A N I C A L 4-0-0 4 4
D ENGINEERING
1/2 BASICS OF ELECTRICAL &
EST 130 E L E C T R O N I C S 4-0-0 4 4
ENGINEERING

E HUN 101 LIFE SKILLS 2-0-2 4 --

ENGINEERING PHYSICS
PHL 120 0-0-2 2 1
S LAB
1/2 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
CYL 120 0-0-2 2 1
LAB

CIVIL & MECHANICAL

ESL 120 0-0-2 2 1
T WORKSHOP
1/2 ELECTRICAL &
ESL 130 0-0-2 2 1
ELECTRONICS WORKSHOP

TOTAL 23/24 17

149
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER II

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

VECTOR CALCULUS,
A MAT 102 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 3-1-0 4 4
AND TRANSFORMS

B PHT 100 ENGINEERING PHYSICS A 3-1-0 4 4

1/2 CYT 100 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 3-1-0 4 4

C EST 100 ENGINEERING MECHANICS 2-1-0 3 3

1/2
EST 110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS 2-0-2 4 3

B A S I C S OF C I V I L &
EST 120 M E C H A N I C A L 4-0-0 4 4
D ENGINEERING
1/2
BASICS OF ELECTRICAL &
EST 130 E L E C T R O N I C S 4-0-0 4 4
ENGINEERING

PROFESSIONAL
E HUT 102 2-0-2 4 --
COMMUNICATION

F EST 102 PROGRAMMING IN C 2-1-2 5 4

ENGINEERING PHYSICS
PHL 120 0-0-2 2 1
S LAB
1/2
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
CYL 120 0-0-2 2 1
LAB

CIVIL & MECHANICAL

ESL 120 0-0-2 2 1
T WORKSHOP
1/2
ELECTRICAL &
ESL 130 0-0-2 2 1
ELECTRONICS WORKSHOP

TOTAL 28/29 21

150
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

NOTE:

1. Engineering Physics A and Engineering Chemistry shall be offered in both semesters.

Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in
the Institution to opt for Engineering Physics A in S1 and Engineering Chemistry in
S2 & vice versa. Students opting for Engineering Physics A in a semester should
attend Physics Lab in the same semester and students opting for Engineering
Chemistry in one semester should attend Engineering Chemistry Lab in the same
semester

2. Engineering Mechanics and Engineering Graphics shall be offered in both semesters.

Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in
the Institution to opt for Engineering Mechanics in S1 and Engineering Graphics in
S2 & vice versa.

3. Basics of Civil & Mechanical Engineering and Basics of Electrical & Electronics
Engineering shall be offered in both semesters. Basics of Civil & Mechanical
Engineering contain equal weightage for Civil Engineering and Mechanical
Engineering. Slot for the course is D with CIE marks of 25 each and ESE marks of 50
each. Students belonging to branches of AEI, EI, BME, ECE, EEE, ICE, CSE, IT, RA
can choose this course in S1.

Basics of Electrical & Electronics Engineering contain equal weightage for Electrical
Engineering and Electronics Engineering. Slot for the course is D with CIE marks of
25 each and ESE marks of 50 each. Students belonging to AERO, AUTO, CE, FSE,
IE, ME, MECHATRONICS, PE, METALLURGY, BT, BCE, CHEM, FT, POLY can
choose this course in S1. Students having Basics of Civil & Mechanical Engineering
in one semester should attend Civil & Mechanical Workshop in the same semester
and students having Basics of Electrical & Electronics Engineering in a semester
should attend Electrical & Electronics Workshop in the same semester.

4. LIFE SKILLS
Life skills are those competencies that provide the means for an individual to be resourceful
and positive while taking on life's vicissitudes. Development of one's personality by being
aware of the self, connecting with others, reflecting on the abstract and the concrete, leading
and generating change, and staying rooted in time-tested values and principles is being aimed
at. This course is designed to enhance the employability and maximize the potential of the
students by introducing them to the principles that underlie personal and professional success,
and help them acquire the skills needed to apply these principles in their lives and careers.

5. PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
Objective is to develop in the under-graduate students of engineering a level of competence in
English required for independent and effective communication for their professional needs.
Coverage: Listening, Barriers to listening, Steps to overcome them, Purposive listening

151
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
practice, Use of technology in the professional world. Speaking, Fluency & accuracy in
speech, Positive thinking, Improving self-expression, Tonal variations, Group discussion
practice, Reading, Speed reading practice, Use of extensive readers, Analytical and critical
reading practice, Writing Professional Correspondence, Formal and informal letters, Tone in
formal writing, Introduction to reports. Study Skills, Use of dictionary, thesaurus etc.,
Importance of contents page, cover & back pages, Bibliography, Language Lab.

SEMESTER III

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL
A MAT 203 3-1-0 4 4
STRUCTURES

B CST 201 DATA STRUCTURES 3-1-0 4 4

C CST 203 LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN 3-1-0 4 4

OBJECTORIENTED
D CST 205 PROGRAMMING USING 3-1-0 4 4
JAVA

EST 200 DESIGN & ENGINEERING 2-0-0 2 2

E
(1/2)
HUT 200 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 2-0-0 2 2

SUSTAINABLE
F MNC 201 2-0-0 2 --
ENGINEERING

S CSL 201 DATA STRUCTURES LAB 0-0-3 3 2

O B J EC T O R I E N T E D
T CSL 203 PROGRAMMING LAB (IN 0-0-3 3 2
JAVA)

R/M VAC Remedial/Minor course 3-1-0 4 4

TOTAL 26* 22/26

* Excluding Hours to be engaged for Remedial/Minor course.

152
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER IV

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

A MAT 206 GRAPH THEORY 3-1-0 4 4

C O M P U T E R
B CST 202 O R G A N I S A T I O N A N D 3-1-0 4 4
ARCHITECTURE

DATABASE MANAGEMENT
C CST 204 3-1-0 4 4
SYSTEMS

D CST 206 OPERATING SYSTEMS 3-1-0 4 4

E EST 200 DESIGN & ENGINEERING 2-0-0 2 2

(1/2) HUT 200 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 2-0-0 2 2

F MNC 202 CONSTITUTION OF INDIA 2-0-0 2 --

S CSL 202 DIGITAL LAB 0-0-3 3 2

T CSL204 OPERATING SYSTEMS LAB 0-0-3 3 2

R/M/
VAC Remedial/Minor/Honors course 3-1-0 4 4
H

TOTAL 26* 22/26

* Excluding Hours to be engaged for Remedial/Minor/Honors course.

NOTE:

1. Design & Engineering and Professional Ethics shall be offered in both S3 and S4.
Institutions can advise students belonging to about 50% of the number of branches in
the Institution to opt for Design & Engineering in S3 and Professional Ethics in S4 &
vice versa.

2. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor course
(Thursdays from 3 to 5 PM and Fridays from 2 to 4 PM). If a student does not opt for
minor programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

153
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER V

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

FORMAL LANGUAGES AND

A CST 301 3-1-0 4 4
AUTOMATA THEORY

B CST 303 COMPUTER NETWORKS 3-1-0 4 4

C CST 305 SYSTEM SOFTWARE 3-1-0 4 4

MICROPROCESSORS AND
D CST 307 3-1-0 4 4
MICROCONTROLLERS

MANAGEMENT OF
E CST 309 3-0-0 3 3
SOFTWARE SYSTEMS

F MNC 301 DISASTER MANAGEMENT 2-0-0 2 --

SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND

S CSL 331 0-0-4 4 2
MICROPROCESSORS LAB

DATABASE MANAGEMENT
T CSL 333 0-0-4 4 2
SYSTEMS LAB

R/M/ Remedial/Minor/Honors course*

VAC 2-0-0 4 4
H

TOTAL 29* 23/27

* Excluding Hours to be engaged for Remedial/Minor/Honors course.

NOTE:

1. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/ Honors course
(Tuesdays from 3 to 5 PM and Wednesdays from 3 to 5 PM). If a student does not opt for
minor/honors programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

154
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER VI

COURS
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
E NO.

A CST 302 COMPILER DESIGN 3-1-0 4 4

COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND
B CST 304 3-1-0 4 4
IMAGE PROCESSING

ALGORITHM ANA LYSIS

C CST 306 3-1-0 4 4
AND DESIGN

D CST --- PROGRAM ELECTIVE I 2-1-0 3 3

INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS
E HUT 300 3-0-0 3 3
& FOREIGN TRADE

COMPREHENSIVE COURSE
F CST 308 1-0-0 1 1
WORK

S CSL 332 NETWORKING LAB 0-0-3 3 2

T CSD 334 MINIPROJECT 0-0-3 3 2

R/M/ Remedial/Minor/Honors course*

VAC 3-1-0 4 4
H

TOTAL 25* 23/27

* Excluding Hours to be engaged for Remedial/Minor/Honors course.

Note:

Electives: This curriculum envisages to offer a learner an opportunity to earn proficiency in

one of the five trending areas in Computer Science, namely Machine Learning, Data Science,
Security in Computing, Formal Methods in Software Engineering and Hardware
Technologies. Three courses each from the above areas are included through Elective
Courses in different Elective Buckets. For example, a learner who is interested in the
Machine Learning area may opt to take the elective courses - Foundations of Machine
Learning from Elective-I in S6, Machine Learning from Elective-II in S7 and Deep
Learning from Elective-III in S8. The Department may offer Elective Courses to enable
students to utilize this opportunity, depending on the availability of faculty. The courses
included from these areas under various Elective Buckets are shown in the table below.

155
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Different Specializations introduced through various Elective Buckets

Bucke Semester
Specialisation
t S6 S7 S8
FOUNDATIONS OF
MACHINE DEEP LEARNING
1 Machine Learning M A C H I N E
LEARNING (E-I) LEARNING (E-II) (E-III)

BLOCK CHAIN
DATA ANALYTICS C L O U D
2 Data Science TECHNOLOGIES
(E-I) COMPUTING (E-II)
(E-V)
FOUNDATIONS OF
3 Security in Computing SECURITY IN CRYPTOGRAPHY
SECURITY IN
COMPUTING (E-II) (E-III)
COMPUTING (E-I)

MODEL BASED
A U TO MAT E D S O F T W A R E
Formal Methods in S O F T WA R E
4 VERIFICATION (E-
Software Engineering D E V E L O P M E N T TESTING (E-V)
I)
(E-II)
IN TRODUCT ION A D VA N C E D U N I F I E D
TO IA32 TOPICS IN IA32 E X T E N D E D
5 Hardware Technologies
ARCHITECT URE AR CH ITE CTURE F I R M WA R E
(E-I) (E-II) INTERFACE (E-IV)

PROGRAM ELECTIVE I

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

i F O U N D A T I ON S O F
CST 312 2-1-0
MACHINE LEARNING

CST 322 ii DATA ANALYTICS 2-1-0

i i i F O U N D A T I O N S OF
CST 332 2-1-0
SECURITY IN COMPUTING

ivAUTOMATED
CST 342 2-1-0
VERIFICATION 3 3
D v INTRODUCTION TO IA32
CST 352 2-1-0
ARCHITECTURE

vi PROGRAMMING IN
CST 362 2-1-0
PYTHON

vii DATA AND COMPUTER

CST 372 2-1-0
COMMUNICATION

156
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

COURSES TO BE CONSIDERED FOR COMPREHENSIVE COURSE WORK

I DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES
ii DATA STRUCTURES
iii OPERATING SYSTEMS
iv COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE
v DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
vi FORMAL LANGUAGES AND AUTOMATA THEORY

NOTE:

1. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honors

course (Tuesdays from 3 to 5 PM and Wednesdays from 2 to 4 PM). If a student does
not opt for minor/honors programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

2. Comprehensive Course Work: The comprehensive course work in the sixth semester
of study shall have a written test of 50 marks. The written examination will be of
objective type similar to the GATE examination and will be conducted by the
University. Syllabus for comprehensive examination shall be prepared by the
respective BoS choosing the above listed 6 core courses studied from semesters 3 to
5. The pass minimum for this course is 25. The course should be mapped with a
faculty and classes shall be arranged for practicing questions based on the core
courses listed in the curriculum.

3. Mini project: It is introduced in the sixth semester with a specific objective to

strengthen the understanding of student’s fundamentals through effective application
of theoretical concepts. Mini project can help to boost their skills and widen the
horizon of their thinking. The ultimate aim of an engineering student is to resolve a
problem by applying theoretical knowledge. Doing more projects increases problem-
solving skills. Student Groups with 3 or 4 members should identify a topic of interest
in consultation with Faculty/Advisor. Review the literature and gather information
pertaining to the chosen topic. State the objectives and develop a methodology to
achieve the objectives. Carryout the design/fabrication or develop codes/programs to
achieve the objectives. Demonstrate the novelty of the project through the results and
outputs. The progress of the mini project is evaluated based on a minimum of two
reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. A
project report is required at the end of the semester. The product has to be

157
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

demonstrated for its full design specifications. Innovative design concepts, reliability
considerations, aesthetics/ergonomic aspects taken care of in the project shall be given
due weight. The internal evaluation will be made based on the product, the report and
a viva-voce examination, conducted internally by a 3 member committee appointed
by Head of the Department comprising HoD or a senior faculty member, Mini Project
coordinator for that program and project guide.
Total marks: 150 - CIE 75 marks and ESE 75 marks

Split up for CIE

Attendance 10

Project Guide 15

Project Report 10

Evaluation by the Committee (will be evaluating the level of completion and

demonstration of functionality/specifications, presentation, oral examination, work
knowledge and involvement) 40

SEMESTER VII

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

A CST 401 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 2-1-0 3 3

B CST --- PROGRAM ELECTIVE II 2-1-0 3 3

C CST --- OPEN ELECTIVE 2-1-0 3 3

INDUSTRIAL SAFETY
D MNC 401 2-1-0 3 ---
ENGINEERING

S CSL 411 COMPILER LAB 0-0-3 3 2

T CSQ 413 SEMINAR 0-0-3 3 2

U CSD 415 PROJECT PHASE I 0-0-6 6 2

R/M/ Remedial/Minor/Honors
VAC 3-1-0 4 4
H course*

TOTAL 24* 15/19

* Excluding Hours to be engaged for Remedial/Minor/Honors course.

158
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

PROGRAM ELECTIVE II

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

CST 413 i MACHINE LEARNING 2-1-0

CST 423 ii CLOUD COMPUTING 2-1-0

iii SECURITY IN
CST 433 2-1-0
COMPUTING

iv MOD EL BASED
CST 443 2-1-0
SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT 3 3
B
v ADVANCED TOPICS IN
CST 453 2-1-0
IA32 ARCHITECTURE

CST 463 vi WEB PROGRAMMING 2-1-0

vii NATURAL LANGUAGE

CST 473 2-1-0
PROCESSING

OPEN ELECTIVE

The open elective is offered in semester 7. Each program should specify the courses
(maximum 5) they would like to offer as electives for other programs. The courses listed
below are offered by the Department of COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING for
students of other undergraduate branches except Computer Science & Engineering and
Information Technology, offered in the colleges under KTU.

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

i INTRODUCTION TO
CST 415 2-1-0
MOBILE COMPUTING

ii INTRODUCTION TO DEEP
CST 425 2-1-0
LEARNING

CST 435 iii COMPUTER GRAPHICS 2-1-0 3 3

B
iv PYTHON FOR
CST 445 2-1-0
ENGINEERS

v OBJECT ORIENTED
CST 455 2-1-0
CONCEPTS

159
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

NOTE:

1. All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honors

course (Mondays from 10 to 12 and Wednesdays from 10 to 12 Noon). If a student
does not opt for minor/honors programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

2. Seminar: To encourage and motivate the students to read and collect recent and
reliable information about their area of interest confined to the relevant discipline,
from technical publications including peer reviewed journals, conferences, books,
project reports etc., prepare a report based on a central theme and present it before a
peer audience. Each student shall present the seminar for about 20 minutes duration
on the selected topic. The report and the presentation shall be evaluated by a team of
faculty members comprising Academic coordinator for that program, seminar
coordinator and seminar guide based on style of presentation, technical content,
adequacy of references, depth of knowledge and overall quality of the report.

Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50

Attendance 10

Seminar Guide 20

Technical Content of the Report 30

Presentation 40

3. Project Phase-I: A Project topic must be selected either from research literature or the
students themselves may propose suitable topics in consultation with their guides. The
objective of Project Work Phase-I is to enable the student to take up investigative
study in the broad field of Computer Science and Engineering, either fully theoretical/
practical or involving both theoretical and practical work to be assigned by the
Department on a group of three/four students, under the mentoring of a Project
Guide(s). This is expected to provide a good initiation for the student(s) in R&D
work. The assignment shall normally include:

➢ Survey and study of published literature on the assigned topic;

➢ Preparing an Action Plan for conducting the investigation, including team
work;
➢ Working out a preliminary Approach to the Problem relating to the assigned
topic;
➢ Block level design documentation
➢ Conducting preliminary Analysis/ Modelling/ Simulation/ Experiment/
Design/ Feasibility;

160
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
➢ Preparing a Written Report on the Study conducted for presentation to the
Department;
➢ Final project presentation before the concerned departmental committee.

Total marks: 100, only CIE, minimum required to pass 50

Project Guide(s) 30

Interim evaluation by the evaluation committee 20

Final project presentation 30

Final evaluation by the evaluation committee 20

The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project

coordinator and project guide(s).

SEMESTER VIII

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

A CST 402 DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING 2-1-0 3 3

3
B CST --- PROGRAM ELECTIVE III 2-1-0 3

3
C CST --- PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV 2-1-0 3

D CST --- PROGRAM ELECTIVE V 2-1-0 3 3

COMPREHENSIVE COURSE
T CST 404 1-0-0 1 1
VIVA

U CSD 416 PROJECT PHASE II 0-0-12 12 4

R/M/
VAC Remedial/Minor/Honors course 3-1-0 4 4
H

TOTAL 25* 17/21

* Excluding Hours to be engaged for Remedial/Minor/Honors course.

161
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

PROGRAM ELECTIVE III

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

CST 414 i DEEP LEARNING 2-1-0

ii PROGRAMMING
CST 424 2-1-0
PARADIGMS

CST 434 iii CRYPTOGRAPHY 2-1-0

CST 444 iv SOFT COMPUTING 2-1-0 3 3

B
v FUZZY SET THEORY AND
CST 454 2-1-0
APPLICATIONS

CST 464 vi EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 2-1-0

CST 474 vii COMPUTER VISION 2-1-0

PROGRAM ELECTIVE IV

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

i FORMAL METHODS AND

CST 416 TO O L S I N S O F T WA R E 2-1-0
ENGINEERING

ii CLIE NT SERVER
CST 426 2-1-0
ARCHITECTURE

C CST 436 iii PARALLEL COMPUTING 2-1-0

3 3
iv DATA COMPRESSION
CST 446 2-1-0
TECHNIQUES

v UNIFIED EXTENDED
CST 456 2-1-0
FIRMWARE INTERFACE

CST 466 vi DATA MINING 2-1-0

CST 476 vii MOBILE COMPUTING 2-1-0

162
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

PROGRAM ELECTIVE V

COURSE
SLOT COURSES L-T-P HOURS CREDIT
NO.

i HIGH PERFORMANCE
CST 418 2-1-0
COMPUTING

ii BLOCK CHAIN
CST 428 2-1-0
TECHNOLOGIES

iii IMAGE PROCESSING

D CST 438 2-1-0
TECHNIQUE
3 3
CST 448 iv INTERNET OF THINGS 2-1-0

CST 458 v SOFTWARE TESTING 2-1-0

CST 468 vi BIOINFORMATICS 2-1-0

vii COMPUTATIONAL
CST 478 2-1-0
LINGUISTICS

NOTE:

1. *All Institutions should keep 4 hours exclusively for Remedial class/Minor/Honors

course (Mondays from 10 to 12 and Wednesdays from 10 to 12 PM). If a student does
not opt for minor/honors programme, he/she can be given remedial class.

2. Comprehensive Viva Voce: The comprehensive viva voce in the eighth semester of
study shall have a viva voce for 50 marks. The viva voce shall be conducted based on
the core subjects studied from third to eighth semester. The viva voce will be
conducted by the same three member committee assigned for final project phase II
evaluation towards the end of the semesters. The pass minimum for this course is 25.
The course should be mapped with a faculty and classes shall be arranged for
practicing questions based on the core courses listed in the curriculum. The mark will
be treated as internal and should be uploaded along with internal marks of other
courses.
3. Project Phase II: The objective of Project Work Phase II & Dissertation is to enable
the student to extend further the investigative study taken up in Project Phase I, either
fully theoretical/practical or involving both theoretical and practical work, under the
mentoring of a Project Guide from the Department alone or jointly with a Supervisor
drawn from R&D laboratory/Industry. This is expected to provide a good training for
the student(s) in R&D work and technical leadership. The assignment shall normally
include:

163
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
➢ In depth study of the topic assigned in the light of the Report prepared in
Phase I;
➢ Review and finalization of the Approach to the Problem relating to the
assigned topic;
➢ Detailed Analysis/Modeling/Simulation/Design/Problem Solving/Experiment
as needed;
➢ Final development of product/process, testing, results, conclusions and future
directions;
➢ Preparing a paper for Conference presentation/Publication in Journals, if
possible;
➢ Preparing a Dissertation in the standard format for being evaluated by the
Department;
➢ Final Presentation before the concerned evaluation committee

Total marks: 150, only CIE, minimum required to pass 75

Project Guide 30

Interim evaluation, twice in the semester by the evaluation committee 70

Quality of the report evaluated by the above committee 10

(The evaluation committee comprises HoD or a senior faculty member, Project

coordinator and project guide).

Final evaluation by a three member committee 40

(The final evaluation committee comprises Project coordinator, expert from Industry/
research Institute and a senior faculty from a sister department. The same committee
will conduct comprehensive course viva for 50 marks ).

MINOR

Minor is an additional credential a student may earn if she/he does 20 credits worth of
additional learning in a discipline other than her/his major discipline of B.Tech. degree. The
objective is to permit a student to customize their Engineering degree to suit their specific
interests. Upon completion of an Engineering Minor, a student will be better equipped to
perform interdisciplinary research and will be better employable. Engineering Minors allow a
student to gain interdisciplinary experience and exposure to concepts and perspectives that
may not be a part of their major degree programs.
The academic units offering minors in their discipline will prescribe the set of courses and/or
other activities like projects necessary for earning a minor in that discipline. A specialist
bucket of 3-6 courses is identified for each Minor. Each bucket may rest on one or more

164
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

foundation courses. A bucket may have sequences within it, i.e., advanced courses may rest
on basic courses in the bucket. She/he accumulates credits by registering for the required
courses, and if the requirements for a particular minor are met within the time limit for the
course, the minor will be awarded. This will be mentioned in the Degree Certificate as
“Bachelor of Technology in xxx with Minor in yyy”. The fact will also be reflected in the
consolidated grade card, along with the list of courses taken. If one specified course cannot
be earned during the course of the programme, that minor will not be awarded. The
individual course credits earned, however, will be reflected in the consolidated grade card.
(i) The curriculum/syllabus committee/BoS shall prepare syllabus for courses to be included
in the curriculum from third to eight semesters for all branches. The minor courses shall be
identified by M slot courses.

(ii) Registration is permitted for Minor at the beginning of third semester. Total credits
required to award B.tech with Minor is 182 (162 + 20)

(iii) Out of the 20 Credits, 12 credits shall be earned by undergoing a minimum of three courses, of
which one course shall be a mini project based on the chosen area. They can do miniproject either
in S7 or in S8. The remaining 8 credits could be acquired through 2 MOOCs recommended by the
Board of Studies and approved by the Academic Council or 2 courses from the minor buckets listed
here. The classes for Minor shall be conducted along with regular classes and no extra time
shall be required for conducting the courses.

(iv) There won’t be any supplementary examination for the courses chosen for Minor.

(v) On completion of the program, “Bachelor of Technology in xxx with Minor in yyy” will be
awarded if the registrant earn 20 credits form the minor courses.

(vi) The registration for minor program will commence from semester 3 and all the academic units
offering minors in their discipline should prescribe set of such courses. The courses shall be
grouped into maximum of 5 buckets. The bucket of courses may have sequences within it, i.e.,
advanced courses may rest on basic courses in the bucket. Reshuffling of courses between various
buckets will not be allowed. There is option to skip any two courses listed here and to opt for
equivalent MOOC courses approved by the Academic Council. In any case, they should carry
out a mini project based on the chosen area in S7 or S8. For example: Students who have
registered for B.Tech Minor in Computer Science & Engineering can opt to study the
courses listed below:

165
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

MINOR BUCKETS

BUCKET-1 BUCKET-2 BUCKET-3

S
E Specialization - Software Specialization - Machine
Specialization - Networking
M Engineering Learning
E
C C C
S CO H H H
R CO R CO R
T O O O
UR E URS COURSE E URS COURSE E
E COURSE NAME U U U
SE D E NAME D E NAME D
R R R
R NO I NO I NO I
S S S
T T T

OBJECT PYTHON FOR DATA

CST CST CST
S3 ORIENTED 4 4 283 MACHINE 4 4 COMMUNICAT 4 4
281 285
PROGRAMMING LEARNING ION

MATHEMATIC INTRODUCTIO
PROGRAMMING
CST CST S FOR CST N TO
S4 METHODOLOGIE 4 4 4 4 4 4
282 284 MACHINE 286 COMPUTER
S
LEARNING NETWORKS

CONCEPTS IN CONCEPTS IN CLIENT

CST CST CST
S5 SOFTWARE 4 4 MACHINE 4 4 SERVER 4 4
381 ENGINEERING 383 385
LEARNING SYSTEMS

WIRELESS
INTRODUCTION CONCEPTS IN NETWORKS
CST CST CST
S6 TO SOFTWARE 4 4 DEEP 4 4 AND IOT 4 4
382 384 386
TESTING LEARNING APPLICATION
S

CSD CSD CSD

S7 Miniproject 4 4 Miniproject 4 4 Miniproject 4 4
481 481 481

CSD CSD CSD

S8 Miniproject 4 4 Miniproject 4 4 Miniproject 4 4
482 482 482

Note-1: Name of the specialization shall be mentioned in the Minor Degree to be awarded

Note-2: Any B.Tech students from non-Computer Science/non-IT streams can register for the courses in the
minor buckets.

166
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

HONORS

Honors is an additional credential a student may earn if she/he opts for the extra 20 credits
needed for this in her/his own discipline. Honors is not indicative of a class. The University is
providing this option for academically extra brilliant students to acquire Honors. Honors is
intended for a student to gain expertise/get specialized in an area inside his/her major B.Tech
discipline and to enrich knowledge in emerging/advanced areas in the concerned branch of
engineering. It is particularly suited for students aiming to pursue higher studies. Upon
completion of Honors, a student will be better equipped to perform research in her/his
branch of engineering. On successful accumulation of credits at the end of the programme,
this will be mentioned in the Degree Certificate as “Bachelor of Technology in xxx, with
Honors.” The fact will also be reflected in the consolidated grade card, along with the list of
courses taken. If a student is not earning credits for any one of the specified course for getting
Honors, she/he is not entitled to get Honors. The individual course credits earned, however,
will be reflected in the consolidated grade card.

The courses shall be grouped into maximum of 3 buckets, each bucket representing a
particular specialization in the branch. The students shall select only the courses from same
bucket in all semesters. It means that the specialization is to be fixed by the student and
cannot be changed subsequently. The internal evaluation, examination and grading shall be
exactly as for other mandatory courses. The Honors courses shall be identified by H slot
courses.

(i) The curriculum/syllabus committee/BoS shall prepare syllabus for courses to be

included in the curriculum from fourth to eight semesters for all branches. The
Honors courses shall be identified by H slot courses.
(ii) Registration is permitted for Honors at the beginning of fourth semester. Total
credits required is 182 (162 + 20).
(iii) Out of the 20 Credits, 12 credits shall be earned by undergoing a minimum of
three courses, of which one course shall be a mini project based on the chosen
area. The remaining 8 credits could be acquired through 2 MOOCs recommended
by the Board of studies and approved by the Academic Council or 2 courses from
the same bucket as the above 3 courses. The classes for Honors shall be conducted
along with regular classes and no extra time shall be required for conducting the
courses. The students should earn a grade of ‘C’ or better for all courses under
Honors.
(iv) There won’t be any supplementary examination for the courses chosen for
Honors.
(v) On successful accumulation of credits at the end of the programme, “Bachelor of
Technology in xxx, with Honors” will be awarded if overall CGPA is greater than

167
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

or equal to 8.5, earned a grade of ‘C’ or better for all courses chosen for Honors
and there is no history of ‘F’ Grade in the entire span of the BTech Course.
(vi) The registration for Honors program will commence from semester 4 and the all
academic units offering Honors in their discipline should prescribe set of such
courses. The courses shall be grouped into maximum of 5 buckets, each bucket
representing a particular specialization in the branch. The students shall select
only the courses from same bucket in all semesters. It means that the
specialization is to be fixed by the student and cannot be changed subsequently.
There is option to skip any two courses listed here if required, and to opt for
equivalent MOOC courses approved by the Academic Council. In any case, they
should carry out a mini project based on the chosen area in S8. For example:
Students who have registered for B.Tech in Computer Science and Engineering
with Honors can opt to study the courses listed in one of the buckets shown
below:

168
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

HONORS BUCKETS

BUCKET-1 BUCKET-2 BUCKET-3

S
E Specialization - Security in Specialization - Machine Specialization - Formal
M Computing Learning Methods
E
C C C
S H H H
CO R CO R CO R
T O O O
URS E URS COURSE E UR COURSE E
E E COURSE NAME U E NAME U SE NAME U
D D D
R R R
R NO I NO I NO I
S S S
T T T

COMPUTATIO
PRINCIPLES
NAL
OF PROGRAM
CST NUMBER CST FUNDAMENT CST
S4 292 THEORY 4 4 294 4 4 296 ANALYSIS 4 4
ALS FOR
AND
MACHINE
VERIFICATION
LEARNING

NEURAL
PRINCIPLES
CST CRYPTOGRAPHI CST NETWORKS CST
S5 4 4 4 4 OF MODEL 4 4
393 C ALGORITHMS 395 AND DEEP 397
CHECKING
LEARNING

ADVANCED THEORY OF
CST NETWORK CST TOPICS IN CST COMPUTABILI
S6 394 4 4 396 4 4 398 4 4
SECURITY MACHINE TY AND
LEARNING COMPLEXITY

ADVANCED
TOPICS IN LOGIC FOR
CST CYBER CST CST
S7 4 4 ARTIFICIAL 4 4 COMPUTER 4 4
495 FORENSICS 497 499
INTELLIGENC SCIENCE
E

CSD CSD CSD

S8 Miniproject 4 4 Miniproject 4 4 Miniproject 4 4
496 496 496

Note: Name of the specialization shall be mentioned in the Honors Degree to be awarded

169
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

INDUCTION PROGRAM

There will be three weeks induction program for first semester students. It is a unique three-
week immersion Foundation Programme designed specifically for the fresher’s which
includes a wide range of activities right from workshops, lectures and seminars to sports
tournaments, social works and much more. The programme is designed to mould students
into well-rounded individuals, aware and sensitized to local and global conditions and foster
their creativity, inculcate values and ethics, and help students to discover their passion.
Foundation Programme also serves as a platform for the fresher’s to interact with their batch-
mates and seniors and start working as a team with them. The program is structured around
the following five themes:

The programme is designed keeping in mind the following objectives:

 Values and Ethics: Focus on fostering a strong sense of ethical judgment and moral
fortitude.
 Creativity: Provide channels to exhibit and develop individual creativity by
expressing themselves through art, craft, music, singing, media, dramatics, and other
creative activities.
 Leadership, Communication and Teamwork: Develop a culture of teamwork and
group communication.
 Social Awareness: Nurture a deeper understanding of the local and global world and
our place in at as concerned citizens of the world.
 Physical Activities & Sports: Engage students in sports and physical activity to
ensure healthy physical and mental growth.

170
DETAILED
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER

S1S2
 PHT ENGINEERING PHYSICS A CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 (FOR CIRCUIT BRANCHES) INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Engineering Physics Program is to offer students a solid background in the
fundamentals of Physics and to impart that knowledge in engineering disciplines. The
program is designed to develop scientific attitudes and enable the students to correlate
the concepts of Physics with the core programmes

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics, Mathematical course on vector calculus,

differential equations and linear algebra

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the quantitative aspects of waves and oscillations in engineering systems.

CO 2 Apply the interaction of light with matter through interference, diffraction and identify
these phenomena in different natural optical processes and optical instruments.

CO 3 Analyze the behaviour of matter in the atomic and subatomic level through the principles of
quantum mechanics to perceive the microscopic processes in electronic devices.

CO 4 Classify the properties of magnetic materials and apply vector calculus to static magnetic
fields and use Maxwell’s equations to diverse engineering problems

CO 5 Analyze the principles behind various superconducting applications, explain the working of
solid state lighting devices and fibre optic communication system

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1
CO 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 1 1 2 1
CO 5 3 1 1 2 1

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Explain the effect of damping force on oscillators.

2. Distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves.

3. (a) Derive an expression for the fundamental frequency of transverse vibration in a

stretched string.

(b) Calculate the fundamental frequency of a string of length 2 m weighing 6 g kept

stretched by a load of 600 kg.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Explain colours in thin films.

2. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.

3. (a) Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and obtain the expression for radii of bright and
dark rings in reflected system. Also explain how it is used to determine the wavelength of
a monochromatic source of light.

(b) A liquid of refractive index µ is introduced between the lens and glass plate.
 What happens to the fringe system? Justify your answer.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Give the physical significance of wave function ?

2. What are excitons ?

3. (a) Solve Schrodinger equation for a particle in a one dimensional box and obtain its
energy eigen values and normalised wave functions.

(b) Calculate the first three energy values of an electron in a one dimensional box of width
1 A0 in electron volt.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Compare displacement current and conduction current.

2. Mention any four properties of ferro magnetic materials.

3. (a) Starting from Maxwell’s equations, derive the free space electromagnetic wave
equation and show that velocity of electromagnetic wave is 1/ (µo εo) ½

(b) An electromagnetic wave is described by E = 100 exp 8πi [10 14 t – (10 6 z / 3)] V/m.
Find the direction of propagation of the wave,speed of the wave and magnetic flux
density in the wave.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Explain the working of a solar cell.

2. Distinguish between Type I and Type II super conductors.

3. (a) Define numerical aperture and derive an expression for it.

(b) Explain the working of intensity modulated fibre optic sensor.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: PHT 100

Course Name: Engineering Physics A

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Compare electrical and mechanical oscillators

2. Distinguish between longitudinal and transverse waves

3. Write a short note on antireflection coating.

4. Diffraction of light is not as evident in daily experience as that of sound waves. Give reason.

5. State and explain Heisenberg’s Uncertainty principle. With the help of it explain natural

line broadening.

6. Explain surface to volume ratio of nanomaterials.

7. State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.

8. Compare displacement current and conduction current

9. List four important applications of superconductors.

10. Give the working principle of LED. (10x3=30)

PART B

Answer any one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

Module 1
11. (a) Derive the differential equation of damped harmonic oscillator and deduce its
solution.Discuss the cases of over damped, critically damped and under damped cases. (10)

(b) The frequency of a tuning fork is 500 Hz and its Q factor is 7×10 4. Find the relaxation time.
Also calculate the time after which its energy becomes 1/10 of its initial undamped value.(4)

12. (a) Derive an expression for the velocity of propagation of a transverse wave in a stretched
string. Deduce laws of transverse vibrations. (10)

(b) The equation of transverse vibration of a stretched string is given by y =0.00327 sin (72.1x-
2.72t)m, in which the numerical constants are in S.I units. Evaluate (i) Amplitude (ii) Wavelength
(iii) Frequency and (iv)Velocity of the wave. (4)

Module 2

13.(a)Explain the formation of Newton’s rings and show that the radius of dark ring is
proportional to the square root of natural numbers. How can we use Newton’s rings
experiment to determine the refractive index of a liquid. (10)

(b) Two pieces of plane glass are placed together with a piece of paper between two at one
end. Find the angle of the wedge in seconds if the film is viewed with a monochromatic light of
wavelength 4800Å. Given β = 0.0555 cm. (4)

14. (a) Explain the diffraction due to a plane transmission grating. Obtain the grating equation. (10)

(b) A grating has 6000 lines per cm. Find the angular separation of the two yellow lines
of mercury of wavelengths 577 nm and 579 nm in the second order. (4)

Module 3

15.(a) Derive time dependent and independent Schrodinger equations. (10)

(b) An electron is confined to one dimensional potential box of length 2Å. Calculate the energies
corresponding to the first and second quantum states in eV. (4)

16.(a) Classify nanomaterials based on dimensionality of quantum confinement and explain the
following nanostructures. (i) nano sheets (ii) nano wires (iii) quantum dots. (10)

(b) Find the de Broglie wavelength of electron whose kinetic energy is 15 eV. (4)

Module 4

17.(a) State Poynting’s Theorem. Calculate the value of Poynting vector at the surface of the sun if
the power radiated by the sun is 3.8 x 10 26 W and its radius is 7 X 10 8 m. (5)
 (b) Distinguish between paramagnetic, diamagnetic and ferromagnetic materials. (9)

18.(a) Starting from Maxwell’s Equations, derive electromagnetic wave equations in free space. (10)

(b) If the magnitude of H in a plane wave is 1 A/m, find the magnitude of E in free space. (4)

Module 5

19.(a) Show that superconductors are perfect diamagnets. Distinguish between Type I and

Type II superconductors with suitable examples. (10)

(b) Write a short note on high temperature superconductors. (4)

20.(a) Define numerical aperture of an optic fibre and derive an expression for the NA of a step
index fibre with a neat diagram. (10)

(b) Calculate the numerical aperture and acceptance angle of a fibre with a core refractive index
of 1.54 and a cladding refractive index of 1.50 when the fibre is inside water of refractive
index 1.33. (4) (14x5=70)
 Syllabus

ENGINEERING PHYSICS A
(FOR CIRCUIT BRANCHES)

Module 1
Oscillations and Waves
Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of differential equation and its solution,
Over damped, Critically damped and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression, Forced
oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for amplitude and phase of forced
oscillations, Amplitude Resonance-Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness
of Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators

Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its solution, Three dimensional
wave equation and its solution (no derivation), Distinction between transverse and longitudinal
waves, Transverse vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration

Module 2
Wave Optics
Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin films - Cosine law (Reflected
system), Derivation of the conditions of constructive and destructive Interference, Interference due
to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings -
Measurement of wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings

Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, Diffraction grating-Grating

equation, Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive power of a grating with
expression (no derivation)

Module 3
Quantum Mechanics & Nanotechnology
Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of Particles, Uncertainty principle,
Applications-Absence of electrons inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism,
Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave equations-Physical meaning of
wave function, Particle in a one dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and
energy eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)

Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to volume ratio for nanomaterials,
Quantum confinement in one dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots, Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical,
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)

Module 4
Magnetism & Electro Magnetic Theory
Magnetic field and Magnetic flux density, Gauss’s law for Magnetic flux density, Ampere’s Circuital
law, Faraday’s law in terms of EMF produced by changing magnetic flux, Magnetic permeability and
susceptibility, Classification of magnetic materials-para, dia and ferromagnetic materials
Fundamentals of vector calculus, concept of divergence, gradient and curl along with physical
significance, Line, Surface and Volume integrals, Gauss divergence theorem & Stokes’ theorem,
Equation of continuity, Derivation of Maxwell’s equations in vacuum, Comparison of displacement
current with conduction current. Electromagnetic waves, Velocity of Electromagnetic waves in free
space, Flow of energy and Poynting’s vector (no derivation)

Module 5
Superconductivity & Photonics
Superconducting phenomena, Meissner effect and perfect diamagnetism, Types of superconductors-
Type I and Type II, BCS Theory (Qualitative), High temperature superconductors-Applications of
super conductivity

Introduction to photonics-Photonic devices-Light Emitting Diode, Photo detectors -Junction and PIN
photodiodes, Solar cells-I-V Characteristics, Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of
fibres-Step index and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and Technological applications of optical
fibre, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity Modulated and Phase modulated sensors.

Text Books

1. M.N.Avadhanulu, P.G.Kshirsagar,TVS Arun Murthy “A Text book of Engineering Physics”, S.Chand

&Co., Revised Edition 2019

2. H.K.Malik , A.K. Singh, “Engineering Physics” McGraw Hill Education, Second Edition 2017

Reference Books

1. Arthur Beiser, “Concepts of Modern Physics ", Tata McGraw Hill Publications, 6th Edition
2003

2. D.K. Bhattacharya, Poonam Tandon, “Engineering Physics”, Oxford University Press, 2015

3. Md.N.Khan & S.Panigrahi “Principles of Engineering Physics 1&2”, Cambridge University

Press, 2016

4. Aruldhas G., “Engineering Physics”, PHI Pvt. Ltd., 2015

5. Ajoy Ghatak, “Optics”, Mc Graw Hill Education, Sixth Edition, 2017

6. T. Pradeep, “Nano:The Essentials’’, McGraw Hill India Ltd, 2007

7. Halliday, Resnick, Walker, “Fundamentals of Physics’’, John Wiley & Sons.Inc, 2001

8. David J Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics’’, Addison-Wesley publishing, 3rd Edition,

1999

9. Premlet B., “Advanced Engineering Physics”, Phasor Books,10th edition,2017

10. I. Dominic and. A. Nahari, “A Text Book of Engineering physics”, Owl Books Publishers,
Revised edition, 2016
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule
No Topic No. of Lectures
1 Oscillations and Waves (9 hours)

1.1 Harmonic oscillations, Damped harmonic motion-Derivation of 2 hrs

differential equation and its solution, Over damped, Critically damped
and Under damped Cases, Quality factor-Expression
1.2 Forced oscillations-Differential Equation-Derivation of expressions for
amplitude and phase of forced oscillations, Amplitude Resonance- 3hrs
Expression for Resonant frequency, Quality factor and Sharpness of
Resonance, Electrical analogy of mechanical oscillators
1.3 Wave motion- Derivation of one dimensional wave equation and its
solution, Three dimensional wave equation and its solution (no
derivation) 2 hrs
1.4 Distinction between transverse and longitudinal waves. Transverse 2 hrs
vibration in a stretched string, Statement of laws of vibration
2 Wave Optics (9 hours)

2.1 Interference of light-Principle of superposition of waves, Theory of thin 2 hrs

films - Cosine law (Reflected system), Derivation of the conditions of
constructive and destructive Interference
2.2 Interference due to wedge shaped films -Determination of thickness 4 hr
and test for optical planeness, Newton’s rings - Measurement of
wavelength and refractive index, Antireflection coatings
2.3 Diffraction of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer classes of diffraction, 2 hrs
Diffraction grating-Grating equation
2.4 Rayleigh criterion for limit of resolution, Resolving and Dispersive 1 hr
power of a grating with expression (no derivation)
3 Quantum Mechanics &Nanotechnology (9hours)

3.1 Introduction for the need of Quantum mechanics, Wave nature of 2 hrs
Particles, Uncertainty principle, Applications-Absence of electrons
inside a nucleus and Natural line broadening mechanism
3.2 Formulation of time dependent and independent Schrodinger wave 4 hrs
equations-Physical Meaning of wave function, Particle in a one
dimensional box- Derivation for normalised wave function and energy
eigen values, Quantum Mechanical Tunnelling (Qualitative)
3.3 Introduction to nanoscience and technology, Increase in surface to 2 hrs
volume ratio for nanomaterials, Quantum confinement in one
dimension, two dimension and three dimension-Nano sheets, Nano
wires and Quantum dots
3.4 Properties of nanomaterials-mechanical, electrical and optical 1 hr
Applications of nanotechnology (qualitative ideas)
4 Magnetism & Electro Magnetic Theory (9 hours)
4.1 Magnetic field and Magnetic flux density, Gauss’s law for Magnetic flux 2 hrs
 density, Ampere’s Circuital law, Faraday’s law in terms of EMF
produced by changing magnetic flux
4.2 Explanation for Magnetic permeability and susceptibility Classification 1 hr
of magnetic materials- para, dia and ferromagnetic materials
4.3 Fundamentals of vector calculus, concept of divergence, gradient and 2 hrs
curl along with physical significance, Line, Surface and Volume integrals,
Gauss divergence theorem & Stokes’ theorem
4.4 Equation of continuity, Derivation of Maxwell’s equations in vacuum, 4 hrs
Comparison of displacement current with conduction current.
Electromagnetic waves, Velocity of Electromagnetic waves in free
space, Flow of energy and Poynting’s vector (no derivation)
5 Superconductivity &Photonics (9hours)
5.1 Super conducting Phenomena, Meissner effect and perfect 2 hrs
diamagnetism, Types of superconductors-Type I and Type II
5.2 BCS Theory (Qualitative), High temperature superconductors, 2 hrs
Applications of super conductivity
5.3 Introduction to photonics-Photonic devices-Light Emitting Diode, Photo 2 hrs
detectors -Junction and PIN photodiodes, Solar cells-I-V Characteristics
5.4 Optic fibre-Principle of propagation of light, Types of fibres-Step index 3 hrs
and Graded index fibres, Numerical aperture –Derivation, Fibre optic
communication system (block diagram), Industrial, Medical and
Technological applications of optical fibre, Fibre optic sensors-Intensity
Modulated and Phase modulated sensors
 CYT ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
100 INTRODUCTION
BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: To enable the students to acquire knowledge in the concepts of chemistry for engineering
applications and to familiarize the students with different application oriented topics like
spectroscopy, electrochemistry, instrumental methods etc. Also familiarize the students with topics
like mechanism of corrosion, corrosion prevention methods, SEM, stereochemistry, polymers,
desalination etc., which enable them to develop abilities and skills that are relevant to the study and
practice of chemistry.

Prerequisite: Concepts of chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Apply the basic concepts of electrochemistry and corrosion to explore its possible
applications in various engineering fields.
CO 2 Understand various spectroscopic techniques like UV-Visible, IR, NMR and its
applications.
CO 3 Apply the knowledge of analytical method for characterizing a chemical mixture or a
compound. Understand the basic concept of SEM for surface characterisation of
nanomaterials.
CO 4 Learn about the basics of stereochemistry and its application. Apply the knowledge of
conducting polymers and advanced polymers in engineering.
CO 5 Study various types of water treatment methods to develop skills for treating
wastewater.

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 1 2 1
CO 2 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 1 1 2
CO 4 2 1
CO 5 1 1 3
Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

1 2
Remember 15 15 30
Understand 25 25 50
Apply 10 10 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts- Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions (2 questions from each module), having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module, of which student should
answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 subdivisions and carries 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO 1):

1. What is calomel electrode? Give the reduction reaction (3 Marks)

2. List three important advantages of potentiometric titration (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain how electroless plating copper and nickel are carried out (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the emf of the following cell at 30oC, Z n / Zn 2+ (0.1M) // Ag+ (0.01M) // Ag.

Given E0 Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V, E0 Ag+/Ag = 0.8 V. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 2 (CO 2)

1. State Beer Lambert’s law (3 Marks)

2. List the important applications of IR spectroscopy (3 Marks)

3. (a) What is Chemical shift? What are factors affecting Chemical shift? How 1H NMR spectrum of
CH3COCH2Cl interpreted using the concept of chemical shift. (10 Marks)

(b) Calculate the force constant of HF molecule, if it shows IR absorption at 4138 cm -1. Given that
atomic masses of hydrogen and fluorine are 1u and 19u respectively. (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 3 (CO 3):

1. Distinguish between TGA and DTA (3 Marks)

2. Give two differences between GSC and GLC (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure of HPLC (10 Marks)

(b) Interpret TGA of CaC2O4. H2O (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 4 (CO 4):

1. Explain the geometrical isomerism in double bonds (3 Marks)

2. What are the rules of assigning R-S notation? (3 Marks)

3. (a) What are conducting polymers? How it is classified? Give the preparation of polyaniline
(10 Marks)

(b) Draw the stereoisomers possible for CH3-(CHOH)2-COOH (4 Marks)

Course Outcome 5 (CO 5):

1. What is degree of hardness? (3 Marks)

2. Define BOD and COD (3 Marks)

3. (a) Explain the EDTA estimation of hardness (10 Marks)

(b) Standard hard water contains 20 g of CaCO3 per liter,50 mL of this required 30mL of EDTA
solution, 50mL of sample water required 20mL of EDTA solution. 50mL sample water after boiling
required 14 mL EDTA solution. Calculate the temporary hardness of the given sample of water, in
terms of ppm. (4 Marks)

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Total Pages:
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION
Course Code: CYT100,
Course Name: ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A
Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks Marks
1 What is potentiometric titration? How the end point is determined graphically? (3)
2 What is Galvanic series? How is it different from electrochemical series? (3)
3 Which of the following molecules can give IR absorption? Give reason? (3)
(a) O2 (b) H2O (c) N2 (d) HCl
4 Which of the following molecules show UV-Visible absorption? Give reason. (3)
(a) Ethane (b) Butadiene (c) Benzene
5 What are the visualization techniques used in TLC? (3)
6 Write the three important applications of nanomaterials. (3)
7 Draw the Fischer projection formula and find R-S notation of (3)

8 Write the structure of a) Polypyrroleb) Kevlar. (3

9 What is break point chlorination? (3)
10 What is reverse osmosis? (3)

PART B
Answer any one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks
Module 1
11 a) Give the construction of Li-ion cell. Give the reactions that take place at the (10)
electrodes during charging and discharging. What happens to anodic material when
the cell is 100% charged.
b) Calculate the standard electrode potential of Cu, if its electrode potential at 25 °C (4)
2+
is 0.296 V and the concentration of Cu is 0.015 M.
OR
12 a) Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion of iron in oxygen rich and oxygen (10)
deficient acidic and basic environments.
b) Given below are reduction potentials of some species (4)

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5e → Mn2+ + 4H2O; E0 = +1.51 V

Cl2 + 2e → 2Cl- ; E0 = +1.36 V

S2O82- + 2e → 2SO42- ; E0 = +1.98 V

Use the above data to examine whether the acids, dil. HCl and dil. H2SO4 , can be used
to provide acid medium in redox titrations involving KMnO4.
Module 2
13 a) What is spin-spin splitting? Draw the NMR spectrum of (i) CH3 CH2CH2 Br (ii) (10)
CH3CH(Br)CH3 Explain how NMR spectrum can be used to identify the two isomers.
b) A dye solution of concentration 0.08M shows absorbance of 0.012 at 600 nm; while a (4)
test solution of same dye shows absorbance of 0.084 under same conditions. Find the
concentration of the test solution.
OR
14 a) Explain the basic principle of UV-Visible spectroscopy. What are the possible (10)
electronic transitions? Explain with examples.
b) Sketch the vibrational modes of CO2 and H2O. Which of them are IR active? (4)
 Module 3
15 a) Explain the principle, instrumentation and procedure involved in gas chromatography. (10)
b) Explain the DTA of CaC2O4.H2O with a neat sketch. (4)
OR
16 a) Explain the various chemical methods used for the synthesis of nanomaterial (10)
b) How TGA is used to analyse the thermal stability of polymers? (4)

Module 4

17 a) What are conformers? Draw thecis and transisomers of 1, 3-dimethylcylohexane. (10)

Which conformer (chair form) is more stable in each case?
b) What is ABS? Give properties and applications. (4)
OR
18 a) Explain the various structural isomers with suitable example. (10)
b) What is OLED? Draw a labelled diagram. (4)
Module 5
19 a) What are ion exchange resins? Explain ion exchange process for removal of hardness (10)
of water? How exhausted resins are regenerated?
b) 50 mL sewage water is diluted to 2000 mL with dilution water; the initial dissolved (4)
oxygen was 7.7 ppm. The dissolved oxygen level after 5 days of incubation was 2.4
ppm. Find the BOD of the sewage.
OR
20 a) What are the different steps in sewage treatment? Give the flow diagram. Explain the (10)
working of trickling filter.
b) Calculate the temporary and permanent hardness of a water sample which contains (4)
[Ca2+] = 160 mg/L, [Mg2+] = 192 mg/L and [HCO3-] = 122 mg/L.

Syllabus

Module 1

Electrochemistry and Corrosion

Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells - Daniel cell - redox
reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) - Reference electrodes - SHE -
Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction and Working. Single electrode potential -
definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer -Determination of E0 using calomel
electrode.Determination of pH using glass electrode.Electrochemical series and its applications. Free
energy and EMF - Nernst Equation - Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application -
Variation of emf with temperature. Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration
only.Lithiumion cell - construction and working.Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic protection - electroless

plating –Copper and Nickel plating.
Module 2

Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications

Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy levels - Beer

Lambert’s law (Numericals). UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions -
Energy level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of UV-Visible
spectrometer and applications.IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -
Vibrational energy states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications. 1H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field
strength and frequency - chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

Module 3

Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials

Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications – TGA of
CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and applications - DTA of
CaC2O4.H2O. Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC-
Retention factor. GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and
applications.

Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - Hydrolysis and

Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface characterisation -SEM – Principle and
instrumentation (block diagram).

Module 4

Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry

Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism - Definition with

examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse, Wedge and Fischer projection of
substituted methane and ethane. Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and
cycloalkanes (cis-trans and E-Z notations). R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism,
Chirality, Enantiomers and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.Conformational analysis of
ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl substituted cyclohexane.

Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft copolymers - ABS -
preparation, properties and applications.Kevlar-preparation, properties and applications.Conducting
polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED -
Principle, construction and advantages.

Module 5

Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment

Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent - Disadvantages of

hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of
hardness-EDTA method (Numericals). Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle,
procedure and advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages. Municipal water
treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone andUV irradiation.

Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD and COD-
definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance (Numericals). Sewage water treatment
- Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram -Trickling filter and UASB process.

Text Books

1. B. L. Tembe, Kamaluddin, M. S. Krishnan, “Engineering Chemistry (NPTEL Web-book)”,

2018.

2. P. W. Atkins, “Physical Chemistry”, Oxford University Press, 10th edn., 2014.

Reference Books

1. C. N. Banwell, “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, McGraw-Hill, 4thedn., 1995.

2. Donald L. Pavia, “Introduction to Spectroscopy”, Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2015.

3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma, M. S. Pathania, “Principles of Physical Chemistry”, Vishal Publishing

Co., 47th Edition, 2017.

4. H. H. Willard, L. L. Merritt, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, CBS Publishers, 7th Edition,

2005.

5. Ernest L. Eliel, Samuel H. Wilen, “Stereo-chemistry of Organic Compounds”, WILEY, 2008.

6. Raymond B. Seymour, Charles E. Carraher, “Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction”, Marcel

Dekker Inc; 4th Revised Edition, 1996.
7. MuhammedArif, Annette Fernandez, Kavitha P. Nair “Engineering Chemistry”, Owl Books,
2019.

8. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry”, Jai Publication, 2019.

9. Roy K. Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

10. Soney C. George,RinoLaly Jose, “Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand & Company
Pvt Ltd, 2019.
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of
Lectures
(hrs)

1 Electrochemistry and Corrosion 9

1.1 Introduction - Differences between electrolytic and electrochemical cells- Daniel 2

cell - redox reactions - cell representation. Different types of electrodes (brief) -
Reference electrodes- SHE - Calomel electrode - Glass Electrode - Construction
and Working.

1.2 Single electrode potential – definition - Helmholtz electrical double layer - 3

Determination of E0 using calomel electrode. Determination of pH using glass
electrode. Electrochemical series and its applications. Free energy and EMF -
Nernst Equation – Derivation - single electrode and cell (Numericals) -Application
-Variation of emf with temperature.

1.3 Potentiometric titration - Introduction -Redox titration only. Lithiumion cell - 2

construction and working. Conductivity- Measurement of conductivity of a
solution (Numericals).

1.4 Corrosion-Electrochemicalcorrosion – mechanism. Galvanic series- cathodic 2

protection - electroless plating –Copper and Nickel plating.

2 Spectroscopic Techniques and Applications 9

2.1 Introduction- Types of spectrum - electromagnetic spectrum - molecular energy 2

levels - Beer Lambert’s law (Numericals).

2.2 UV-Visible Spectroscopy – Principle - Types of electronic transitions - Energy 2

level diagram of ethane, butadiene, benzene and hexatriene. Instrumentation of
UV-Visible spectrometer and applications.

2.3 IR-Spectroscopy – Principle - Number of vibrational modes -Vibrational energy 2

states of a diatomic molecule and -Determination of force constant of diatomic
molecule (Numericals) –Applications.
1
2.4 H NMR spectroscopy – Principle - Relation between field strength and frequency 3
- chemical shift - spin-spin splitting (spectral problems ) - coupling constant
(definition) - applications of NMR- including MRI (brief).

3 Instrumental Methods and Nanomaterials 9

3.1 Thermal analysis –TGA- Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) and 2

applications – TGA of CaC2O4.H2O and polymers. DTA-Principle, instrumentation
(block diagram) and applications - DTA of CaC2O4.H2O.
3.2 Chromatographic methods - Basic principles and applications of column and TLC- 2
Retention factor.

3.3 GC and HPLC-Principle, instrumentation (block diagram) - retention time and 2

applications.

3.4 Nanomaterials - Definition - Classification - Chemical methods of preparation - 3

Hydrolysis and Reduction - Applications of nanomaterials - Surface
characterisation -SEM – Principle and instrumentation (block diagram).

4 Stereochemistry and Polymer Chemistry 9

4.1 Isomerism-Structural, chain, position, functional, tautomerism and matamerism 2

- Definition with examples - Representation of 3D structures-Newman, Sawhorse,
Wedge and Fischer projection of substituted methane and ethane.
Stereoisomerism - Geometrical isomerism in double bonds and cycloalkanes (cis-
trans and E-Z notations).

4.2 R-S Notation – Rules and examples - Optical isomerism, Chirality, Enantiomers 1
and Diastereoisomers-Definition with examples.

4.3 Conformational analysis of ethane, butane, cyclohexane, mono and di methyl 2

substituted cyclohexane.

4.4 Copolymers - Definition - Types - Random, Alternating, Block and Graft 4

copolymers - ABS - preparation, properties and applications. Kevlar-preparation,
properties and applications. Conducting polymers - Doping -Polyaniline and
Polypyrrole - preparation properties and applications. OLED - Principle,
construction and advantages.

5 Water Chemistry and Sewage Water Treatment 9

5.1 Water characteristics - Hardness - Types of hardness- Temporary and Permanent 3

- Disadvantages of hard water -Units of hardness- ppm and mg/L -Degree of
hardness (Numericals) - Estimation of hardness-EDTA method (Numericals).
Water softening methods-Ion exchange process-Principle, procedure and
advantages. Reverse osmosis – principle, process and advantages.

5.2 Municipal water treatment (brief) - Disinfection methods - chlorination, ozone 2

andUV irradiation.

5.3 Dissolved oxygen (DO) -Estimation (only brief procedure-Winkler’s method), BOD 2
and COD-definition, estimation (only brief procedure) and significance
(Numericals).

5.4 Sewage water treatment - Primary, Secondary and Tertiary - Flow diagram - 2
Trickling filter and UASB process.
MAT VECTOR CALCULUS, CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of
102 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND Introduction
TRANSFORMS BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course introduces the concepts and applications of differentiation and integration of
vector valued functions, differential equations, Laplace and Fourier Transforms. The objective of this
course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with some advanced concepts and methods in
Mathematics which include the Calculus of vector valued functions, ordinary differential equations
and basic transforms such as Laplace and Fourier Transforms which are invaluable for any engineer’s
mathematical tool box. The topics treated in this course have applications in all branches of
engineering.

Prerequisite: Calculus of single and multi variable functions.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Compute the derivatives and line integrals of vector functions and learn their applications
CO 2 Evaluate surface and volume integrals and learn their inter-relations and applications.
CO 3 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear differential equation with constant
coefficients
CO 4 Compute Laplace transform and apply them to solve ODEs arising in engineering
CO 5 Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve problems arising in
engineering

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
2 8
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignments: Assignment should include specific problems highlighting the applications of the
methods introduced in this course in science and engineering.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Compute the derivatives and line integrals of vector functions and learn
their applications

1. How would you calculate the speed, velocity and acceleration at any instant of a particle moving
in space whose position vector at time 𝑡is 𝒓(𝑡)?

2. Find the work done by the force field 𝐹 = (𝑒 − 𝑦 )𝒊 + (cos 𝑦 + 𝑥 )on a particle that travels
once around the unit circle centred at origin having radius 1.

3. When do you say that a vector field is conservative? What are the implications if a vector field is
conservative?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Evaluate surface and volume integrals and learn their inter-relations and
applications

1. Write any one application each of line integral, double integral and surface integral.

2. Use the divergence theorem to find the outward flux of the vector field 𝐹(𝑥, 𝑦 , 𝑧) = 𝑧𝒌across the

𝑥 +𝑦 +𝑧 =𝑎

3. State Greens theorem. Use Green’s theorem to express the area of a plane region bounded by a
curve as a line integral.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous linear differential equation
with constant coefficients

1. If 𝑦 (𝑥) and 𝑦 (𝑥) are solutions of𝑦 + 𝑝𝑦 + 𝑞𝑦 = 0, where 𝑝, 𝑞 are constants, show that

𝑦 (𝑥) + 𝑦 (𝑥) is also a solution.

2. Solve the differential equation 𝑦 + 𝑦 = 0.001𝑥 using method of undetermined coefficient.

3. Solve the differential equation of𝑦 − 3𝑦 + 3𝑦 − 𝑦 = 𝑒 − 𝑥 − 1.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Compute Laplace transform and apply them to solve ODEs arising in
engineering

1. What is the inverse Laplace Transformof (𝑠) = ?

2. Find Laplace Transform of Unit step function.

3. Solve the differential equation of 𝑦 + 9𝑦 = 𝛿 𝑡 − ? Given 𝑦(0) = 2, 𝑦 (0) = 0

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve
problems arising in engineering

1. Find the Fourier integral representation of function defined by

𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for𝑥 > 0 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0for𝑥 < 0.

2. What are the conditions for the existence of Fourier Transform of a function 𝑓(𝑥)?

3. Find the Fourier transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = 1 for |𝑥| < 1 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0 otherwise.

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 102

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

VECTOR CALCULUS, DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS

(2019-Scheme)

(Common to all branches)

 PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. Is the vector 𝒓 where 𝒓 = 𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌 conservative. Justify your answer.

2. State Greens theorem including all the required hypotheses
3. What is the outward flux of 𝑭(𝒙, 𝒚, 𝒛) = 𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌 across any unit cube.
4. What is the relationship between Green’s theorem and Stokes theorem?
5. Solve 𝑦 + 4𝑦 + 2.5𝑦 = 0
6. Does the function 𝑦 = 𝐶 cos 𝑥 + 𝐶 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑥form a solution of𝑦 + 𝑦 = 0?. Is it the general
solution? Justify your answer.
7. Find the Laplace transform of 𝑒 sinh 4𝑡
8. Find the Laplace inverse transform of ( )
.

9. Given the Fourier transform 𝑒 of 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 , find the Fourier transform of 𝑥𝑒

√
10. State the convolution theorem for Fourier transform

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module. Each full question carries 14 marks)

MODULE 1

11a) Prove that the force field 𝑭 = 𝑒 𝒊 + 𝑥𝑒 𝒋is conservative in the entire xy-plane

b) Use Greens theorem to find the area enclosed by the ellipse + =1

12 a) Find the divergence of the vector field𝑭 = (𝒙𝟐 𝒚𝟐 𝒛𝟐 )𝟑/𝟐

(𝑥𝒊 + 𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧𝒌)

b) Find the work done by the force field𝑭(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧) = 𝑥𝑦𝒊 + 𝑦𝑧𝒋 + 𝑥𝑧𝒌along C where

C is the curve𝒓(𝑡) = 𝑡𝒊 + 𝑡 𝒋 + 𝑡 𝒌

MODULE II

13 a) Use divergence theorem to find the outward flux of the vector field

𝑭 = 2𝑥𝒊 + 3𝑦𝒋 + 𝑧 𝒌acrossthe unit cube bounded by or 𝑥 = 0, 𝑦 = 0,𝑧 = 0, 𝑥 =

1,𝑦 = 1,𝑧 = 1

b) Find the circulation of 𝑭 = (𝑥 − 𝑧)𝒊 + (𝑦 − 𝑥)𝒋 + (𝒛 − 𝒙𝒚)𝒌 using Stokes theorem

around the triangle with vertices 𝐴(1,0,0), 𝐵(0,2,0)and 𝐶(0,0,1)

14 a) Use divergence theorem to find the volume of the cylindrical solid bounded
by 𝑥 + 4𝑥 + 𝑦 = 7, 𝑧 = −1, 𝑧 = 4, given the vector field 𝑭 = 𝒙𝑖 + 𝒚𝑗 + 𝒛𝑘
across surfaceof the cylinder

b) Use Stokes theorem to evaluate∫𝑪 𝑭. 𝒅𝒓where𝑭 = 𝑥 𝒊 + 3𝑥𝒋 − 𝑦 𝒌where Cis

 the circle 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 1 in the xy- plane with counterclockwise orientation looking

down the positive z-axis

MODULE III

15 a) Solve 𝑦 + 4𝑦 + 4𝑦 = 𝑥 + 𝑒 cos 𝑥
b) Solve 𝑦 − 3𝑦 + 3𝑦 − 𝑦 = 𝑒 − 𝑥 − 1
16 a) Solve𝒚 + 𝟑𝑦 + 3𝑦 + 𝑦 = 30𝑒 given𝑦(0) = 3,𝑦 (0) = −3 , 𝑦 (0) = −47
b) Using method of variation of parameters, solve𝑦 + 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑥

MODULE IV

17 a) Find the inverse Laplace transform of 𝐹(𝑠) =

b) Solve the differential equation𝑦 + 16𝑦 = 4𝛿(𝑡 − 3𝜋); 𝑦(0) = 2,𝑦 (0) = 0 using Laplace
transform

18 a) Solve𝑦 + 3𝑦 + 2𝑦 = 𝑓(𝑡) where 𝑓(𝑡) = 1 for 0 < 𝑡 < 1 and 𝑓(𝑡) = 1for 𝑡 > 1
using Laplace transform

b) Apply convolution theorem to find the Laplace inverse transform of ( )

MODULE V

19 a) Find the Fourier cosine integral representation for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for 𝑥 > 0and
∞
𝑘 > 0 and hence evaluate ∫ the function

b) Does the Fourier sine transform 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 sin 𝑥for 0 < 𝑥 < ∞ exist? Justify your
answer

20 a) Find the Fourier transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = |𝑥 |for |𝑥| < 1 and 𝑓(𝑥) = 0 otherwise

b) Find the Fourier cosine transform of 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 for a> 0

 Syllabus

Module 1 (Calculus of vector functions)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 12.1, 12.2, 12.6, 13.6, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3)

Vector valued function of single variable, derivative of vector function and geometrical
interpretation, motion along a curve-velocity, speed and acceleration. Concept of scalar and vector
fields , Gradient and its properties, directional derivative , divergence and curl, Line integrals of
vector fields, work as line integral, Conservative vector fields , independence of path and potential
function(results without proof).

Module 2 ( Vector integral theorems)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 15.4, 15.5, 15.6, 15.7, 15.8)

Green’s theorem (for simply connected domains, without proof) and applications to evaluating line
integrals and finding areas. Surface integrals over surfaces of the form z = g(x, y), y = g(x, z) or x =
g(y, z) , Flux integrals over surfaces of the form z = g(x, y), y = g(x, z) or x = g(y, z), divergence
theorem (without proof) and its applications to finding flux integrals, Stokes’ theorem (without
proof) and its applications to finding line integrals of vector fields and work done.

Module- 3 ( Ordinary differential equations)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.10, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3)

Homogenous linear differential equation of second order, superposition principle,general solution,

homogenous linear ODEs with constant coefficients-general solution. Solution of Euler-Cauchy
equations (second order only).Existence and uniqueness (without proof). Non homogenous linear
ODEs-general solution, solution by the method of undetermined coefficients (for the right hand side
of the form 𝑥 ,𝑒 ,𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑥,𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑎𝑥,𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑥𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑎𝑥and their linear combinations), methods of
variation of parameters. Solution of higher order equations-homogeneous and non-homogeneous
with constant coefficient using method of undetermined coefficient.

Module- 4 (Laplace transforms)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 6.1,6.2,6.3,6.4,6.5)

Laplace Transform and its inverse ,Existence theorem ( without proof) , linearity,Laplace transform
of basic functions, first shifting theorem, Laplace transform of derivatives and integrals, solution of
differential equations using Laplace transform, Unit step function, Second shifting theorems. Dirac
delta function and its Laplace transform, Solution of ordinary differential equation involving unit
step function and Dirac delta functions. Convolution theorem(without proof)and its application to
finding inverse Laplace transform of products of functions.
Module-5 (Fourier Tranforms)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 11.7,11.8, 11.9)

Fourier integral representation, Fourier sine and cosine integrals. Fourier sine and cosine transforms,
inverse sine and cosine transform. Fourier transform and inverse Fourier transform, basic properties.
The Fourier transform of derivatives. Convolution theorem (without proof)

Text Books

1. H. Anton, I. Biven S.Davis, “Calculus”, Wiley, 10th edition, 2015.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Wiley, 10 th edition, 2015.

Reference Books

1. J. Stewart, Essential Calculus, Cengage, 2nd edition, 2017

2. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson,Reprint,
2002.

3. Peter O Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7th Edition, Thomson, 2007.

4. Louis C Barret, C Ray Wylie, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 6 th
edition, 2003.

5. VeerarajanT.”Engineering Mathematics for first year”, Tata McGraw - Hill, 2008.

6. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36 th edition , 2010.

7. Srimanta Pal, Subodh C. Bhunia, “Engineering Mathematics”, Oxford University Press, 2015.

8. Ronald N. Bracewell, “The Fourier Transform and its Applications”, McGraw – Hill
International Editions, 2000.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Calculus of vector functions (9 hours)

1.1 Vector valued function of a scalar variable - derivative of vector valued 2

function of scalar variable t-geometrical meaning

1.2 Motion along a curve-speed , velocity, acceleration 1

1.3 Gradient and its properties, directional derivative , divergent and curl 3

1.4 Line integrals with respect to arc length, line integrals of vector fields. 2
Work done as line integral

1.5 Conservative vector field, independence of path, potential function 1

2 Vector integral theorems( 9 hours)

2.1 Green’s theorem and it’s applications 2

2.2 Surface integrals , flux integral and their evaluation 3

2.3 Divergence theorem and applications 2

2.4 Stokes theorem and applications 2

3 Ordinary Differential Equations (9 hours)

3.1 Homogenous linear equation of second order, Superposition principle, 1

general solution

3.2 Homogenous linear ODEs of second order with constant coefficients 2

3.3 Second order Euler-Cauchy equation 1

3.4 Non homogenous linear differential equations of second order with 3

constant coefficient-solution by undetermined coefficients, variation of
parameters.

3.5 Higher order equations with constant coefficients 2

4 Laplace Transform (10 hours)

4.1 Laplace Transform , inverse Transform, Linearity, First shifting theorem, 2

transform of basic functions

4.2 Transform of derivatives and integrals 1

4.3 Solution of Differential equations, Initial value problems by Laplace 2

transform method.

4.4 Unit step function --- Second shifting theorem 2

4.5 Dirac Delta function and solution of ODE involving Dirac delta function 2

4.6 Convolution and related problems. 1

5 Fourier Transform (8 hours)

5.1 Fourier integral representation 1

5.2 Fourier Cosine and Sine integrals and transforms 2

5.3 Complex Fourier integral representation, Fourier transform and its 3

inverse transforms, basic properties

5.4 Fourier transform of derivatives, Convolution theorem 2

 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUS CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of
MAT Introduction
101 BSC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course introduces students to some basic mathematical ideas and tools which are at
the core of any engineering course. A brief course in Linear Algebra familiarises students with some
basic techniques in matrix theory which are essential for analysing linear systems. The calculus of
functions of one or more variables taught in this course are useful in modelling and analysing
physical phenomena involving continuous change of variables or parameters and have applications
across all branches of engineering.

Prerequisite: A basic course in one-variable calculus and matrix theory.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 solve systems of linear equations, diagonalize matrices and characterise quadratic forms
CO 2 compute the partial and total derivatives and maxima and minima of multivariable functions
CO 3 compute multiple integrals and apply them to find areas and volumes of geometrical shapes,
mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas
CO 4 perform various tests to determine whether a given series is convergent, absolutely
convergent or conditionally convergent
CO 5 determine the Taylor and Fourier series expansion of functions and learn their applications.
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
1 7
CO 1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 2 1 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 2

Assessment Pattern

Bloom’s Category Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Test 1 Test 2 Examination
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 10 10 20
Understand 20 20 40
Apply 20 20 40
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks
Assignments: Assignment should include specific problems highlighting the applications of the
methods introduced in this course in science and engineering.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Solve systems of linear equations, diagonalize matrices and characterise
quadratic forms
𝑥
1. A is a real matrix of order 3 × 3and 𝑋 = 𝑦 . What can you say about the solution of 𝐴𝑋 =
𝑧
0if rank of A is 1? 2 ?3?

3 0 2
2. Given𝐴 = 0 2 0 , find an orthogonal matrix 𝑃that diagonalizes A.
−2 0 0

3. Find out what type of conic section the following quadratic form represents

17𝑥 − 30𝑥 𝑥 + 17𝑥 = 128

−2 2 −3
4. The matrix 𝐴 = 2 1 −6 has an eigen value5 with corresponding Eigen vector𝑋 =
−1 −2 0
1
2 . Find 𝐴 𝑋
−1

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): compute the partial and total derivatives and maxima and minima of
multivariable functions

1. Find the slope of the surface 𝑧 = 𝑥 𝑦 + 5𝑦 in the x-direction at the point (1,-2)
 2. Given the function 𝑤 = 𝑥𝑦 + 𝑧, use chain rule to find the instantaneous rate of change of
𝑤at each point along the curve 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡, 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑡, 𝑧 = 𝑡

3. Determine the dimension of rectangular box open at the top , having a volume 32 cubic ft
and requiring the least amount of material for it’s construction.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): compute multiple integrals and apply them to find areas and volumes of
geometrical shapes, mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas.

1. Evaluate ∬ (𝑥 + 2𝑦) 𝐷𝐴where D is the region bounded by the parabolas 𝑦 = 2𝑥 and

𝑦 = 1+𝑥

2. Explain how you would find the volume under the surface 𝑧 = 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦)and over a specific
region 𝐷in the 𝑥𝑦plane using (i) double integral (ii) triple integral?

3. Find the mass and centre of gravity of a triangular lamina with vertices (0,0), (2,1), (0,3) if
the density function is 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥 + 𝑦

4. Use spherical coordinates to evaluate ∭ (𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 ) 𝑑𝑉where B is the unit ball

defined by 𝐵 = {(𝑥, 𝑦, 𝑧): 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 ≤ 1}

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): perform various tests to determine whether a given series is convergent,
absolutely convergent or conditionally convergent.

1. What is the difference between a sequence and a series and when do you say that they are
convergent? Divergent?

∞
2. Determine whether the series ∑ converges or diverges.

∞( )
3. Is the series ∑ convergent? Absolutely convergent? Conditionally convergent?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): determine the Taylor and Fourier series expansion of functions and learn
their applications.

1. Assuming the possibility of expansion find the Maclaurin series expansion of

𝑓(𝑥) = (1 + 𝑥) for|𝑥| < 1where 𝑘is any real number. What happens if 𝑘is a positive

integer?

2. Use Maclaurin series of 𝑙𝑛(1 + 𝑥), −1 < 𝑥 ≤ 1to find an approximate value of𝑙𝑛2.

3. Find the Fourier series of the function𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 , −2 ≤ 𝑥 < 2, 𝑓(𝑥 + 4) = 𝑓(𝑥). Hence
using Parseval’s identity prove that 1 + + + … =

4. Expand the function 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 (0 < 𝑥 < 1⁄2) into a (i) Fourier sine series (ii) Fourier cosine
series.
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 101

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

LINEAR ALGEBRA AND CALCULUs

(2019-Scheme)

(Common to all branches)

PART A

(Answer all questions, each question carries 3 marks)

1 2 −1
1. Determine the rank of the matrix 𝐴 = −2 −4 2 .
3 6 −3
2 0
2. Write down the eigen values of = . What are the eigen values of 𝑃 𝐴𝑃 where
0 −1
−4 2
𝑃= ?
3 −1
3. Find 𝑓 (1,3) and 𝑓 (1,3) for the function 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 2𝑥 𝑦 + 2𝑦 + 4𝑥.
4. Show that the function 𝑢(𝑥, 𝑡) = sin (𝑥 − 𝑐𝑡) is a solution of the equation =𝑐
.
5. Use double integral to find the area of the region enclosed between the parabolas 𝑦 = 𝑥
and the line 𝑦 = 2𝑥.
6. Use polar coordinates to evaluate the area of the region bounded by 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 4, the line
𝑦 = 𝑥 and the y axis in the first quadrant
7. Test the convergence of the series ∑∞ .
8. Test the convergence of the alternating series ∑∞ (−1) using Leibnitz test.
9. Find the Taylor series expansion of 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜋𝑥about𝑥 = .
10. Find the values to which the Fourier series of

𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥for−𝜋 < 𝑥 < 𝜋, with 𝑓(𝑥 + 2𝜋) = 𝑓(𝑥) converges (10x3=30)
 PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I
11. (a) Solve the following system of equations
𝑦 + 𝑧 − 2𝑤 = 0
2𝑥 − 3𝑦 − 3𝑧 + 6𝑤 = 2
4𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 − 2𝑤 = 4
−2 2 −3
(b) Find the eigen values and eigen vectors of the matrix 2 1 −6
−1 −2 0
−1 2 −2
12. (a) Diagonalize the matrix 2 4 1
2 1 4
(b) What kind of conic section the quadratic form3𝑥 + 22𝑥 𝑥 + 3𝑥 = 0 represents?
Transform it to principal axes.
Module - II
13. (a) Find the local linear approximation to 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥 + 𝑦 at the point (3, 4).Use it to
approximate 𝑓(3.04,3.98)
(b) Let 𝑤 = 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 , 𝑥 = 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃, 𝑧 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝜃. Use chain rule to find when
𝜃= .
14. (a) Let 𝑧 = 𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) where 𝑥 = 𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃, 𝑦 = 𝑟𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃, prove that
+ = + .
(b) Locate all relative maxima, relative minima and saddle points
𝑓(𝑥, 𝑦) = 𝑥𝑦 + + (𝑎 ≠ 0, 𝑏 ≠ 0).
Module - III
15. (a) Evaluate∬ (2𝑥 𝑦 + 9𝑦 ) 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦 where D is the region bounded by 𝑦 = 𝑥 and 𝑦 = 2√𝑥
(b) Evaluate ∫ ∫ 𝑒 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦 changing the order of integration.
√
16. (a) Find the volume of the solid bounded by the cylinder 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 4 and the planes
𝑦 + 𝑧 = 4 and 𝑧 = 0..
(b) Evaluate ∭ 1 − 𝑥 − 𝑦 − 𝑧 𝑑𝑥𝑑𝑦𝑑𝑧, taken throughout the volume of
the sphere 𝑥 + 𝑦 + 𝑧 = 1, by transforming to spherical polar coordinates

Module - IV
17. (a) Test the convergence of the series
(i) ∑∞ (ii) ∑∞
!

( )!
(b) Determine the convergence or divergence of the series ∑∞ (−1)

( )!
18. (a) Check whether the series ∑∞ (−1) ( )!
is absolutely convergent, conditionally
convergent or divergent.
 . . . . . .
(b) Test the convergence of the series 1 + .
+ . .
+ . . .
+⋯

Module - V
19. (a) Obtain the Fourier series of for𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑒 , in the interval 0 < 𝑥 < 2𝜋.with 𝑓 𝑥 +
( )
2𝜋 = 𝑓(𝑥). Hence deduce the value of∑∞ .
𝑖𝑓 0 < 𝑥 <
(b) Find the half range sine series of 𝑓(𝑥) = ( )
𝑖𝑓 <𝑥<𝐿
20. (a)Expand (1 + 𝑥) .as a Taylor series about 𝑥 = 0and state the region of convergence of
the series.

(b) Find the Fourier series for 𝑓(𝑥) = 𝑥 in the interval −𝜋 < 𝑥 < 𝜋

with 𝑓(𝑥 + 2𝜋) = 𝑓(𝑥).Hence show that + + +⋯ = . (14X5=70)

Syllabus

Module 1 (Linear algebra)

(Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 8.1,8.3,8.4)

Systems of linear equations, Solution by Gauss elimination, row echelon form and rank of a matrix,
fundamental theorem for linear systems (homogeneous and non-homogeneous, without proof),
Eigen values and eigen vectors. Diagonaliztion of matrices, orthogonal transformation, quadratic
forms and their canonical forms.

Module 2 (multivariable calculus-Differentiation)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 13.3, 13.4, 13.5, 13.8)

Concept of limit and continuity of functions of two variables, partial derivatives, Differentials, Local
Linear approximations, chain rule, total derivative, Relative maxima and minima, Absolute maxima
and minima on closed and bounded set.

Module 3(multivariable calculus-Integration)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.5, 14.6, 14.8)

Double integrals (Cartesian), reversing the order of integration, Change of coordinates (Cartesian to
polar), finding areas and volume using double integrals, mass and centre of gravity of
inhomogeneous laminas using double integral. Triple integrals, volume calculated as triple integral,
triple integral in cylindrical and spherical coordinates (computations involving spheres, cylinders).
Module 4 (sequences and series)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 9.1, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6)

Convergence of sequences and series, convergence of geometric series and p-series(without proof),
test of convergence (comparison, ratio and root tests without proof); Alternating series and Leibnitz
test, absolute and conditional convergence.

Module 5 (Series representation of functions)

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 9.8, 9.9. Text 2: Relevant topics from sections 11.1, 11.2,
11.6 )

Taylor series (without proof, assuming the possibility of power series expansion in appropriate
domains), Binomial series and series representation of exponential, trigonometric, logarithmic
functions (without proofs of convergence); Fourier series, Euler formulas, Convergence of Fourier
series (without proof), half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem (without proof).

Text Books

1. H. Anton, I. Biven,S.Davis, “Calculus”, Wiley, 10th edition, 2015.

2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10 thEdition, John Wiley & Sons, 2016.

Reference Books

1. J. Stewart, Essential Calculus, Cengage, 2nd edition, 2017

2. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9 th Edition, Pearson, Reprint,
2002.

3. Peter V. O'Neil, Advanced Engineering Mathematics , Cengage, 7th Edition, 2012

4. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.

5. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 36 Edition, 2010.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Linear Algebra (10 hours)

1.1 Systems of linear equations, Solution by Gauss elimination 1

1.2 Row echelon form, finding rank from row echelon form, fundamental 3
theorem for linear systems

1.3 Eigen values and eigen vectors 2

1.4 Diagonaliztion of matrices, orthogonal transformation, quadratic forms 4

 and their canonical forms.

2 Multivariable calculus-Differentiation (8 hours)

2.1 Concept of limit and continuity of functions of two variables, partial 2

derivatives

2.2 Differentials, Local Linear approximations 2

2.3 Chain rule, total derivative 2

2.4 Maxima and minima 2

3 Multivariable calculus-Integration (10 hours)

3.1 Double integrals (Cartesian)-evaluation 2

3.2 Change of order of integration in double integrals, change of coordinates 2

(Cartesian to polar),

3.3 Finding areas and volumes, mass and centre of gravity of plane laminas 3

3.4 Triple integrals 3

4 Sequences and series (8 hours)

4.1 Convergence of sequences and series, geometric and p-series 2

4.2 Test of convergence( comparison, ratio and root ) 4

4.3 Alternating series and Leibnitz test, absolute and conditional convergence 2

5 Series representation of functions (9 hours)

5.1 Taylor series, Binomial series and series representation of exponential, 3

trigonometric, logarithmic functions;

5.2 Fourier series, Euler formulas, Convergence of Fourier series(Dirichlet’s 3

conditions)

5.3 Half range sine and cosine series, Parseval’s theorem. 3

 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
110 GRAPHICS ESC 2 0 2 3 2019

Preamble: To enable the student to effectively perform technical communication through graphical
representation as per global standards.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Draw the projection of points and lines located in different quadrants

CO 2 Prepare multiview orthographic projections of objects by visualizing them in different
positions
CO 3 Draw sectional views and develop surfaces of a given object
CO 4 Prepare pictorial drawings using the principles of isometric and perspective projections to
visualize objects in three dimensions.
CO 5 Convert 3D views to orthographic views
CO 6 Obtain multiview projections and solid models of objects using CAD tools

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 3 1
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2
CO 6 3 3 3

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 End Semester Examination
( 15 Marks) (15 Marks) (100 Marks)
Remember
Understand 5 20
Apply 10 10 80
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
CIA for section A carries 25 marks (15 marks for 1 test and Class work 10 marks)
CIA for section B carries 15 marks (10 marks for 1 test and Class work 5 marks)

End Semester Examination Pattern:

ESE will be of 3 hour duration on A4 size answer booklet and will be for 100 marks. The question
paper shall contain two questions from each module of Section A only. Student has to answer any
one question from each module. Each question carries 20 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions

(Questions may be framed based on the outline given under each course outcome)

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Locate points in different quadrants as per given conditions.
2. Problems on lines inclined to both planes .
3. Find True length, Inclinations and Traces of lines.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Draw orthographic views of solids and combination solids
2. Draw views of solids inclined to any one reference plane.
3. Draw views of solids inclined to both reference planes.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Draw views of solids sectioned by a cutting plane
2. Find location and inclination of cutting plane given true shape of the section
3. Draw development of lateral surface of solids and also its sectioned views
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Draw Isometric views/projections of soilds
2. Draw Isometric views/projections of combination of soilds
3. Draw Perspective views of Soilds
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Draw Orthographic views of solids from given three dimensional view
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Draw the given figure including dimensions using 2D software
2. Create 3D model using modelling software from the given orthographic views or 3D figure or
from real 3D objects

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 110

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

Instructions: Retain necessary Construction lines

Show necessary dimensions
Answer any ONE question from each module
Each question carries 20 marks

MODULE I
1. The end point A of a line is 20mm above HP and 10mm in front of VP. The other end of the line is
50mm above HP and 15mm behind VP. The distance between the end projectors is 70mm. Draw
the projections of the line. Find the true length and true inclinations of the line with the principal
planes. Also locate the traces of the line.
2. One end of a line is 20mm from both the principal planes of projection. The other end of the line
is 50mm above HP and 40mm in front of VP. The true length of the line is 70mm. Draw the
projections of the line. Find its apparent inclinations, elevation length and plan length. Also
locate its traces.
MODULE II
3. A pentagonal pyramid of base side 25mm and height 40mm, is resting on the ground on one of
its triangular faces. The base edge of that face is inclined 30o to VP. Draw the projections of the
solid.
4. A hexagonal prism has side 25mm and height 50mm has a corner of its base on the ground and
the long edge containing that corner inclined at 30o to HP and 45o to VP. Draw the projections of
the solid.
MODULE III
5. A triangular prism of base side 40mm and height 70mm is resting with its base on the ground
and having an edge of the base perpendicular to VP. Section the solid such that the true shape of
the section is a trapezium of parallel sides 30mm and 10mm. Draw the projections showing the
true shape. Find the inclination of the cutting plane with the ground plane.
6. Draw the development of a pentagonal pyramid of base side 30mm and height 50mm. A string is
wound from a corner of the base round the pyramid and back to the same point through the
shortest distance. Show the position of the string in the elevation and plan.
MODULE IV
7. The frustum of a cone has base diameter 50mm and top diameter 40mm has a height of 60mm.
It is paced centrally on top of a rectangular slab of size 80x60mm and of thickness 20mm. Draw
the isometric view of the combination.
8. A hexagonal prism has base side 35mm and height 60mm. A sphere of diameter 40mm is
placed centrally on top of it. Draw the isometric projection of the combination.
MODULE V
9. Draw the perspective view of a pentagonal prism, 20mm side and 45mm long lying on one of its
rectangular faces on the ground and having its axis perpendicular to picture plane. One of its
pentagonal faces touches the picture plane and the station point is 50mm in front of PP, 25mm
above the ground plane and lies in a central plane, which is 70mm to the left of the center of the
prism.
10. Draw three orthographic views with dimensions of the object shown in figure below.

(20X5=100)
 Time : 3 hours EST110 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Max. Marks: 100

SCHEME OF VALUATION
1. Locating the points and drawing the projections of the line – 4 marks
Finding true length by any one method – 6 marks
Finding true inclination with VP – 2 marks
Finding true inclination with HP – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
2. Locating the points and drawing true length of the line – 4 marks
Finding projections by any method – 6 marks
Finding length of elevation and plan – 2 marks
Finding apparent inclinations – 2 marks
Locating horizontal trace – 2 marks
Locating vertical trace – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
3. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used.
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

4. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

First inclination views – 4 marks
Second inclination views -8 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Any one method or combination of methods for solving can be used
If initial position is wrong then maximum 50% marks may be allotted for the answer)

5. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks

Locating section plane as per given condition – 5 marks
Drawing true shape -5 marks
Finding inclination of cutting plane – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
6. Drawing initial position plan and elevation – 4 marks
Development of the pyramid – 6 marks
 Locating string in development -2 marks
Locating string in elevation – 3 marks
Locating string in plan – 3 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
7. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks
Isometric View of Slab -6 marks
Isometric View of Frustum – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.
Reduce 4 marks if Isometric scale is taken)

8. Drawing initial positions – 4 marks

Isometric scale – 4 marks
Isometric projection of prism -5 marks
Isometric projection of sphere – 5 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
(Initial position is optional, hence redistribute if needed.

9. Drawing the planes and locating the station point – 4 marks

Locating elevation points – 2 marks
Locating plan points – 2 marks
Drawing the perspective view – 10 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
10. Drawing the elevation – 8marks
Drawing the plan – 4 marks
Drawing the side view – 4 marks
Marking invisible edges – 2 marks
Dimensioning and neatness – 2 marks
Total = 20 marks
 SYLLABUS

General Instructions:
 First angle projection to be followed
 Section A practice problems to be performed on A4 size sheets
 Section B classes to be conducted on CAD lab

SECTION A
Module 1
Introduction : Relevance of technical drawing in engineering field. Types of lines, Dimensioning, BIS
code of practice for technical drawing.
Orthographic projection of Points and Lines: Projection of points in different quadrants, Projection of
straight lines inclined to one plane and inclined to both planes. Trace of line. Inclination of lines with
reference planes True length of line inclined to both the reference planes.

Module 2
Orthographic projection of Solids: Projection of Simple solids such as Triangular, Rectangle, Square,
Pentagonal and Hexagonal Prisms, Pyramids, Cone and Cylinder. Projection of solids in simple
position including profile view. Projection of solids with axis inclined to one of the reference planes
and with axis inclined to both reference planes.

Module 3
Sections of Solids: Sections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone, Cylinder with axis in vertical position and cut
by different section planes. True shape of the sections. Also locating the section plane when the
true shape of the section is given.
Development of Surfaces: Development of surfaces of the above solids and solids cut by different
section planes. Also finding the shortest distance between two points on the surface.

Module 4
Isometric Projection: Isometric View and Projections of Prisms, Pyramids, Cone , Cylinder, Frustum of
Pyramid, Frustum of Cone, Sphere, Hemisphere and their combinations.

Module 5
Perspective Projection: Perspective projection of Prisms and Pyramids with axis perpendicular to the
ground plane, axis perpendicular to picture plane.
Conversion of Pictorial Views: Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views.

SECTION B
(To be conducted in CAD Lab)
Introduction to Computer Aided Drawing: Role of CAD in design and development of new products,
Advantages of CAD. Creating two dimensional drawing with dimensions using suitable software.
(Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Introduction to Solid Modelling: Creating 3D models of various components using suitable modelling
software. (Minimum 2 exercises mandatory)
Text Books
1. Bhatt, N.D., Engineering Drawing, Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
2. John, K.C. Engineering Graphics, Prentice Hall India Publishers.
Reference Books

1. Anilkumar, K.N., Engineering Graphics, Adhyuth narayan Publishers

2. Agrawal, B. And Agrawal, C.M., Engineering Darwing, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers.
3. Benjamin, J., Engineering Graphics, Pentex Publishers- 3 rd Edition, 2017
4. Duff, J.M. and Ross, W.A., Engineering Design and Visualisation, Cengage Learning.
5. Kulkarni, D.M., Rastogi, A.P. and Sarkar, A.K., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI.
6. Luzaddff, W.J. and Duff, J.M., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, PHI.
7. Varghese, P.I., Engineering Graphics, V I P Publishers
8. Venugopal, K., Engineering Drawing and Graphics, New Age International Publishers.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

No SECTION A No. of
Hours

1 MODULE I

1.1 Introduction to graphics, types of lines, Dimensioning 1

1.2 Concept of principle planes of projection, different quadrants, locating points 2

on different quadrants

1.3 Projection of lines, inclined to one plane. Lines inclined to both planes, 2
trapezoid method of solving problems on lines.

1.4 Problems on lines using trapezoid method 2

1.5 Line rotation method of solving, problems on line rotation method 2

2 MODULE II

2.1 Introduction of different solids, Simple position plan and elevation of solids 2

2.2 Problems on views of solids inclined to one plane 2

2.3 Problems on views of solids inclined to both planes 2

2.4 Practice problems on solids inclined to both planes 2

3 MODULE III

3.1 Introduction to section planes. AIP and AVP. Principle of locating cutting 2
points and finding true shape

3.2 Problems on sections of different solids 2

3.3 Problems when the true shape is given 2

3.4 Principle of development of solids, sectioned solids 2

4 MODULE IV

4.1 Principle of Isometric View and Projection, Isometric Scale. Problems on 2

simple solids

4.2 Isometric problems on Frustum of solids, Sphere and Hemisphere 2

4.3 Problems on combination of different solids 2

5 MODULE V

5.1 Introduction to perspective projection, different planes, station point etc. 2

Perspective problems on pyramids

5.2 Perspective problems on prisms 2

5.3 Practice on conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views 2

SECTION B (To be conducted in CAD lab)

1 Introduction to CAD and software. Familiarising features of 2D software. 2

Practice on making 2D drawings

2 Practice session on 2D drafting 2

3 Introduction to solid modelling and software 2

4 Practice session on 3D modelling 2

 EST ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT Year of Introduction
100 MECHANICS ESC 2 1 0 3 2019

Preamble: Goal of this course is to expose the students to the fundamental concepts of mechanics
and enhance their problem-solving skills. It introduces students to the influence of applied force
system and the geometrical properties of the rigid bodies while stationary or in motion. After this
course students will be able to recognize similar problems in real-world situations and respond
accordingly.
Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO 1 Recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics

CO 2 Identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body

Apply the conditions of equilibrium to various practical problems involving different force
CO 3 system.

CO 4 Choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

CO 5 Solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and masses

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes (Minimum requirement)

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12

CO 1 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 3 - - - - - - - - - -

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

Bloom’s Category Test 1 (Marks) Test 2 (Marks) End Semester Examination (Marks)
Remember 10 10 15
Understand 10 10 15
Apply 30 30 70
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

marks marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contain 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Part A
Course Outcome 1 (CO1): (One question from each module to meet the course objective 1: To
recall principles and theorems related to rigid body mechanics)
1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic friction

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module to meet the course objective 2: To
identify and describe the components of system of forces acting on the rigid body)

1. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

2. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

3. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

Part B

All the questions under this section shall assess the learning levels corresponding to the course
outcomes listed below.
 To apply the conditions of equilibrium to variou
variouss practical problems involving different force
CO 3
system.

CO 4 To choose appropriate theorems, principles or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, applying the properties of distributed areas and
CO 5 masses

1. Two rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane and a vertical wall. Find the
reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume all the surfaces to be smooth.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium Applying – (Sketch the free
CO 3 to various practical problems involving body diagram that represent 4
different force system. equilibrium state of the body )

To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the equations

CO 4 principles or formulae to solve and formulae required for 4
problems of mechanics. calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid Applying ( Solve the problem

CO 5 bodies, applying the properties of based on the descriptions given 6
distributed areas and masses in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

2. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and cm thickness, is in contact with a horizontal conveyor belts
running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of contact determine (i)
angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor changes to 8 m/s. Also
compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both cases.
 Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Sketch the
CO 3 various practical problems involving different free body diagram that 4
force system. represent state of the
body )
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles or
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in CO3
and masses
and CO4)

Total 14

3. Determine the centroid of the given section

Course Marks
outcome Description of course outcome Learning level assessed allocat
identifier ed
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the
CO 3 various practical problems involving computation of centroid for 4
different force system. the given geometrical shape)
To choose appropriate theorems, Applying (Choose the
CO 4 principles or formulae to solve problems equations and formulae 4
of mechanics. required for calculation)

To solve problems involving rigid bodies, Applying ( Solve the problem 6

CO 5
applying the properties of distributed based on the descriptions
 areas and masses given in CO3 and CO4)

Total 14

4. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC.

Course
Description of course outcome Marks
outcome Learning level assessed
allocated
identifier
To apply the conditions of equilibrium to Applying – (Illustrate the 4

CO 3 various practical problems involving different computation of moment

force system. of inertia for the given
geometrical shape)
Applying (Choose the
To choose appropriate theorems, principles
CO 4 equations and formulae 4
or formulae to solve problems of mechanics.
required for calculation)

Applying ( Solve the

To solve problems involving rigid bodies,
problem based on the
CO 5 applying the properties of distributed areas 6
descriptions given in
and masses
CO3 and CO4)

Total 14
 Model Question Paper

QP CODE:
Reg No.:_______________
Name:__________________________ ___

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 100

ENGINEERING MECHANICS

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Part A

(Answer all questions; each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain D’Alembert’s principle

2. Distinguish static and dynamic frictioni.

3. State and explain perpendicular axis theorem.

4. A simply supported beam AB of span 5 m is carrying point loads 5 kN, 3 kN and 2 kN at 1m, 3m
and 4m respectively from support A. Calculate the support reaction at B.

5. A gymnast holding onto a bar, is suspended motionless in mid-air. The bar is supported by two
ropes that attach to the ceiling. Diagram the forces acting on the combination of gymnast and bar

6. While you are riding your bike, you turn a corner following a circular arc. Illustrate the forces that
act on your bike to keep you along the circular path ?

7. Compare damped and undamped free vibrations.

8. State the equation of motion of a rotating rigid body, rotating about its fixed axis.

9. Illustrate the significance of instantaneous centre in the analysis of rigid body undergoing
rotational motion.

10. Highlight the principles of mechanics applied in the evaluation of elastic collusion of rigid bodies.

PART B

(Answer one full question from each module, each question carries 14 marks)

Module -I

11. Two identical rollers each of weight 100 N are supported by an inclined plane, making an angle
of 30o with the vertical, and a vertical wall. Find the reaction at the points of contact A, B, C. Assume
all the surfaces to be smooth. (14 marks)
 C
A
B

12. A string tied to a wall is made to pass over a pulley placed 2m away from it. A weight P is
attached to the string such that the string stretches by 2m from the support on the wall to the
location of attachment of weight. Determine the force P required to maintain 200 kg body in
position for  = 30o, The diameter of pulley B is negligible. (14 marks)

Module – 2
13. Two blocks A & B are resting against a wall and the floor as shown in figure below. Find the
value of horizontal force P applied to the lower block that will hold the system in equilibrium.
Coefficient of friction are : 0.25 at the floor, 0.3 at the wall and 0.2 between the blocks.
(14 marks)

14. A beam is hinged at A and roller supported at B. It is acted upon by loads as shown below.
Find the reactions at A & B. (14 marks)

Module – 3
15. A rectangular hole is made in a triangular section as shown. Find moment of inertia about the
section x-x passing through the CG of the section and parallel to BC. (14 marks)
16. Support A has ball and socket connection. Roller support at B prevents motion in the —z
direction. Corner C is tied to D by a rope. The triangle is weightless. Determine the unknown force
components acting at A, B, and C. (14 marks)

Module - 4

17. A cricket ball is thrown by a fielder from a height of 2m at an angle of 300 to the horizontal with
an initial velocity of 20 m/s , hits the wickets at a height of 0.5 m from the ground. How far was the
fielder from the wicket? (14 marks)

18. An engine of weight 500 kN pull a train weighing 1500 kN up an incline of 1 in 100. The train
starts from rest and moves with constant acceleration against a resistance of 5 N/kN. It attains a
maximum speed of 36 kmph in 1 km distance. Determine the tension in the coupling between train
and engine and the traction force developed by the engine. (14marks)

Module – 5

19. A cylindrical disc, 50 cm diameter and 10 cm thickness having mass of 10 kg, is in contact with a
horizontal conveyor belt running at uniform speeds of 5 m/s. Assuming there is no slip at points of
contact determine (i) angular velocity of disc (ii) Angular acceleration of disc if velocity of conveyor
changes to 8 m/s in 10 seconds. Also compute the moment acting about the axis of the disc in both
cases. (14 marks)

20. A wheel rotating about fixed axis at 20 rpm is uniformly accelerated for 70 seconds during which
time it makes 50 revolutions. Find the (i) angular velocity at the end of this interval and (ii) time
required for the velocity to reach 100 revolutions per minute. (14 marks)
 SYLLABUS
Module 1
Introduction to Engineering Mechanics-statics-basic principles of statics-Parallelogram law,
equilibrium law, principles of superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction(review)
free body diagrams.
Concurrent coplanar forces-composition and resolution of forces-resultant and equilibrium
equations – methods of projections – methods of moments – Varignon’s Theorem of moments.

Module 2
Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of single bodies –wedges, ladder-
analysis of connected bodies .
Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre of parallel forces – equilibrium
of parallel forces – Simple beam subject to concentrated vertical loads. General coplanar force
system - resultant and equilibrium equations.

Module 3
Centroid of composite areas- – moment of inertia-parallel axis and perpendicular axis theorems.
Polar moment of inertia,radius of gyration,mass moment of inertia-ring,cylinder and disc.
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus(demonstration only)
Forces in space - vectorial representation of forces, moments and couples –resultant and equilibrium
equations – concurrent forces in space (simple problems only)

Module 4
Dynamics – rectilinear translation - equations of kinematics(review)
kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle. – motion on horizontal and inclined
surfaces, motion of connected bodies. Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation
(concepts only).
Curvilinear translation - equations of kinematics –projectile motion(review), kinetics – equation of
motion. Moment of momentum and work energy equation (concepts only).

Module 5
Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body rotating about a fixed axis –
rotation under a constant moment.
Plane motion of rigid body – instantaneous centre of rotation (concept only).
Simple harmonic motion – free vibration –degree of freedom- undamped free vibration of spring
mass system-effect of damping(concept only)

Text Books
1. Timoshenko and Young, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill Publishers
2. Shames, I. H., Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India.
3. R. C. Hibbeler and Ashok Gupta, Engineering Mechanics, Vol. I statics, Vol II Dynamics, Pearson
Education.
References
1. Merriam J. L and Kraige L. G., Engineering Mechanics - Vols. 1 and 2, John Wiley.
2. Tayal A K, Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications
3. Bhavikkatti, S.S., Engineering Mechanics, New Age International Publishers
4. F.P.Beer abd E.R.Johnston (2011), Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Vol.I-Statics, Vol.II-Dynamics,
9th Ed, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, Engineering Mechanics - Statics and Dynamics, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
Module Topic outcomes
Hours
addressed

1 Module 1 Total: 7

Introduction to engineering mechanics – introduction on statics and

dynamics - Basic principles of statics – Parellogram law, equilibrium CO1 and
1.1 1
law – Superposition and transmissibility, law of action and reaction CO2
(review the topics)

Free body diagrams.

Degree of freedom-types of supports and nature of reactions -
1.2 CO1 and 1
exercises for free body diagram preparation – composition and
CO2
resolution of forces, resultant and equilibrium equations (review the
topics) - numerical exercises for illustration.
Concurrent coplanar forces - analysis of concurrent forces -methods CO1 and
1.3 of projections – illustrative numerical exercise – teacher assisted 1
CO2
problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent forces -methods of moment-Varignon’s CO1 and
1.4 Theorem of Moments - illustrative numerical exercise– teacher 1
CO2
assisted problem solving.
Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4
1.5 1
Session I. and CO5

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4 1

1.6 and CO5
Session II – learning review quiz.

Analysis of concurrent force systems – extended problem solving - CO3,CO4

1.7 and CO5 1
Session III.
2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Friction – sliding friction - Coulomb’s laws of friction – analysis of CO1 and 1
single bodies –illustrative examples on wedges and ladder-teacher CO2
 assisted problem solving tutorials using problems from wedges and
ladder.
2.2 Problems on friction - analysis of connected bodies. illustrative CO3, CO4 1
numerical exercise– teacher assisted problem solving. and CO5

2.3 Problems on friction-extended problem solving CO3,C04 1

and CO5
2.4 Parallel coplanar forces – couple - resultant of parallel forces – centre CO1 and 1
of parallel forces – equilibrium of parallel forces – Simple beam CO2
subject to concentrated vertical loads.
2.5 General coplanar force system - resultant and equilibrium equations - CO1 and 1
illustrative examples- teacher assisted problem solving. CO2

2.6 General coplanar force system-resultant and equilibrium equations - CO3, CO4 1
illustrative examples and CO5
2.7 General coplanar force system - Extended problem solving - Quiz to CO3, CO4 1
evaluate learning level. and CO5
3 Module 3 Total: 7

3.1 Centroid of simple and regular geometrical shapes – centroid of CO1 and
figures in combination - composite areas- examples for illustration – CO2 1
problems for practice to be done by self.
3.2 Moment of inertia- parallel axis theorem –examples for illustration - CO1 and
1
problems for practice to be done by self. CO2

3.3 Moment of inertia - perpendicular axis theorem - example for CO1 and
illustration to be given as hand out and discussion on the solved CO2 1
example.
3.4 Solutions to practice problems – problems related to centroid and CO3, CO4 1
moment of inertia - problems for practice to be done by self. and CO5
3.5 Polar moment of inertia, Radius of gyration. CO1 and
1
Mass moment of inertia of ring, cylinder and uniform disc. CO2
Theorem of Pappus Guldinus - Demonstration
3.6 Introduction to forces in space – vectorial representation of forces, CO1,and
moments and couples – simple problems to illustrate vector CO2 1
representations of forces, moments and couples to be done in class.
3.7 Solution to practice problems - resultant and equilibrium equations
for concurrent forces in space – concurrent forces in space - 2 simple CO3,CO4 1
problems to illustrate the application of resultant and equilibrium and CO5
equations for concurrent forces in space.
4 Module 4 Total: 7
 Introduction to dynamics – review of rectilinear translation - CO1 and
4.1 equations of kinematics – problems to review the concepts – CO2 1
additional problems involving extended application as exercises .

Solutions to exercises with necessary explanation given as hand out –

introduction to kinetics – equation of motion – D’Alembert’s principle CO1 and
4.2 1
– illustration of the concepts using one numerical exercise from CO2
motion on horizontal and inclined surfaces.
Motion of connected bodies - example for illustration to be given as CO3, CO4 1
4.3 hand out and discussion on the solved example – problems for and CO5
practice to be done by self.
4.4 Motion of connected bodies-extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Curvilinear translation - Review of kinematics –projectile motion – 1
simple problems to review the concepts – introduction to kinetics – CO3, CO4
4.5
equation of motion – illustration of the concepts using numerical & CO5
exercises.

4.6 Extended problem solving – rectilinear and curvilinear translation. CO3, CO4 1
& CO5
Concepts on Impulse momentum equation and work energy equation 1
(rectilinear translation – discussions to bring out difference between
4.7 CO1 and
elastic and inelastic collusions).
CO2
Concepts on Moment of momentum and work energy equation
(curvilinear translation).
5 Module 5 Total: 7

Rotation – kinematics of rotation- equation of motion for a rigid body CO1 and 1
5.1 rotating about a fixed axis – simple problems for illustration. CO2
Rotation under a constant moment – teacher assisted problem 1
5.2 solving. CO3,CO4
and CO5
5.3 Rotation under a constant moment - extended problem solving. CO3, CO4 1
and CO5
Plane motion of rigid body- instantaneous centre of rotation (concept CO1 and 1
5.4
only). CO2

Introduction to harmonic oscillation –free vibrations - simple 1

harmonic motion – differential equation and solution.
CO1 and
5.5 Degree of freedom – examples of single degree of freedom (SDOF) CO2
systems – Idealisation of mechanical systems as spring-mass systems
(concept only).
 SDOF spring mass system –equation of motion – undamped free 1
vibration response - concept of natural frequency. CO1 and
5.6 Free vibration response due to initial conditions. CO2
Simple problems on determination of natural frequency and free
vibration response to test the understanding level.
Free vibration analysis of SDOF spring-mass systems – Problem solving CO1and 1
5.7
Effect of damping on free vibration response (concept only). CO2
HUN PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
102 MNC 2 0 2 --

Preamble: Clear, precise, and effective communication has become a sine qua non in today's
information-driven world given its interdependencies and seamless connectivity. Any aspiring
professional cannot but master the key elements of such communication. The objective of this
course is to equip students with the necessary skills to listen, read, write, and speak so as to
comprehend and successfully convey any idea, technical or otherwise, as well as give them the
necessary polish to become persuasive communicators.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop vocabulary and language skills relevant to engineering as a profession

CO 2 Analyze, interpret and effectively summarize a variety of textual content
CO 3 Create effective technical presentations
CO 4 Discuss a given technical/non-technical topic in a group setting and arrive at
generalizations/consensus
CO 5 Identify drawbacks in listening patterns and apply listening techniques for specific needs
CO 6 Create professional and technical documents that are clear and adhering to all the
necessary conventions

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 1 3
CO 3 1 1 3
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 1 2 3
CO 6 1 1 1 3

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 50 50 2 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation
Total Marks: 50
Attendance : 10 marks
Regular assessment : 25 marks
Series test (one test only, should include verbal aptitude for placement and higher studies, this test
will be conducted for 50 marks and reduced to 15) : 15 marks
Regular assessment
Project report presentation and Technical presentation through PPT : 7.5 marks
Listening Test : 5 marks
Group discussion/mock job interview : 7.5 marks
Resume submission : 5 marks

End Semester Examination

Total Marks: 50, Time: 2 hrs.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List down the ways in which gestures affect verbal communication.
2. Match the words and meanings
Ambiguous promotion
Bona fide referring to whole
Holistic not clear
Exaltation genuine
3. Expand the following Compound Nouns - a. Water supply. b. Object recognition. c. Steam
turbine
Course Outcome 2 (CO2)
1. Read the passage below and prepare notes:
Mathematics, rightly viewed, possesses not only truth, but supreme beauty—a beauty cold and
austere, like that of sculpture, without appeal to any part of our weaker nature, without the
gorgeous trappings of painting or music, yet sublimely pure, and capable of a stern perfection such
as only the greatest art can show. The true spirit of delight, the exaltation, the sense of being more
than man, which is the touchstone of the highest excellence, is to be found in mathematics as surely
as in poetry. What is best in mathematics deserves not merely to be learnt as a task, but to be
assimilated as a part of daily thought, and brought again and again before the mind with ever-
renewed encouragement. Real life is, to most men, a long second-best, a perpetual compromise
between the ideal and the possible; but the world of pure reason knows no compromise, no
practical limitations, no barrier to the creative activity embodying in splendid edifices the passionate
aspiration after the perfect from which all great work springs. Remote from human passions, remote
even from the pitiful facts of nature, the generations have gradually created an ordered cosmos,
where pure thought can dwell as in its natural home, and where one, at least, of our nobler impulses
can escape from the dreary exile of the actual world.
So little, however, have mathematicians aimed at beauty, that hardly anything in their work has had
this conscious purpose. Much, owing to irrepressible instincts, which were better than avowed
beliefs, has been moulded by an unconscious taste; but much also has been spoilt by false notions of
what was fitting. The characteristic excellence of mathematics is only to be found where the
reasoning is rigidly logical: the rules of logic are to mathematics what those of structure are to
architecture. In the most beautiful work, a chain of argument is presented in which every link is
important on its own account, in which there is an air of ease and lucidity throughout, and the
premises achieve more than would have been thought possible, by means which appear natural and
inevitable. Literature embodies what is general in particular circumstances whose universal
significance shines through their individual dress; but mathematics endeavours to present whatever
is most general in its purity, without any irrelevant trappings.
How should the teaching of mathematics be conducted so as to communicate to the learner as much
as possible of this high ideal? Here experience must, in a great measure, be our guide; but some
maxims may result from our consideration of the ultimate purpose to be achieved.
- From "On the teaching of mathematics" – Bertrand Russell

2. Enumerate the advantages and disadvantages of speed reading. Discuss how it can impact
comprehension.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. What are the key elements of a successful presentation?

2. Elucidate the importance of non-verbal communication in making a presentation
3. List out the key components in a technical presentation.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Discuss: 'In today's world, being a good listener is more important than being a good
Speaker.'
2. Listen to a video/live group discussion on a particular topic, and prepare a brief summary of
the proceedings.
3. List the do's and don'ts in a group discussion.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Watch a movie clip and write the subtitles for the dialogue.
2. What do you mean by barriers to effective listening? List ways to overcome each of these.
3. What are the different types of interviews? How are listening skills particularly important in
Skype/telephonic interviews?
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Explain the basic structure of a technical report.
2. You have been offered an internship in a much sought-after aerospace company and are
very excited about it. However, the dates clash with your series tests. Write a letter to the
Manager – University Relations of the company asking them if they can change the dates to
coincide with your vacation.
3. You work in a well-reputed aerospace company as Manager – University Relations. You are
in charge of offering internships. A student has sent you a letter requesting you to change
the dates allotted to him since he has series exams at that time. But there are no vacancies
available during the period he has requested for. Compose an e-mail informing him of this
and suggest that he try to arrange the matter with his college.
 Syllabus

Module 1

Use of language in communication: Significance of technical communication Vocabulary

Development: technical vocabulary, vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports, sequence
words, misspelled words, compound words, finding suitable synonyms, paraphrasing, verbal
analogies. Language Development: subject-verb agreement, personal passive voice, numerical
adjectives, embedded sentences, clauses, conditionals, reported speech, active/passive voice.

Technology-based communication: Effective email messages, slide presentations, editing skills using
software. Modern day research and study skills: search engines, repositories, forums such as Git
Hub, Stack Exchange, OSS communities (MOOC, SWAYAM, NPTEL), and Quora; Plagiarism

Module 2

Reading, Comprehension, and Summarizing: Reading styles, speed, valuation, critical reading,
reading and comprehending shorter and longer technical articles from journals, newspapers,
identifying the various transitions in a text, SQ3R method, PQRST method, speed reading.
Comprehension: techniques, understanding textbooks, marking and underlining, Note-taking:
recognizing non-verbal cues.

Module 3

Oral Presentation: Voice modulation, tone, describing a process, Presentation Skills: Oral
presentation and public speaking skills, business presentations, Preparation: organizing the material,
self-Introduction, introducing the topic, answering questions, individual presentation practice,
presenting visuals effectively.

Debate and Group Discussions: introduction to Group Discussion (GD), differences between GD and
debate; participating GD, understanding GD, brainstorming the topic, questioning and clarifying, GD
strategies, activities to improve GD skills

Module 4

Listening and Interview Skills Listening: Active and Passive listening, listening: for general content, to
fill up information, intensive listening, for specific information, to answer, and to understand.
Developing effective listening skills, barriers to effective listening, listening to longer technical talks,
listening to classroom lectures, talks on engineering /technology, listening to documentaries and
making notes, TED talks.

Interview Skills: types of interviews, successful interviews, interview etiquette, dress code, body
language, telephone/online (skype) interviews, one-to-one interview & panel interview, FAQs
related to job interviews
 Module 5

Formal writing: Technical Writing: differences between technical and literary style. Letter Writing
(formal, informal and semi formal), Job applications, Minute preparation, CV preparation
(differences between Bio-Data, CV and Resume), and Reports. Elements of style, Common Errors in
Writing: describing a process, use of sequence words, Statements of Purpose, Instructions,
Checklists.

Analytical and issue-based Essays and Report Writing: basics of report writing; Referencing Style
(IEEE Format), structure of a report; types of reports, references, bibliography.

Lab Activities

Written: Letter writing, CV writing, Attending a meeting and Minute Preparation, Vocabulary
Building
Spoken: Phonetics, MMFS (Multimedia Feedback System), Mirroring, Elevator Pitch, telephone
etiquette, qualities of a good presentation with emphasis on body language and use of visual aids.
Listening: Exercises based on audio materials like radio and podcasts. Listening to Song. practice and
exercises.
Reading: Speed Reading, Reading with the help of Audio Visual Aids, Reading Comprehension Skills
Mock interview and Debate/Group Discussion: concepts, types, Do’s and don’ts- intensive practice

Reference Books

1. English for Engineers and Technologists (Combined edition, Vol. 1 and 2), Orient Blackswan 2010.
2. Meenakshi Raman and Sangeetha Sharma,”Technical Communication: Principles and Practice”, 2nd
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011
th
3. Stephen E. Lucas, "The Art of Public Speaking", 10 Edition; McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
nd
4. Ashraf Rizvi, "Effective Technical Communication", 2 Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017.
th
5. William Strunk Jr. & E.B. White, "The Elements of Style", 4 Edition, Pearson, 1999.
6. David F. Beer and David McMurrey, Guide to writing as an Engineer, John Willey. New York, 2004.
7. Goodheart-Willcox, "Professional Communication", First Edition , 2017.
8. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson Education, India, 6 edition,
2015.
9. The Ace of Soft Skills: Attitude, Communication and Etiquette for Success, Pearson Education; 1
edition, 2013.
10. Anand Ganguly, “Success in Interview”, RPH, 5th Edition, 2016.
11. Raman Sharma, “Technical Communications”, Oxford Publication, London, 2004.
 CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
HUN LIFE SKILLS INTRODUCTION
101 MNC 2 0 2 --- 2019

Preamble: Life skills are those competencies that provide the means for an individual to be
resourceful and positive while taking on life's vicissitudes. Development of one's personality by being
aware of the self, connecting with others, reflecting on the abstract and the concrete, leading and
generating change, and staying rooted in time-tested values and principles is being aimed at. This
course is designed to enhance the employability and maximize the potential of the students by
introducing them to the principles that underly personal and professional success, and help them
acquire the skills needed to apply these principles in their lives and careers.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Define and Identify different life skills required in personal and professional life
CO 2 Develop an awareness of the self and apply well-defined techniques to cope with emotions
and stress.
CO 3 Explain the basic mechanics of effective communication and demonstrate these through
presentations.
CO 4 Take part in group discussions
CO 5 Use appropriate thinking and problem solving techniques to solve new problems
CO 6 Understand the basics of teamwork and leadership

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 2 1 2 2 1 3
CO 2 3 2
CO 3 1 1 3
CO 4 3 1
CO 5 3 2 1
CO 6 1 3

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 50 50 2 hours
Continuous Internal Evaluation
Total Marks: 50

Attendance : 10 marks
Regular assessment : 15 marks
Series test (one test only, should include first three modules) : 25 marks

Regular assessment

 Group Discussion (Marks: 9)

Create groups of about 6 students each and engage them on a GD on a suitable topic
for about 20 minutes. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows:

 Communication Skills : 3 marks

 Subject Clarity : 2 marks
 Group Dynamics : 2 marks
 Behaviours & Mannerisms : 2 marks

 Presentation Skills (Marks: 6)

Identify a suitable topic and ask the students to prepare a presentation (preferably a
power point presentation) for about 10 minutes. Parameters to be used for
evaluation are as follows:

 Communication Skills : 2 marks

 Platform Skills : 2 marks
 Subject Clarity/Knowledge : 2 marks

End Semester Examination

Total Marks: 50 Time: 2 hrs.

Part A: Short answer question (25 marks)

There will be one question from each MODULE (five questions in total, five marks each). Each
question should be written in about maximum of 400 words. Parameters to be used for evaluation
are as follows:
(i) Content Clarity/Subject Knowledge
(ii) Presentation style
(iii) Organization of content

Part B: Case Study (25 marks)

The students will be given a case study with questions at the end. The students have to analyze the
case and answer the question at the end. Parameters to be used for evaluation are as follows:
(i) Analyze the case situation
(ii) Key players/characters of the case
(iii) Identification of the problem (both major & minor if exists)
(iv) Bring out alternatives
(v) Analyze each alternative against the problem
(vi) Choose the best alternative
(vii) Implement as solution
(viii) Conclusion
 (ix) Answer the question at the end of the case

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. List 'life skills' as identified by WHO

2. What do you mean by effective communication?

3. What are the essential life skills required by a professional?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2)

1. Identify an effective means to deal with workplace stress.

2. How can a student apply journaling to stress management?

3. What is the PATH method? Describe a situation where this method can be used effectively.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. Identify the communication network structure that can be observed in the given situations.
Describe them.

(a) A group discussion on development.

(b) An address from the Principal regarding punctuality.

(c) A reporter interviewing a movie star.

(d) Discussing the answers of a test with a group of friends.

2. Elucidate the importance of non-verbal communication in making a presentation

3. Differentiate between kinesics, proxemics, and chronemics with examples.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. How can a participant conclude a group discussion effectively?

2. 'Listening skills are essential for effectively participating in a group discussion.' Do you
agree? Substantiate your answer.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate the creative thinking process with the help of a suitable example

2. Translate the following problem from verbal to graphic form and find the solution : In a quiz,
Ananth has 50 points more than Bimal, Chinmay has 60 points less than Ananth, and Dharini
is 20 points ahead of Chinmay. What is the difference in points between Bimal and Dharini?
 3. List at least five ways in which the problem "How to increase profit?" can be redefined

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. A group of engineers decided to brainstorm a design issue on a new product. Since no one
wanted to disagree with the senior members, new ideas were not flowing freely. What
group dynamics technique would you suggest to avoid this 'groupthink'? Explain the
procedure.

2. “A group focuses on individual contribution, while a team must focus on synergy.” Explain.

3. Identify the type of group formed / constituted in each of the given situations

a) A Police Inspector with subordinates reporting to him

b) An enquiry committee constituted to investigate a specific incident

c) The Accounts Department of a company

d) A group of book lovers who meet to talk about reading

Syllabus

Module 1

Overview of Life Skills: Meaning and significance of life skills, Life skills identified by WHO: Self-
awareness, Empathy, Critical thinking, Creative thinking, Decision making, problem solving, Effective
communication, interpersonal relationship, coping with stress, coping with emotion.

Life skills for professionals: positive thinking, right attitude, attention to detail, having the big
picture, learning skills, research skills, perseverance, setting goals and achieving them, helping
others, leadership, motivation, self-motivation, and motivating others, personality development, IQ,
EQ, and SQ

Module 2

Self-awareness: definition, need for self-awareness; Coping With Stress and Emotions, Human
Values, tools and techniques of SA: questionnaires, journaling, reflective questions, meditation,
mindfulness, psychometric tests, feedback.

Stress Management: Stress, reasons and effects, identifying stress, stress diaries, the four A's of
stress management, techniques, Approaches: action-oriented, emotion-oriented, acceptance-
oriented, resilience, Gratitude Training,

Coping with emotions: Identifying and managing emotions, harmful ways of dealing with emotions,
PATH method and relaxation techniques.
Morals, Values and Ethics: Integrity, Civic Virtue, Respect for Others, Living Peacefully. Caring,
Sharing, Honesty, Courage, Valuing Time, Time management, Co operation, Commitment, Empathy,
Self-Confidence, Character, Spirituality, Avoiding Procrastination, Sense of Engineering Ethics.

Module 3

21st century skills: Creativity, Critical Thinking, Collaboration, Problem Solving, Decision Making,
Need for Creativity in the 21st century, Imagination, Intuition, Experience, Sources of Creativity,
Lateral Thinking, Myths of creativity, Critical thinking Vs Creative thinking, Functions of Left Brain &
Right brain, Convergent & Divergent Thinking, Critical reading & Multiple Intelligence.

Steps in problem solving: Problem Solving Techniques, Six Thinking Hats, Mind Mapping, Forced
Connections. Analytical Thinking, Numeric, symbolic, and graphic reasoning. Scientific temperament
and Logical thinking.

Module 4

Group and Team Dynamics: Introduction to Groups: Composition, formation, Cycle, thinking,
Clarifying expectations, Problem Solving, Consensus, Dynamics techniques, Group vs Team, Team
Dynamics, Virtual Teams. Managing team performance and managing conflicts, Intrapreneurship.

Module 5

Leadership: Leadership framework, entrepreneurial and moral leadership, vision, cultural

dimensions. Growing as a leader, turnaround leadership, managing diverse stakeholders, crisis
management. Types of Leadership, Traits, Styles, VUCA Leadership, Levels of Leadership,
Transactional vs Transformational Leaders, Leadership Grid, Effective Leaders.

Lab Activities

Verbal

Effective communication and Presentation skills.

Different kinds of communication; Flow of communication; Communication networks, Types of
barriers; Miscommunication
Introduction to presentations and group discussions.
Learning styles: visual, aural, verbal, kinaesthetic, logical, social, solitary; Previewing, KWL table,
active listening, REAP method
Note-taking skills: outlining, non-linear note-taking methods, Cornell notes, three column note
taking.
Memory techniques: mnemonics, association, flashcards, keywords, outlines, spider diagrams and
mind maps, spaced repetition.
Time management: auditing, identifying time wasters, managing distractions, calendars and
checklists; Prioritizing - Goal setting, SMART goals; Productivity tools and apps, Pomodoro technique.

Non Verbal:
Non-verbal Communication and Body Language: Forms of non-verbal communication; Interpreting
body-language cues; Kinesics; Proxemics; Chronemics; Effective use of body language,
Communication in a multi cultural environment.
Reference Books
1. Shiv Khera, You Can Win, Macmillan Books, New York, 2003.
2. Barun K. Mitra, “Personality Development & Soft Skills”, Oxford Publishers, Third impression,
2017.
3. ICT Academy of Kerala, "Life Skills for Engineers", McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Ltd.,
2016.
4. Caruso, D. R. and Salovey P, “The Emotionally Intelligent Manager: How to Develop and Use
the Four Key Emotional Skills of Leadership”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
5. Kalyana, “Soft Skill for Managers”; First Edition; Wiley Publishing Ltd, 2015.
6. Larry James, “The First Book of Life Skills”; First Edition, Embassy Books, 2016.
7. Shalini Verma, “Development of Life Skills and Professional Practice”; First Edition; Sultan
Chand (G/L) & Company, 2014.
8. Daniel Goleman, "Emotional Intelligence"; Bantam, 2006.
9. Remesh S., Vishnu R.G., "Life Skills for Engineers", Ridhima Publications, First Edition, 2016.
10. Butterfield Jeff, “Soft Skills for Everyone”, Cengage Learning India Pvt Ltd; 1 edition, 2011.
11. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson Education, India;
6 edition, 2015.
12. The Ace of Soft Skills: Attitude, Communication and Etiquette for Success, Pearson
Education; 1 edition, 2013.
 EST BASICS OF CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:

Objective of this course is to provide an insight and inculcate the essentials of Civil Engineering
discipline to the students of all branches of Engineering and to provide the students an
illustration of the significance of the Civil Engineering Profession in satisfying the societal needs.

To introduce the students to the basic principles of mechanical engineering

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After completion of the course, the student will be able to

Recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil
CO 1 Engineering.

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and

CO 2 building construction

CO 3 Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and
CO 4
ramps
Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
CO 5 buildings.

CO 6 Analyse thermodynamic cycles and calculate its efficiency

CO 7 Illustrate the working and features of IC Engines

CO 8 Explain the basic principles of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

CO 9 Describe the working of hydraulic machines

CO 10 Explain the working of power transmission elements

CO 11 Describe the basic manufacturing, metal joining and machining processes

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO1 3 - - - - 3 2 2 - - - -
CO2 3 2 - 1 3 - - 3 - - - -
CO3 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
 CO4 3 2 - - 3 - - - 2 - - -
CO5 3 2 - - 3 2 3 - 2 - - -

CO6 3 2

CO7 3 1

CO8 3 1

CO9 3 2

CO10 3 1

CO11 3

Assessment Pattern

Basic Civil Engineering Basic Mechanical Engineering

End End Semester
Bloom’s Category Semester Continuous Examination
Continuous Assessment
Examination Assessment (marks)
Test 1 Test 2 (marks) Test 1 Test 2
marks marks marks marks
Remember 5 5 10 7.5 7.5 15
Understand 20 20 40 12.5 12.5 25
Apply 5 5 10
Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE (Marks) ESE (Marks) ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Civil Engineering and Part II – Basic Mechanical Engineering.
Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester examination, part I contain 2 parts -
Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks each (not exceeding 2 questions from
each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module out of which one to be answered. Each
question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-divisions. The pattern for end semester
examination for part II is same as that of part I. However, student should answer both part I and
part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions:

Course Outcome CO1: To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various
disciplines of Civil Engineering.

1.Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the country.
Course outcome 2 (CO2) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction
1. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.

Course outcome 3 (CO3) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

1. Explain the importance of surveying in Civil Engineering

Course outcome 4 (CO4) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps

1. Explain the civil engineering aspects of elevators, escalators and ramps in buildings

Course outcome 5 (CO5) (One question from each module and not more than two)

Discuss the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

1. Discuss the relevance of Green building in society

Section II Answer any 1 full question from each module. Each full question carries 10 marks

Course Outcome 1 (CO1) (Two full question from each module and each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions)

To recall the role of civil engineer in society and to relate the various disciplines of Civil Engineering
CO Questions

1. a List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five sentences.
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure.
2. a.What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the infrastructural
framework.
 b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2) & Course Outcome 3 (CO3) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Explain different types of buildings, building components, building materials and building
construction & Describe the importance, objectives and principles of surveying.

CO Questions

1. a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use.
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five.
2. a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction.
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying

Course outcome 4 (CO4) & Course outcome 5 (CO5) (Two full question from each module and
each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions)

Summarise the basic infrastructure services MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps & Discuss
the Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green buildings.

CO Questions

1. a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings

2. a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing.

b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35 oC, 0.1
MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii) Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK
2. A Carnot cycle works with adiabatic compression ratio of 5 and isothermal expansion ratio of 2.
The volume of air at the beginning of isothermal expansion is 0.3 m3. If the maximum
temperature and pressure is limited to 550K and 21 bar, determine the minimum temperature
in the cycle and efficiency of the cycle.
3. In an ideal diesel cycle, the temperature at the beginning and end of compression is 65oC and
620oC respectively. The temperature at the beginning and end of the expansion is 1850oC and
850 oC. Determine the ideal efficiency of the cycle.
 4. Explain the concepts of CRDI and MPFI in IC Engines.
Course Outcome 7 (CO7)
1. With the help of a neat sketch explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine
2. Compare the working of 2 stroke and 4 stroke IC engines
3. Explain the classification of IC Engines.
Course Outcome 8(CO8):
1. Explain the working of vapour compression refrigeration system.
2. With the help of suitable sketch explain the working of a split air conditioner.
3. Define: COP, specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature.
Course Outcome 9 (CO9):
1. Explain the working of a single stage centrifugal pump with sketches.
2. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a reciprocating pump.
3. A turbine is to operate under a head of 25 m at 200 rpm. The discharge is 9 m3/s. If the overall
efficiency of the turbine is 90%. Determine the power developed by the turbine.
Course Outcome 10 (CO10):
1. Explain the working of belt drive and gear drive with the help of neat sketches
2. Explain a single plate clutch.
3. Sketch different types of gear trains and explain.

Course Outcome 11 (CO11):

1. Describe the operations which can be performed using drilling machine.
2. Explain the functions of runners and risers used in casting.
3. With a neat sketch, explain the working and parts of a lathe.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: EST120 page:3

Reg No:__________________

Name:____________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 120

Course Name: BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

 PART I: BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING

PART A

(Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks)

1. Explain relevance of Civil engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the

country.
2. Discuss the difference between plinth area and carpet area.
3. Explain different types of steel with their properties.
4. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use?
5. Define bearing capacity of soil.
(5 x 4 = 20)

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6a. List out the types of building as per occupancy. Explain any two, each in about five
sentences. (5)
b. Discuss the components of a building with a neat figure. (5)
OR
7a. What are the major disciplines of civil engineering and explain their role in the
infrastructural framework. (5)
b. Explain the role of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms in building rules and regulations prevailing in our
country. (5)

MODULE II

8a. What are the different kinds of cement available and what is their use. (5)
b. List the properties of good building bricks. Explain any five. (5)
OR
9a. List and explain any five modern construction materials used for construction. (5)
b. Explain the objectives and principles of surveying (5)

MODULE III

10a. Draw the elevation and plan of one brick thick wall with English bond (5)
b. Explain the energy systems and water management in Green buildings (5)
OR
11a. Draw neat sketch of the following foundations: (i) Isolated stepped footing;
(ii) Cantilever footing; and (iii) Continuous footing. (5)
b. Discuss the civil engineering aspect of MEP and HVAC in a commercial building (5)

[10 x 3 = 30]
 PART II: BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions. Each question carries 4 marks

1. Sketch the P-v and T-s diagram of a Carnot cycle and List the processes.
2. Illustrate the working of an epicyclic gear train.
3. Explain cooling and dehumidification processes.
4. Differentiate between soldering and brazing.
5. Explain the principle of Additive manufacturing.
4 x 5 = 20 marks

Part B

Answer one full question from each module.

MODULE I

6. In an air standard Otto cycle the compression ratio is 7 and compression begins at 35oC,
0.1MPa. The maximum temperature of the cycle is 1100oC. Find
i) Heat supplied per kg of air,
ii) Work done per kg of air,
iii)Cycle efficiency
Take Cp = 1.005 kJ/kgK and Cv=0.718 kJ/kgK 10 marks

OR

7. a) Explain the working of a 4 stroke SI engine with neat sketches. 7 marks

b) Explain the fuel system of a petrol engine. 3 marks

MODULE II

8. a) Explain the working of a vapour compression system with help of a block

diagram. 7 marks
b) Define: Specific humidity, relative humidity and dew point temperature. 3 marks
OR
9. With the help of a neat sketch, explain the working of a centrifugal pump. 10 marks

MODULE III

10. Explain the two high, three high, four high and cluster rolling mills with neat
sketches. 10 marks
OR

11. a) Describe the arc welding process with a neat sketch. 6 marks
b) Differentiate between up-milling and down-milling operations. 4 marks
 SYLLABUS

Module 1
General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil Engineering in the overall
infrastructural development of the country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment. Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like Transportation
Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and
Environmental Engineering.
Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for buildings, components of a
residential building and their functions.
Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms (brief discussion only).
Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and floor area ratio for a building as
per KBR.

Module 2

Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles.

Construction materials, Conventional construction materials: types, properties and uses of building
materials: bricks, stones, cement, sand and timber
Cement concrete: Constituent materials, properties and types.
Steel: Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
Modern construction materials:- Architectural glass, ceramics, Plastics, composite materials,
thermal and acoustic insulating materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials. Modern uses
of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief discussion only).

Module 3
Building Construction: Foundations: Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions of
foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only). Load bearing and framed structures
(concept only).
Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & Flemish bond random rubble masonry.
Roofs and floors: - Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only).
Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, elevators, escalators and ramps (Civil Engineering aspects
only), fire safety for buildings.
Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management and environment for green
buildings. (brief discussion only).
Module 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, Diesel cycles, Derivation of efficiency of these
cycles, Problems to calculate heat added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency. IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-
Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of different types of IC Engines. Efficiencies of IC
Engines(Definitions only), Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, MPFI.
Concept of hybrid engines.
 Module 5
Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle,COP, vapour compression cycle (only
description and no problems); Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity
and relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and central air conditioners.
Description about working with sketches of: Reciprocating pump, Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine,
Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine. Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output
power of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)
Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear and Gear trains, Single plate
clutches.

Module 6
Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing processes – Sand Casting, Forging,
Rolling, Extrusion and their applications.
Metal Joining Processes: List types of welding, Description with sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering
and Brazing and their applications
Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding.
Description about working with block diagram of: Lathe, Drilling machine, Milling machine, CNC
Machine. Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing.

Text Books:

1. Rangwala, S. C., Essentials of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing House

2. Mckay, W.B. and Mckay, J. K., Building Construction, Volumes 1 to 4, Pearson India
Education Services

References Books:

1. Chen W.F and Liew J Y R (Eds), The Civil Engineering Handbook. II Edition CRC Press (Taylor
and Francis)
2. Chudley, R and Greeno R, Building construction handbook, Addison Wesley, Longman group,
England
3. Chudley, R, Construction Technology, Vol. I to IV, Longman group, England Course Plan
4. Kandya A A, Elements of Civil Engineering, Charotar Publishing house
5. Mamlouk, M. S., and Zaniewski, J. P., Materials for Civil and Construction Engineering, Pearson
Publishers
6. Rangwala S.C and Dalal K B Building Construction Charotar Publishing house
7. Clifford, M., Simmons, K. and Shipway, P., An Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Part I -
CRC Press
8. Roy and Choudhary, Elements of Mechanical Engineering, Media Promoters &Publishers Pvt.
Ltd., Mumbai.
9. Sawhney, G. S., Fundamentals of Mechanical Engineering, PHI
10. G Shanmugam, M S Palanichamy, Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering, McGraw Hill
Education; First edition, 2018
11. Benjamin,J.,Basic Mechanical Engineering,Pentex Books,9th Edition,2018
12. Balachandran, P.Basic Mechanical Engineering,Owl Books
Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

Course
No. of
No Topic outcomes
Lectures
addressed

1 Module I Total: 7

General Introduction to Civil Engineering: Relevance of Civil

Engineering in the overall infrastructural development of the
1.1 CO1 1
country. Responsibility of an engineer in ensuring the safety of
built environment.

Brief introduction to major disciplines of Civil Engineering like

Transportation Engineering, Structural Engineering, Geo-technical
1.2 CO1 2
Engineering, Water Resources Engineering and Environmental
Engineering.

Introduction to buildings: Types of buildings, selection of site for

1.3 CO2 2
buildings, components of a residential building and their functions.

Building rules and regulations: Relevance of NBC, KBR & CRZ norms
1.4 (brief discussion only) CO2 1

Building area: Plinth area, built up area, floor area, carpet area and
1.5 CO2 1
floor area ratio for a building as per KBR.

2 Module 2 Total: 7

2.1 Surveying: Importance, objectives and principles. CO3 1

2.2 Bricks: - Classification, properties of good bricks, and tests on CO2 1

bricks

Stones: - Qualities of good stones, types of stones and their uses.

2.3 Cement: - Good qualities of cement, types of cement and their CO2 1
uses.

Sand: - Classification, qualities of good sand and sieve analysis

2.4 (basics only). CO2 1
Timber: - Characteristics, properties and uses.

2.5 Cement concrete: - Constituent materials, properties and types, CO2 1

Steel: - Steel sections and steel reinforcements, types and uses.
 Modern construction materials: - Architectural glass, ceramics,
plastics, composite materials, thermal and acoustic insulating
2.6 materials, decorative panels, waterproofing materials, modern CO2 2
uses of gypsum, pre-fabricated building components (brief
discussion only)
3 Module 3 Total: 7

Foundations: - Bearing capacity of soil (definition only), functions

of foundations, types – shallow and deep (brief discussion only).
3.1 Brick masonry: - Header and stretcher bond, English bond & CO2 2
Flemish bond– elevation and plan (one & one and a half brick wall
only).
Random rubble masonry.

3.2 Roofs: Functions, types; roofing materials (brief discussion only) CO2 2
Floors: Functions, types; flooring materials (brief discussion only)

3.3 Basic infrastructure services: MEP, HVAC, Elevators, escalators and CO4 2
ramps (Civil Engineering aspects only) fire safety for buildings

3.4 Green buildings:- Materials, energy systems, water management CO5 1

and environment for green buildings. (brief discussion only)

4 MODULE 4

Analysis of thermodynamic cycles: Carnot, Otto, and Diesel cycle- 4

4.1 Derivation of efficiency of these cycles, Problems to calculate heat
added, heat rejected, net work and efficiency

IC Engines: CI, SI, 2-Stroke, 4-Stroke engines. Listing the parts of 2

4.2 different types of IC Engines, efficiencies of IC Engines(Description
only)

Air, Fuel, cooling and lubricating systems in SI and CI Engines, CRDI, 2

4.3
MPFI. Concept of hybrid engines

5 MODULE 5

Refrigeration: Unit of refrigeration, reversed Carnot cycle, COP, vapour 1

5.1
compression cycle (only description and no problems)

Definitions of dry, wet & dew point temperatures, specific humidity and 1
5.2 relative humidity, Cooling and dehumidification, Layout of unit and
central air conditioners.
 Description about working with sketches : Reciprocating pump, 4
Centrifugal pump, Pelton turbine, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbine.
5.3
Overall efficiency, Problems on calculation of input and output power
of pumps and turbines (No velocity triangles)

Description about working with sketches of: Belt and Chain drives, Gear 3
5.4
and Gear trains, Single plate clutches

6 MODULE 6

Manufacturing Process: Basic description of the manufacturing 2

6.1 processes – Sand Casting, Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and their
applications.

Metal Joining Processes :List types of welding, Description with 1

6.2
sketches of Arc Welding, Soldering and Brazing, and their applications

Basic Machining operations: Turning, Drilling, Milling and Grinding 3

6.3 Description about working with block diagrams of: Lathe, Drilling
machine, Milling machine, CNC Machine

6.4 Principle of CAD/CAM, Rapid and Additive manufacturing 1

 EST BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
130 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION
ESC 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble:
This course aims to (1) equip the students with an understanding of the fundamental principles of
electrical engineering(2) provide an overview of evolution of electronics, and introduce the working
principle and examples of fundamental electronic devices and circuits (3) provide an overview of
evolution of communication systems, and introduce the basic concepts in radio communication.

Prerequisite: Physics and Mathematics (Pre-university level)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Apply fundamental concepts and circuit laws to solve simple DC electric circuits
CO 2 Develop and solve models of magnetic circuits
CO 3 Apply the fundamental laws of electrical engineering to solve simple ac circuits in steady
state
CO 4 Describe working of a voltage amplifier
CO 5 Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system
CO 6 Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 2 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 4 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 6 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
Assessment Pattern

Basic Electrical Engineering Basic Electronics Engineering

Bloom’s Category Continuous End Semester Continuous End Semester
Assessment Tests Examination Assessment Tests Examination
Test 1 Test 2 (Marks) Test 1 Test 2 (Marks)
(Marks) (Marks) (Marks) (Marks)
Remember 0 0 10 10 10 20
Understand 12.5 12.5 20 15 15 30
Apply 12.5 12.5 20
Analyse
Evaluate
Create
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE marks ESE marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test (2 numbers) : 25 marks
Assignment/Quiz/Course project : 15 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part I – Basic Electrical Engineering and
Part II – Basic Electronics Engineering. Part I and PART II carries 50 marks each. For the end semester
examination, part I contain 2 parts - Part A and Part B. Part A contain 5 questions carrying 4 marks
each (not exceeding 2 questions from each module). Part B contains 2 questions from each module
out of which one to be answered. Each question carries 10 mark and can have maximum 2 sub-
divisions. The pattern for end semester examination for part II is same as that of part I. However,
student should answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Solve problems based on current division rule.

2. Solve problems with Mesh/node analysis.

3. Solve problems on Wye-Delta Transformation.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Problems on series magnetic circuits

2. Problems on parallel magnetic circuits

3. Problems on composite magnetic ciruits

4. Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. problems on self inductance, mutual inductance and coefficient of coupling

2. problems on rms and average values of periodic waveforms

3. problems on series ac circuits

4. Compare star and Delta connected 3 phase AC systems.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe working of a voltage amplifier

1.What is the need of voltage divider biasing in an RC coupled amplifier?

2. Define operating point in the context of a BJT amplifier.

3. Why is it required to have a voltage amplifier in a public address system?

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Outline the principle of an electronic instrumentation system

1. Draw the block diagram of an electronic instrumentation system.

2. What is a transducer?

3. Explain the working principle of operation of digital multimeter.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Explain the principle of radio and cellular communication

1. What is the working principle of an antenna when used in a radio transmitter?

2. What is the need of two separate sections RF section and IF section in a super heterodyne
receiver?

3. What is meant by a cell in a cellular communication?

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: Pages: 3

Reg No.:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 130

Course Name: BASICS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 hours

Answer both part I and part 2 in separate answer booklets

PART I

BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Calculate the current through the 4  resistor in the circuit shown, applying current
division rule:
2. Calculate the RMS and average values of a purely sinusoidal current having peak value
15A.

3. An alternating voltage of (80+j60)V is applied to an RX circuit and the current flowing

through the circuit is (-4+j10)A. Calculate the impedance of the circuit in rectangular and
polar forms. Also determine if X is inductive or capacitive.

4. Derive the relation between line and phase values of voltage in a three phase star
connected system.

5. Compare electric and magnetic circuits. (5x4=20)

PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 1

6. . Calculate the node voltages in the circuit shown, applying node analysis:

7. (a) State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws. (4 marks)

(b) Calculate the current through the galvanometer (G) in the circuit shown:

(6 marks)
 Module 2

8. (a) State and explain Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction with examples. (4 marks)

(b) Differentiate between statically and dynamically induced emf. A conductor of length
0.5m moves in a uniform magnetic field of flux density 1.1T at a velocity of 30m/s.
Calculate the emf induced in the conductor if the direction of motion of the conductor is
inclined at 600 to the direction of field. (6 marks)

9. (a) Derive the amplitude factor and form factor of a purely sinusoidal waveform. (5 marks)

(b) A current wave is made up of two components-a 5A dc component and a 50Hz ac

component, which is a sinusoidal wave with a peak value of 5A. Sketch the resultant
waveform and determine its RMS and average values. (5 marks)

Module 3

10. Draw the power triangle and define active, reactive and apparent powers in ac circuits.
Two coils A and B are connected in series across a 240V, 50Hz supply. The resistance of
A is 5  and the inductance of B is 0.015H. If the input from the supply is 3kW and
2kVAR, find the inductance of A and the resistance of B. Also calculate the voltage across
each coil.

11. A balanced three phase load consists of three coils each having resistance of 4Ω and
inductance 0.02H. It is connected to a 415V, 50Hz, 3-phase ac supply. Determine the
phase voltage, phase current, power factor and active power when the loads are connected
in (i) star (ii) delta.

(3x10=30)

PART II

BASIC ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

PART A

Answer all questions; each question carries 4 marks.

1. Give the specifications of a resistor. The colour bands marked on a resistor are Blue, Grey,
Yellow and Gold. What are the minimum and maximum resistance values expected from that
resistance?
2. What is meant by avalanche breakdown?
3. Explain the working of a full-wave bridge rectifier.
4. Discuss the role of coupling and bypass capacitors in a single stage RC coupled amplifier.
5. Differentiate AM and FM communication systems.

(5x4=20)
 PART B

Answer one question from each module; each question carries 10 marks.

Module 4
6. a) Explain with diagram the principle of operation of an NPN transistor. (5)
b) Sketch and explain the typical input-output characteristics of a BJT when connected in
common emitter configuration. (5)
OR
7. a) Explain the formation of a potential barrier in a P-N junction diode. (5)
b) What do you understand by Avalanche breakdown? Draw and explain the V-I characteristics
of a P-N junction and Zener diode. (5)
Module 5
8. a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of an RC coupled amplifier. (6)
b) Draw the frequency response characteristics of an RC coupled amplifier and state the reasons
for the reduction of gain at lower and higher frequencies. (4)
OR
9. a) With the help of block diagram, explain how an electronic instrumentation system. (6)
b) Explain the principle of an antenna. (4)

Module 6
10. a) With the help of a block diagram, explain the working of Super hetrodyne receiver. (6)
b) Explain the importance of antenna in a communication system. (4)
OR
11. a) With neat sketches explain a cellular communication system. (5)
b) Explain GSM communication with the help of a block diagram. (5)
(3x10=30)
 SYLLABUS

MODULE 1: Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits: Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power,
resistance, emf; Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules; Capacitors &
Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored. Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; Star-delta
conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)-problems.

Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix representation - Solution of network
equations. Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network equations by matrix
methods. Numerical problems.

MODULE 2: Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density, reluctance - comparison
between electric and magnetic circuits- Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite
materials, numerical problems.

Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- statically induced and dynamically
induced emfs - Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling

Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages-Representation of sinusoidal

waveforms: frequency, period, Average, RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical
Problems.

MODULE 3: AC Circuits

AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. Trignometric, Rectangular, Polar and

complex forms. Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive circuits;
Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. Average Power Power factor. Analysis of
RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent power. Simple numerical problems.

Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages; advantages of three phase systems,
star and delta connections (balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and phase
currents- Numerical problems

MODULE 4
Introduction to Semiconductor devices: Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano
electronics. Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors (constructional features not required): types,
specifications. Standard values, color coding. PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I
characteristics, principle of avalanche breakdown. Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN
structures, Principle of operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration.
MODULE 5
Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation: Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram
description of a dc power supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator. Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address
system, Circuit diagram and working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing. Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an
electronic instrumentation system.

MODULE 6
Introduction to Communication Systems: Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G.
Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for various communication
systems, block diagram of super heterodyne receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from
accelerated charge. Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, principle
and block diagram of GSM.

Text Books
1. D P Kothari and I J Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. D C Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. ChinmoySaha, Arindham Halder and Debarati Ganguly, Basic Electronics - Principles and
Applications, Cambridge University Press, 2018.
4. M.S.Sukhija and T.K.Nagsarkar, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Oxford University
Press, 2012.
5. Wayne Tomasi and Neil Storey, A Textbook On Basic Communication and Information
Engineering, Pearson, 2010.

Reference Books
1. Del Toro V, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Pearson Education.
2. T. K. Nagsarkar, M. S. Sukhija, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Oxford Higher Education.
3. Hayt W H, Kemmerly J E, and Durbin S M, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, Pearson Education.
5. V. N. Mittle and Arvind Mittal, “Basic Electrical Engineering,” Second Edition, McGraw Hill.
6. Parker and Smith, “Problems in Electrical Engineering”, CBS Publishers and Distributors.
7. S. B. Lal Seksena and Kaustuv Dasgupta, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Cambridge
University Press.
8. Anant Agarwal, Jeffrey Lang, Foundations of Analog and Digital Electronic Circuits, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2005.
9. Bernard Grob, Ba sic Electronics, McGraw Hill.
10. A. Bruce Carlson, Paul B. Crilly, Communication Systems: An Introduction to Signals and
Noise in Electrical Communication, Tata McGraw Hill, 5 th Edition.
COURSE CONTENTS AND LECTURE SCHEDULE

No Topic No. of Lectures

1 Elementary Concepts of Electric Circuits

1.1 Elementary concepts of DC electric circuits:

Basic Terminology including voltage, current, power, resistance, emf; 1

Resistances in series and parallel; Current and Voltage Division Rules;
Capacitors & Inductors: V-I relations and energy stored.

Ohms Law and Kirchhoff's laws-Problems; 2

Star-delta conversion (resistive networks only-derivation not required)- 1

problems.

1.2 Analysis of DC electric circuits: Mesh current method - Matrix 1

representation - Solution of network equations.

Node voltage methods-matrix representation-solution of network

equations by matrix methods. 1

Numerical problems. 2

2 Elementary Concepts of Magnetic circuits, Electromagnetic Induction and AC

fundamentals

2.1 Magnetic Circuits: Basic Terminology: MMF, field strength, flux density,
reluctance - comparison between electric and magnetic circuits-
1
Series and parallel magnetic circuits with composite materials,
numerical problems. 2

2.2 Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws, problems, Lenz's law- 1

statically induced and dynamically induced emfs -
Self-inductance and mutual inductance, coefficient of coupling 2

2.3 Alternating Current fundamentals: Generation of alternating voltages- 2

Representation of sinusoidal waveforms: frequency, period, Average,
RMS values and form factor of waveforms-Numerical Problems.

3 AC Circuits
3.1 AC Circuits: Phasor representation of sinusoidal quantities. 1
Trigonometric, Rectangular, Polar and complex forms.

Analysis of simple AC circuits: Purely resistive, inductive & capacitive

circuits; Inductive and capacitive reactance, concept of impedance. 2
Average Power, Power factor.

Analysis of RL, RC and RLC series circuits-active, reactive and apparent 1

power.
2
Simple numerical problems.

3.2 Three phase AC systems: Generation of three phase voltages;

advantages of three phase systems, star and delta connections
(balanced only), relation between line and phase voltages, line and 2
phase currents- Numerical problems.

4 Introduction to Semiconductor devices

4.1 Evolution of electronics – Vacuum tubes to nano electronics (In 1

evolutional perspective only)

4.2 Resistors, Capacitors and Inductors: types, specifications. Standard 2

values, color coding (No constructional features)

4.3 PN Junction diode: Principle of operation, V-I characteristics, principle 2

of avalanche breakdown

4.4 Bipolar Junction Transistors: PNP and NPN structures, Principle of 3

operation, relation between current gains in CE, CB and CC, input and
output characteristics of common emitter configuration

5 Basic electronic circuits and instrumentation

5.1 Rectifiers and power supplies: Block diagram description of a dc power 3

supply, Working of a full wave bridge rectifier, capacitor filter (no
analysis), working of simple zener voltage regulator

5.2 Amplifiers: Block diagram of Public Address system, Circuit diagram and 4
working of common emitter (RC coupled) amplifier with its frequency
response, Concept of voltage divider biasing

5.3 Electronic Instrumentation: Block diagram of an electronic 2

instrumentation system

6 Introduction to Communication Systems

6.1 Evolution of communication systems – Telegraphy to 5G 1

6.2 Radio communication: principle of AM & FM, frequency bands used for 4
various communication systems, block diagram of super heterodyne
receiver, Principle of antenna – radiation from accelerated charge

6.3 Mobile communication: basic principles of cellular communications, 2

principle and block diagram of GSM.

Suggested Simulation Assignments for Basic Electronics Engineering

1. Plot V-I characteristics of Si and Ge diodes on a simulator

2. Plot Input and Output characteristics of BJT on a simulator
3. Implementation of half wave and full wave rectifiers
4. Simulation of RC coupled amplifier with the design supplied
5. Generation of AM signal

Note: The simulations can be done on open tools such as QUCS, KiCad, GNURadio or similar software
to augment the understanding.
 YEAR OF
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
EST PROGRAMING IN C INTRODUCTION
102
ESC 2 1 2 4 2019

Preamble: The syllabus is prepared with the view of preparing the Engineering Graduates capable of writing
readable C programs to solve computational problems that they may have to solve in their professional life.
The course content is decided to cover the essential programming fundamentals which can be taught
within the given slots in the curriculum. This course has got 2 Hours per week for practicing programming in
C. A list showing 24 mandatory programming problems are given at the end. The instructor is supposed to
give homework/assignments to write the listed programs in the rough record as and when the required
theory part is covered in the class. The students are expected to come prepared with the required program
written in the rough record for the lab classes.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Analyze a computational problem and develop an algorithm/flowchart to find its solution

Develop readable* C programs with branching and looping statements, which uses
CO 2
Arithmetic, Logical, Relational or Bitwise operators.

Write readable C programs with arrays, structure or union for storing the data to be
CO 3
processed

Divide a given computational problem into a number of modules and develop a readable
CO 4 multi-function C program by using recursion if required, to find the solution to the
computational problem

CO 5 Write readable C programs which use pointers for array processing and parameter passing

CO 6 Develop readable C programs with files for reading input and storing output

readable* - readability of a program means the following:

1. Logic used is easy to follow
2. Standards to be followed for indentation and formatting
3. Meaningful names are given to variables
4. Concise comments are provided wherever needed
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester
Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 Examination Marks
(Marks) (Marks)

Remember 15 10 25

Understand 10 15 25

Apply 20 20 40

Analyse 5 5 10

Evaluate

Create

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

Marks Marks

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Test 1 (for theory, for 2 hrs) : 20 marks

Continuous Assessment Test 2 (for lab, internal examination, for 2 hrs) : 20 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions
with 2 questions from each module (2.5 modules x 2 = 5), having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B also contains 5 questions with 2 questions from each module (2.5
modules x 2 = 5), of which a student should answer any one. The questions should not have sub-
divisions and each one carries 7 marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10
questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should
answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer
any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Write an algorithm to check whether largest of 3 natural numbers is prime or
not. Also, draw a flowchart for solving the same problem.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Write an easy to read C program to process a set of n natural numbers and to
find the largest even number and smallest odd number from the given set of numbers. The program
should not use division and modulus operators.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):Write an easy to read C program to process the marks obtained by n students
of a class and prepare their rank list based on the sum of the marks obtained. There are 3 subjects for
which examinations are conducted and the third subject is an elective where a student is allowed to
take any one of the two courses offered.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Write an easy to read C program to find the value of a mathematical function
f which is defined as follows. f(n) = n! / (sum of factors of n), if n is not prime and f(n) = n! / (sum of
digits of n), if n is prime.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Write an easy to read C program to sort a set of n integers and to find the
number of unique numbers and the number of repeated numbers in the given set of numbers. Use a
function which takes an integer array of n elements, sorts the array using the Bubble Sorting Technique
and returns the number of unique numbers and the number of repeated numbers in the given array.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Write an easy to read C program to process a text file and to print the
Palindrome words into an output file.
 Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________

Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY FIRST SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION,
MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: EST 102

Course Name: Programming in C (Common to all programs)

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Write short note on processor and memory in a computer.

2. What are the differences between compiled and interpreted languages? Give example for
each.
3. Write a C program to read a Natural Number through keyboard and to display the reverse
of the given number. For example, if “3214567” is given as input, the output to be shown is
“7654123”.
4. Is it advisable to use goto statements in a C program? Justify your answer.
5. Explain the different ways in which you can declare & initialize a single dimensional array.
6. Write a C program to read a sentence through keyboard and to display the count of white
spaces in the given sentence.
7. What are the advantages of using functions in a program?
8. With a simple example program, explain scope and life time of variables in C.
9. Write a function in C which takes the address of a single dimensional array (containing a
finite sequence of numbers) and the number of numbers stored in the array as arguments
and stores the numbers in the same array in reverse order. Use pointers to access the
elements of the array.
10. With an example, explain the different modes of opening a file. (10x3=30)

Part B
Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

11. (a) Draw a flow chart to find the position of an element in a given sequence, using linear
searching technique. With an example explain how the flowchart finds the position of a
given element. (10)
(b) Write a pseudo code representing the flowchart for linear searching. (4)
OR
12. (a) With the help of a flow chart, explain the bubble sort operation. Illustrate with an
example. (10)
(b) Write an algorithm representing the flowchart for bubble sort. (4)

13. (a) Write a C program to read an English Alphabet through keyboard and display whether
the given Alphabet is in upper case or lower case. (6)
(b) Explain how one can use the builtin function in C, scanfto read values of different data
types. Also explain using examples how one can use the builtin function in C, printffor text
formatting. (8)
OR

14. (a) With suitable examples, explain various operators in C. (10)

(b) Explain how characters are stored and processed in C. (4)

15. (a) Write a function in C which takes a 2-Dimensional array storing a matrix of numbers and
the order of the matrix (number of rows and columns) as arguments and displays the sum
of the elements stored in each row. (6 )
(b) Write a C program to check whether a given matrix is a diagonal matrix. (8)
OR

16. (a) Without using any builtin string processing function like strlen, strcat etc., write a
program to concatenate two strings. (8)
(b) Write a C program to perform bubble sort. (6)

17. (a) Write a function namely myFact in C to find the factorial of a given number. Also, write
another function in C namelynCr which accepts two positive integer parameters n and r and
returns the value of the mathematical functionC(n,r)( n! / ( r! x (n - r)!) ). The function nCr is
expected to make use of the factorial function myFact. (10)
(b) What is recursion? Give an example. (4)

OR

18. (a) With a suitable example, explain the differences between a structure and a union in C.
(6)
(b) Declare a structure namely Student to store the details (roll number, name, mark_for_C)
of a student. Then, write a program in C to find the average mark obtained by the students
in a class for the subject Programming in C (using the field mark_for_C). Use array of
structures to store the required data (8)

19. (a) With a suitable example, explain the concept of pass by reference. (6)
(b) With a suitable example, explain how pointers can help in changing the content of a
single dimensionally array passed as an argument to a function in C.
(8)
OR

20. (a) Differentiate between sequential files and random access files? (4)
 (b) Using the prototypes explain the functionality provided by the following functions. (10)
rewind()
i. fseek()

ii. ftell()

iii. fread()

iv. fwrite() (14X5=70)

SYLLABUS
Programming in C (Common to all disciplines)

Module 1
Basics of Computer Hardware and Software
Basics of Computer Architecture: processor, Memory, Input& Output devices
Application Software & System software: Compilers, interpreters, High level and low level languages
Introduction to structured approach to programming, Flow chart Algorithms, Pseudo code (bubble
sort, linear search - algorithms and pseudocode)

Module 2
Program Basics
Basic structure of C program: Character set, Tokens, Identifiers in C, Variables and Data Types ,
Constants, Console IO Operations, printf and scanf
Operators and Expressions: Expressions and Arithmetic Operators, Relational and Logical Operators,
Conditional operator, size of operator, Assignment operators and Bitwise Operators. Operators
Precedence
Control Flow Statements: If Statement, Switch Statement, Unconditional Branching using goto
statement, While Loop, Do While Loop, For Loop, Break and Continue statements.(Simple programs
covering control flow)
Module 3
Arrays and strings
Arrays Declaration and Initialization, 1-Dimensional Array, 2-Dimensional Array
String processing: In built String handling functions (strlen, strcpy, strcat and strcmp, puts, gets)
Linear search program, bubble sort program, simple programs covering arrays and strings

Module 4
Working with functions
Introduction to modular programming, writing functions, formal parameters, actual parameters
Pass by Value, Recursion, Arrays as Function Parameters structure, union, Storage Classes, Scope
and life time of variables, simple programs using functions
 Module 5
Pointers and Files
Basics of Pointer: declaring pointers, accessing data though pointers, NULL pointer,array access
using pointers, pass by reference effect
File Operations: open, close, read, write, append
Sequential access and random access to files: In built file handlingfunctions (rewind() ,fseek(), ftell(),
feof(), fread(), fwrite()), simple programs covering pointers and files.

Text Books
1. Schaum Series, Gottfried B.S.,Tata McGraw Hill,Programming with C
2. E. Balagurusamy, Mcgraw Hill,Programming in ANSI C
3. Asok N Kamthane, Pearson,Programming in C
4. Anita Goel, Pearson, Computer Fundamentals
Reference Books
1. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, Pearson, Computer fundamentals and Programming in C
2. Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie, Pearson, C Programming Language
3. Rajaraman V, PHI, Computer Basics and Programming in C
4. Yashavant P, Kanetkar, BPB Publications, Let us C

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule

Module 1: Basics of Computer Hardware and Software (7 hours)

1.1 Basics of Computer Architecture: Processor, Memory, Input& Output devices 2 hours

Application Software & System software: Compilers, interpreters, High level

1.2 2 hours
and low level languages

1.3 Introduction to structured approach to programming, Flow chart 1 hours

Algorithms, Pseudo code (bubble sort, linear search - algorithms and

1.4 2 hours
pseudocode)

Module 2: Program Basics (8 hours)

Basic structure of C program: Character set, Tokens, Identifiers in C, Variables

2.1 2 hours
and Data Types , Constants, Console IO Operations, printf and scanf

Operators and Expressions: Expressions and Arithmetic Operators, Relational

2.2 and Logical Operators, Conditional operator, sizeof operator, Assignment 2 hours
operators and Bitwise Operators. Operators Precedence
 Control Flow Statements: If Statement, Switch Statement, Unconditional
2.3 Branching using goto statement, While Loop, Do While Loop, For Loop, Break 4 hours
and Continue statements.(Simple programs covering control flow)

Module 3: Arrays and strings: (6 hours)

Arrays Declaration and Initialization, 1-Dimensional Array, 2-Dimensional Array 2 hours

3.1

String processing: In built String handling functions(strlen, strcpy, strcat and

3.2 2 hours
strcmp, puts, gets)

Linear search program, bubble sort program, simple programs covering arrays
3.3 3 hours
and strings

Module 4: Working with functions (7 hours)

4.1 Introduction to modular programming, writing functions, formal parameters, 2 hours

actual parameters

4.2 Pass by Value, Recursion, Arrays as Function Parameters 2 hours

4.3 structure, union, Storage Classes,Scope and life time of variables, simple 3 hours
programs using functions

Module 5: Pointers and Files (7 hours)

5.1 Basics of Pointer: declaring pointers, accessing data though pointers, NULL 3 hours
pointer,array access using pointers, pass by reference effect

5.2 File Operations: open, close, read, write, append 1 hours

Sequential access and random access to files: In built file handlingfunctions

5.3 (rewind() ,fseek(), ftell(), feof(), fread(), fwrite()), simple programs covering 2 hours
pointers and files.

C PROGRAMMING LAB (Practical part of EST 102, Programming in C)

Assessment Method: The Academic Assessment for the Programming lab should be done internally
by the College. The assessment shall be made on 50 marks and the mark is divided as follows:
Practical Records/Outputs - 20 marks (internal by the College), Regular Lab Viva - 5 marks (internal
by the College), Final Practical Exam – 25 marks (internal by the College).

The mark obtained out of 50 will be converted into equivalent proportion out of 20 for CIE
computation.
 LIST OF LAB EXPERIMENTS
1. Familiarization of Hardware Components of a Computer
2. Familiarization of Linux environment – How to do Programming in C with Linux
3. Familiarization of console I/O and operators in C
i) Display “Hello World”
ii) Read two numbers, add them and display theirsum
iii) Read the radius of a circle, calculate its area and display it
iv)Evaluate the arithmetic expression ((a -b / c * d + e) * (f +g)) and display its solution.Read
the values of the variables from the user through console.

4. Read 3 integer values and find the largest amoung them.

5. Read a Natural Number and check whether the number is prime or not
6. Read a Natural Number and check whether the number is Armstrong or not
7. Read n integers, store them in an array and find their sum and average
8. Read n integers, store them in an array and search for an element in the
array using an algorithm for Linear Search
9. Read n integers, store them in an array and sort the elements in the array using Bubble Sort
algorithm
10. Read a string (word), store it in an array and check whether it is a palindrome word or not.
11.Read two strings (each one ending with a $ symbol), store them in
arrays and concatenate them without using library functions.
12. Read a string (ending with a $ symbol), store it in an array and count the number of vowels,
consonants and spaces in it.
13. Read two input each representing the distances between two points in the Euclidean space,
store these in structure variables and add the two distance values.
14. Using structure, read and print data of n employees (Name, Employee Id and Salary)
15. Declare a union containing 5 string variables (Name, House Name, City Name, State and Pin
code) each with a length of C_SIZE (user defined constant). Then, read and display the address of a
person using a variable of the union.
16. Find the factorial of a given Natural Number n usingrecursive and non recursive functions
17. Read a string (word), store it in an array and obtain its reverse by using a user defined function.
18. Write a menu driven program for performing matrix addition, multiplication and finding the
transpose. Use functions to (i) read a matrix, (ii) find the sum of two matrices, (iii) find the product
of two matrices, (i) find the transpose of a matrix and (v) display a matrix.
19. Do the following using pointers
i) add two numbers
ii) swap two numbers using a user defined function
20. Input and Print the elements of an array using pointers
21. Compute sum of the elements stored in an array using pointers and user defined function.
22. Create a file and perform the following
iii) Write data to the file
iv) Read the data in a given file & display the file content on console
v) append new data and display on console
23. Open a text input file and count number of characters, words and lines in it; and store the results
in an output file.
 PHL ENGINEERING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
120 PHYSICS LAB INTRODUCTION
BSC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The aim of this course is to make the students gain practical knowledge to co-relate with
the theoretical studies and to develop practical applications of engineering materials
and use the principle in the right way to implement the modern technology.

Prerequisite: Higher secondary level Physics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Develop analytical/experimental skills and impart prerequisite hands on experience for

engineering laboratories

CO 2 Understand the need for precise measurement practices for data recording

CO 3 Understand the principle, concept, working and applications of relevant technologies and
comparison of results with theoretical calculations
CO 4 Analyze the techniques and skills associated with modern scientific tools such as lasers and
fiber optics
CO 5 Develop basic communication skills through working in groups in performing the laboratory
experiments and by interpreting the results

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 3 3 1 2 1
CO 2 3 3 1 2 1
CO 3 3 3 1 2 1
CO 4 3 3 1 2 1
CO 5 3 3 1 2 1

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)
Marks Marks

100 100 - 1 hour

 Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

(Minimum 8 experiments should be completed)

1. CRO-Measurement of frequency and amplitude of wave forms

2. Measurement of strain using strain gauge and wheatstone bridge
3. LCR Circuit – Forced and damped harmonic oscillations
4. Melde’s string apparatus- Measurement of frequency in the transverse and longitudinal mode
5. Wave length measurement of a monochromatic source of light using Newton’s Rings method.
6. Determination of diameter of a thin wire or thickness of a thin strip of paper using air wedge
method.
7. To measure the wavelength using a millimeter scale as a grating.
8. Measurement of wavelength of a source of light using grating.
9. Determination of dispersive power and resolving power of a plane transmission grating
10.Determination of the particle size of lycopodium powder
11.Determination of the wavelength of He-Ne laser or any standard laser using diffraction grating
12.Calculate the numerical aperture and study the losses that occur in optical fiber cable.
13.I-V characteristics of solar cell.
14.LED Characteristics.
15.Ultrasonic Diffractometer- Wavelength and velocity measurement of ultrasonic waves in a liquid
16.Deflection magnetometer-Moment of a magnet- Tan A position.

Reference books

1. S.L.Gupta and Dr.V.Kumar, “Practical physics with viva voice”, Pragati PrakashanPublishers, Revised
Edition, 2009

2. M.N.Avadhanulu, A.A.Dani and Pokely P.M, “Experiments in Engineering Physics”, S.Chand&Co,2008

3. S. K. Gupta, “Engineering physics practicals”, Krishna Prakashan Pvt. Ltd., 2014

4. P. R. Sasikumar “Practical Physics”, PHI Ltd., 2011.

 CYL ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 BSC 0 0 2 1

Preamble: To impart scientific approach and to familiarize with the experiments in chemistry relevant
for research projects in higher semesters

Prerequisite: Experiments in chemistry introduced at the plus two levels in schools

Course outcomes: After the completion of the course the students will be able to

CO 1 Understand and practice different techniques of quantitative chemical analysis to

generate experimental skills and apply these skills to various analyses

CO 2 Develop skills relevant to synthesize organic polymers and acquire the practical skill to
use TLC for the identification of drugs
CO 3 Develop the ability to understand and explain the use of modern spectroscopic
techniques for analysing and interpreting the IR spectra and NMR spectra of some
organic compounds
CO 4 Acquire the ability to understand, explain and use instrumental techniques for chemical
analysis
CO 5 Learn to design and carry out scientific experiments as well as accurately record and
analyze the results of such experiments

CO 6 Function as a member of a team, communicate effectively and engage in further

learning. Also understand how chemistry addresses social, economical and
environmental problems and why it is an integral part of curriculum

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 1 3
CO 6 3 1 3
Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

marks marks Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks
End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (MINIMUM 8 MANDATORY)

1. Estimation of total hardness of water-EDTA method

2. Potentiometric titration
3. Determination of cell constant and conductance of solutions.
4. Calibration of pH meter and determination of pH of a solution
5. Estimation of chloride in water
6. Identification of drugs using TLC
7. Determination of wavelength of absorption maximum and colorimetric estimation of Fe3+ in
solution
8. Determination of molar absorptivity of a compound (KMnO4 or any water soluble food
colorant)
9. Synthesis of polymers (a) Urea-formaldehyde resin (b) Phenol-formaldehyde resin
10. Estimation of iron in iron ore
11. Estimation of copper in brass
12. Estimation of dissolved oxygen by Winkler’s method
13. (a) Analysis of IR spectra (minimum 3 spectra) (b) Analysis of 1H NMR spectra (
minimum 3 spectra)
14. Flame photometric estimation of Na+ to find out the salinity in sand
15. Determination of acid value of a vegetable oil
16. Determination of saponification of a vegetable oil
Reference Books

1. G. Svehla, B. Sivasankar, “Vogel's Qualitative Inorganic Analysis”, Pearson, 2012.

2. R. K. Mohapatra, “Engineering Chemistry with Laboratory Experiments”, PHI Learning, 2017.

3. Muhammed Arif, “Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual”, Owl publishers, 2019.

4. Ahad J., “Engineering Chemistry Lab manual”, Jai Publications, 2019.

5. Roy K Varghese, “Engineering Chemistry Laboratory Manual”, Crownplus Publishers, 2019.

6. Soney C George, Rino Laly Jose, “Lab Manual of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2019.
 ESL YEAR OF
CIVIL & MECHANICAL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
120 INTRODUCTION
WORKSHOP
0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: The course is designed to train the students to identify and manage the tools, materials
and methods required to execute an engineering project. Students will be introduced to a team
working environment where they develop the necessary skills for planning, preparing and executing
an engineering project.

To enable the student to familiarize various tools, measuring devices, practices and different
methods of manufacturing processes employed in industry for fabricating components.

Prerequisite: None

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

Course
Course Outcome Description
Outcome
CO 1 Name different devices and tools used for civil engineering measurements
CO 2 Explain the use of various tools and devices for various field measurements
Demonstrate the steps involved in basic civil engineering activities like plot
CO 3 measurement, setting out operation, evaluating the natural profile of land, plumbing
and undertaking simple construction work.
Choose materials and methods required for basic civil engineering activities like field
CO 4
measurements, masonry work and plumbing.
CO 5 Compare different techniques and devices used in civil engineering measurements
Identify Basic Mechanical workshop operations in accordance with the material and
CO 6
objects
Apply appropriate Tools and Instruments with respect to the mechanical workshop
CO 7
trades
CO 8 Apply appropriate safety measures with respect to the mechanical workshop trades

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11
12
CO 1 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 2 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 - -
CO 3 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 -
CO 4 1 - - - 1 1 - 2 2 2 1 1
CO 5 1 - - - 1 1 - - 2 2 1
CO 6 2
CO 7 2
CO 8 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE Duration

100 70 30 1 hour

Assessment Procedure: Total marks allotted for the course is 100 marks. CIE shall be conducted for
70 marks and ESE for 30 marks. CIE should be done for the work done by the student and also
viva voce based on the work done on each practical session. ESE shall be evaluated by written
examination of one hour duration conducted internally by the institute.

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

SYLLABUS

PART 1

CIVIL WORKSHOP

Exercise 1. Calculate the area of a built-up space and a small parcel of land- Use standard
measuring tape and digital distance measuring devices

Exercise 2. (a) Use screw gauge and vernier calliper to measure the diameter of a steel rod and
thickness of a flat bar

(b) Transfer the level from one point to another using a water level

(c) Set out a one room building with a given plan and measuring tape

Exercise 3. Find the level difference between any two points using dumpy level

Exercise 4. (a) Construct a 1 thick brick wall of 50 cm height and 60 cm length using English
bond. Use spirit level to assess the tilt of walls.

(b) Estimate the number of different types of building blocks to construct this wall.
Exercise 5. (a) Introduce the students to plumbing tools, different types of pipes, type of
connections, traps, valves ,fixtures and sanitary fittings.

(b) Install a small rainwater harvesting installation in the campus

Reference Books:

1. Khanna P.N, “Indian Practical Civil Engineering Handbook”, Engineers Publishers.

2. Bhavikatti. S, "Surveying and Levelling (Volume 1)", I.K. International Publishing House
3. Arora S.P and Bindra S.P, " Building Construction", Dhanpat Rai Publications
4. S. C. Rangwala, “Engineering Materials,” Charotar Publishing House.

PART II

MECHANICAL WORKSHOP

LIST OF EXERCISES

(Minimum EIGHT units mandatory and FIVE models from Units 2 to 8 mandatory)

UNIT 1:- General : Introduction to workshop practice, Safety precautions, Shop floor ethics, Basic
First Aid knowledge.
Study of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) Tools: screw drivers,
spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips,
keys etc.
UNIT 2:- Carpentry : Understanding of carpentry tools
Minimum any one model
1. T –Lap joint 2. Cross lap joint 3. Dovetail joint 4. Mortise joints
UNIT 3:- Foundry : Understanding of foundry tools
Minimum any one model
1.Bench Molding 2. Floor Molding 3. Core making 4. Pattern making
UNIT 4: - Sheet Metal : Understanding of sheet metal working tools
Minimum any one model
1. Cylindrical shape
2. Conical shape
3. Prismatic shaped job from sheet metal
UNIT 5: - Fitting : Understanding of tools used for fitting
Minimum any one model
1. Square Joint
2. V- Joint
3. Male and female fitting
UNIT 6: - Plumbing : Understanding of plumbing tools, pipe joints
Any one exercise on joining of pipes making use of minimum three types of pipe joints

UNIT 7: - Smithy: Understanding of tools used for smithy.

 Demonstrating the forge-ability of different materials (MS, Al, alloy steel and cast steels)
in cold and hot states.
Observing the qualitative difference in the hardness of these materials
Minimum any one exercise on smithy
1. Square prism
2. Hexagonal headed bolt
3. Hexagonal prism
4. Octagonal prism

UNIT 8: -Welding: Understanding of welding equipments

Minimum any one welding practice
Making Joints using electric arc welding. bead formation in horizontal, vertical
and over head positions

UNIT 9: - Assembly: Demonstration only

Dissembling and assembling of
1. Cylinder and piston assembly
2. Tail stock assembly
3. Bicycle
4. Pump or any other machine

UNIT 10: - Machines: Demonstration and applications of the following machines

Shaping and slotting machine; Milling machine; Grinding Machine; Lathe; Drilling
Machine.
UNIT 11: - Modern manufacturing methods: Power tools, CNC machine tools, 3D printing, Glass
cutting.

Course Contents and Lecture Schedule:

No Topic No of Sessions

1 INTRODUCTION

Workshop practice, shop floor precautions, ethics and First Aid

knowledge.
1.1 Studies of mechanical tools, components and their applications: (a) 1
Tools: screw drivers, spanners, Allen keys, cutting pliers etc and
accessories (b) bearings, seals, O-rings, circlips, keys etc

2 CARPENTRY

2.1 Understanding of carpentry tools and making minimum one model 2

 3 FOUNDRY

3.1 Understanding of foundry tools and making minimum one model 2

4 SHEET METAL

Understanding of sheet metal working tools and making minimum

4.1 2
one model

5 FITTING

5.1 Understanding of fitting tools and making minimum one model 2

6 PLUMBING

Understanding of pipe joints and plumbing tools and making

6.1
minimum one model 2

7 SMITHY

7.1 Understanding of smithy tools and making minimum one model 2

8 WELDING

Understanding of welding equipments and making minimum one

8.1
model 2

9 ASSEMBLY

Demonstration of assembly and dissembling of multiple parts

9.1
components 1

10 MACHINES

10.1 Demonstration of various machines 1

11 MODERN MANUFACTURING METHODS

Demonstrations of: power tools, CNC Machine tools, 3D printing,

11.1
Glass cutting 1
ESL 130 ELECTRICAL & CATEGORY L T P CREDIT YEAR OF
ELECTRONICS WORKSHOP INTRODUCTION
ESC 0 0 2 1 2019

Preamble: Electrical Workshop is intended to impart skills to plan and carry out simple
electrical wiring. It is essential for the practicing engineers to identify the basic practices and
safety measures in electrical wiring.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO 1 Demonstrate safety measures against electric shocks.

CO 2 Identify the tools used for electrical wiring, electrical accessories, wires, cables, batteries
and standard symbols
CO 3 Develop the connection diagram, identify the suitable accessories and materials necessary
for wiring simple lighting circuits for domestic buildings
CO 4 Identify and test various electronic components
CO 5 Draw circuit schematics with EDA tools
CO 6 Assemble and test electronic circuits on boards
CO 7 Work in a team with good interpersonal skills

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO PO PO
10 11 12
CO 1 - - - - - 3 - - - - - 1

CO 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - -

CO 3 2 - - 1 - 1 - 1 2 2 - 2

CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2

CO 5 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO 6 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 1

CO 7 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - 2

Mark distribution

Total Marks CIE ESE ESE

Duration(Internal)

100 100 - 1 hour

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 20 marks
Class work/ Assessment /Viva-voce : 50 marks
End semester examination (Internally by college) : 30 marks

End Semester Examination Pattern: Written Objective Examination of one hour

Syllabus

PART 1

ELECTRICAL

List of Exercises / Experiments

1. a) Demonstrate the precautionary steps adopted in case of Electrical shocks.

b)Identify different types of cables, wires, switches, fuses, fuse carriers, MCB, ELCB
and MCCB with ratings.
2. Wiring of simple light circuit for controlling light/ fan point (PVC conduit wiring)
3. Wiring of light/fan circuit using Two way switches . (Staircase wiring)
4. Wiring of Fluorescent lamps and light sockets (6A) with a power circuit for controlling power
device. (16A socket)
5. Wiring of power distribution arrangement using single phase MCB distribution board with
ELCB, main switch and Energy meter.
6. a)Identify different types of batteries with their specifications.
b)Demonstrate the Pipe and Plate Earthing Schemes using Charts/Site Visit.

PART II

ELECTRONICS

List of Exercises / Experiments (Minimum of 7 mandatory)

1. Familiarization/Identification of electronic components with specification

(Functionality, type, size, colour coding, package, symbol, cost etc. [Active, Passive,
Electrical, Electronic, Electro-mechanical, Wires, Cables, Connectors, Fuses, Switches,
Relays, Crystals, Displays, Fasteners, Heat sink etc.)
2. Drawing of electronic circuit diagrams using BIS/IEEE symbols and introduction to EDA
tools (such as Dia or XCircuit), Interpret data sheets of discrete components and IC’s,
Estimation and costing.

3. Familiarization/Application of testing instruments and commonly used tools.

[Multimeter, Function generator, Power supply, DSO etc.] [Soldering iron, De-
soldering pump, Pliers, Cutters, Wire strippers, Screw drivers, Tweezers, Crimping
tool, Hot air soldering and de- soldering station etc.]

4. Testing of electronic components [Resistor, Capacitor, Diode, Transistor and JFET

using multimeter.]

5. Inter-connection methods and soldering practice. [Bread board, Wrapping, Crimping,

Soldering - types - selection of materials and safety precautions, soldering practice in
connectors and general purpose PCB, Crimping.]

6. Printed circuit boards (PCB) [Types, Single sided, Double sided, PTH, Processing
methods, Design and fabrication of a single sided PCB for a simple circuit with manual
etching (Ferric chloride) and drilling.]
7. Assembling of electronic circuits using SMT (Surface Mount Technology) stations.
8. Assembling of electronic circuit/system on general purpose PCB, test and show the
functioning (Any Two circuits).

1. Fixed voltage power supply with transformer, rectifier diode, capacitor filter,
zener/IC regulator.

2. Square wave generation using IC 555 timer in IC base.

3. Sine wave generation using IC 741 OP-AMP in IC base.
4. RC coupled amplifier with transistor BC107.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -3
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES

MAT CATEGORY L T P CREDITS

DISCRETE MATHEMATICAL
203 STRUCTURES
BSC 3 1 0 4

Preamble:

The purpose of this course is to create awareness in students about the basic terminologies used
in advanced courses in Computer Science and develop rigorous logical thinking for solving
different kinds of problems in Computer Science. This course helps the learner to apply the
theory and applications of elementary Counting Principles, Propositional Logic, Predicate Logic,
Lattices, Generating Functions, Recurrence Relations and Algebraic Structures eventually in
practical applications.

Prerequisite: A sound background in higher secondary school Mathematics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO# CO
Check the validity of predicates in Propositional and Quantified Propositional Logic
CO1 using truth tables, deductive reasoning and inference theory on Propositional Logic
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Solve counting problems by applying the elementary counting techniques - Rule of
Sum, Rule of Product, Permutation, Combination, Binomial Theorem, Pigeonhole
CO2
Principle and Principle of Inclusion and Exclusion (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Classify binary relations into various types and illustrate an application for each type
CO3 of binary relation, in Computer Science (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Understand)
Illustrate an application for Partially Ordered Sets and Complete Lattices, in
CO4
Computer Science (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Explain Generating Functions and solve First Order and Second Order Linear
CO5 Recurrence Relations with Constant Coefficients (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Illustrate the abstract algebraic systems - Semigroups, Monoids, Groups,
CO6 Homomorphism and Isomorphism of Monoids and Groups (Cognitive Knowledge
Level: Understand)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern
Continuous Assessment Tests
Bloom’s End Semester Examination
Category Marks (%)
Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%)
Remember 30 30 30
Understand 30 30 30
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze

Evaluate

Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Tests (Average of Series Tests 1 & 2) 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 full questions from each module of which student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

Syllabus
Module – 1 (Fundamentals of Logic)
Mathematical logic - Basic connectives and truth table, Statements, Logical Connectives,
Tautology, Contradiction. Logical Equivalence - The Laws of Logic, The Principle of duality,
Substitution Rules . The implication - The Contrapositive, The Converse,The Inverse.
Logical Implication - Rules of Inference. The use COMPUTER
of Quantifiers SCIENCE ANDQuantifier.
- Open Statement, ENGINEERING
Logically Equivalent – Contrapositive, Converse , Inverse , Logical equivalences and
implications for quantified statement, Implications , Negation .

Module - 2 (Fundamentals of Counting Theory)

The Rule of Sum – Extension of Sum Rule . The Rule of Product - Extension of Product Rule .
Permutations. Combinations. The Binomial Theorem (without proof). Combination with
Repetition. The Pigeon hole Principle. The Principle of Inclusion and Exclusion Theorem
(Without Proof) - Generalization of the Principle. Derangements.

Module - 3 ( Relations and Functions )

Cartesian Product - Binary Relation. Function – domain , range-one to one function, Image-
restriction. Properties of Relations- Reachability Relations, Reflexive Relations, Symmetric
Relations, Transitive relations, Anti-symmetric Relations, Partial Order relations, Equivalence
Relations, Irreflexive relations.

Partially ordered Set – Hasse Diagram, Maximal-Minimal Element, Least upper bound (lub),
Greatest Lower bound(glb) ( Topological sorting Algorithm- excluded). Equivalence Relations
and Partitions - Equivalence Class.

Lattice - Dual Lattice , Sub lattice , Properties of glb and lub , Properties of Lattice , Special
Lattice , Complete Lattice, Bounded Lattice, Completed Lattice , Distributive Lattice.

Module - 4 (Generating Functions and Recurrence Relations)

Generating Function - Definition and Examples , Calculation techniques, Exponential
generating function. First order linear recurrence relations with constant coefficients –
homogeneous, non-homogeneous Solution. Second order linear recurrence relations with
constant coefficients, homogeneous, non-homogeneous Solution.

Module - 5 (Algebraic Structures )

Algebraic system-properties- Homomorphism and Isomorphism. Semi group and monoid –
cyclic monoid , sub semi group and sub monoid, Homomorphism and Isomorphism of Semi
group and monoids. Group- Elementary properties, subgroup, symmetric group on three
symbols ,The direct product of two groups, Group Homomorphism, Isomorphism of groups,
Cyclicgroup. R i g h t c o s e t s - L e f t c o s e t s . L a g r a n g e ’s T h e o r e m

Text Book

1. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics (An Applied Introduction), Ralph P Grimaldi, B

V Ramana , 5th Edition, Pearson

Reference Books COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
1) Kenneth H. Rosen, Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications with Combinatorics and
Graph Theory, Seventh Edition, MGH, 2011
2) Trembly J.P and Manohar R, “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to
Computer Science”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
3) Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Busby, Sharan Cutler Ross, “Discrete Mathematical
Structures”, Pearson Education Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2003
4) Kenneth H .Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and its Applications”, 5/e, Tata Mc Graw Hill
Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi 2003
5) Richard Johnsonbaugh, “Discrete Mathematics”, 5/e, Pearson Education Asia, NewDelhi,
2002.
6) Joe L Mott, Abraham Kandel, Theodore P Baker,“Discrete Mathematics for Computer
Scientists and Mathematicians”, 2/e, Prentice-Hall India, 2009.

Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Show that R⋁M , R⋁S , M , S cannot exist simultaneously (without using truth
table)
2. Represent the following statement in symbolic form “Not every city in Canada is clean”.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2):
1. How many possible arrangements are there for the letters in MASSASAUGA in which 4
A’ s are together?
2. Find the number of integers between 1 and 1000 inclusive, which are not divisible by 5,
6 or 8
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. If A = {1, 2, 3, 4}, give an example of a relation R that is reflexive and symmetric but not
transitive.
2. Let Z be the set of integers. R is a relation called “Congruence Modulo 3 “ defined by R
= { (x,y) /x ɛ Z,y ɛ Z, x - y is divisible by 3 } . Show that R is an equivalence relation.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Assume A ={ a, b, c}. Let P(A) be its power set and ‘≤ ‘ be the subset relation on the
power set. Draw the Hasse diagram of (P(A), ≤).
2. What is meant by Bounded Lattice ? Give an example.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. Solve ar- 3ar-1- 4ar-2 = 3r using Generating function method; Given a0 = 1, a1 = 2.
2. Find the generating function for the sequence 1, 3, 32, 33 …….
Course Outcome 6 (CO6):
1. Prove that the group { 1,-1, i, -i } is cyclic with generators i and –i.
2. State and prove Lagrange’s Theorem.
 COMPUTER
Model Question Paper SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
QP CODE:
Reg No:______________
Name :______________ PAGES : 3

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: MAT 203

Course Name: Discrete Mathematical Structures

Max.Marks :100 Duration: 3 Hrs

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Show the following implication without constructing the truth table: (P ^ Q) => P→Q
2. Write the negation of the following statement. “ If I drive, then I will not walk”
3. What is pigeon hole principle? Explain. If you select any five numbers from 1 to 8 then
prove that at least two of them will add up to 9 .
4. In how many ways can the letters of the word ALLAHABAD be arranged ?
5. Show that the divisibility relation ' / ' is a partial ordering on the set Z+.
6. Consider the functions given by f(x) = 2x+3 and g(x) = x2. Find (g o f ) and ( f o g).
7. What is meant by exponential generating function? Explain.
8. Provide one example of linear homogeneous recurrence relation. Mention the degree
also.
9. What is a monoid ? Explain.
10. Let (A, .) be a group. Show that (ab)-1 = b-1a-1

(10 x 3 = 30 Marks)

PART B

(Answer any one Question from each Module. Each question carries 14 Marks)

11.
(a) Show that S ⋁ R is tautologically implied by (PVQ) ⋀ (P→R) ⋀ (Q→S)
(6 marks)
 (b) Show that from COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
(ii) (∃x)(F(x) ⋀ S(x)) → (y) (M(y) → W(y)).
(iii)(∃y) (M(y) ⋀ W(y)) the conclusion (x)(F(x) →S(x)) follows.
(8 marks)
OR
12.
(a) Show that (x) (P(x) ⋁ Q(x)) ⇒ ((x)P(x) ⋁ (∃x) Q(x)) using indirect method of
proof .
(6 marks)
(b) Discuss indirect method of proof . Show that the following premises are inconsistent

(i) If Jack misses many classes through illness, then he fails high school.
(ii) If Jack fails high school, then he is uneducated.
(iii)If Jack reads a lot of books, then he is not uneducated.
(iv) Jack misses many classes through illness and reads a lot of books.
(8 marks)

13.
(a) Explain binomial theorem. Determine the coefficient of x9y3 in the expansion of
(x+y)12, (x+2y)12 and (2x- 3y)12 using binomial theorem.
(6 marks)
(b) How many 5 digit numbers can be formed from the digits 1,2,3,4,5 using the digits without
repetition ?
(i) How many of them are even?
(ii) How many are even and greater than 30,000?
(8 marks)
OR
14.
(a) There are 8 guests in a party. Each guest brings a gift and receives another gift in
return. No one is allowed to receive the gift they bought. How many ways are there to
distribute the gifts?
(6 marks)
(b) Six papers are set in an examination of which two are mathematical. Only one
examination will be conducted in a day. In how many different orders ,can the papers
be arranged so that
(i) Two mathematical papers are consecutive?
(ii) Two mathematical papers are not consecutive?
(8 marks)

15.
 COMPUTER
(a) Let A = { 1,2,3,4,...11,12} and let R be the equivalenceSCIENCE
relation on AAND ENGINEERING
x A defined by
(a,b) R (c,d) iff a+d = b+c. Prove that R is an equivalence relation and find the
equivalence class of (2 ,5)
(8 marks)
(b) What is a chain lattice ? Explain. Also show that every chain is a distributive lattice.
(6 marks)
OR
16.
(a) Suppose f(x) = x+2 , g(x) = x-2, and h(x) = 3x for x ɛ R , where R is the set of real
numbers. Find (g o f ) , ( f o g ) , (f o f) and ( g o g)
(8 marks)
(b) Let R and S be two relations on a set A . If R and S are symmetric, Prove that (R∩S)
is also symmetric.
(6 marks)

17.
(a) Solve the recurrence relation ar - 7ar-1+ 10ar-2 = 0 for r ≥ 2 ; Given a0 = 0; a1 = 41
using generating functions
(8 marks)
(b) Solve the recurrence relation ar - 4ar-1 + 4ar-2 = (r+1)2 using generating function.
(6 marks)
OR
18.
(a) Solve an - 3an-1 + 2 ; a0 = 1 n ≥ 1, using generating functions.
(8 marks)
(b) Use generating function to solve the following recurrence relation an = 2an-1+ 2n ;
with a0 = 2.
(6 marks)

19.
(a) Prove that the set 'Q' of rational numbers other than 1 forms an abelian group with
respect to the operation ' * ' defined by a * b = a+b -ab.
(8 Marks)
(b) Show that the direct product of two group is a group.
(6 Marks)
OR
20.
(a) Show that the subgroup of a cyclic group is cyclic.
(8 Marks)
(b) Let (A,*) be a group. Show that (A,*) is an abelian group if and only if a2* b2=(a*b)2 for all
‘a’ and ‘b’ in A
(6 Marks)
 COMPUTER
TEACHING PLAN SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

No of Lecture
No Contents
Hrs
Module – 1 (Fundamentals of Logic) (9 hrs)

1.1 1
Mathematical logic, Basic Connectives and Truth Table

1.2 Statements, Logical Connectives, Tautology, Contradiction 1

1.3 Logical Equivalence, The Laws of Logic 1
1.4 The Principle of duality, Substitution Rules 1
1.5 The implication, The Contrapositive, the Converse , the Inverse 1
1.6 Logical Implication,Rules of Inference, Logical Implication 1
1.7 The use of Quantifiers, Open Statement, Quantifier, Negation 1
Logically Equivalent, Contrapositive, The Converse, The
1.8 Inverse 1

1.9 Logical Implications 1

Module - 2 (Fundamentals of Counting Theory) (9 hrs)
2.1 The Pigeon-hole Principle 1
2.2 The Rule of Sum 1
2.3 Extension of Sum Rule 1
2.4 The Rule of Product 1
2.5 Extension of Product Rule , Permutations 1
2.6 Combinations, Combination with repetition 1
2.7 The Binomial Theorem 1
The Principle of Inclusion and Exclusion Theorem ( Without
2.8 1
Proof) Generalization of the Principle
2.9 Derangements 1

Module - 3 ( Relations and Functions) (9 hrs)

Cartesian Product, Binary Relation, Function, Domain, Range ,

3.1 1
One to One Function Image - Restriction

Properties, Reachability Relations, Reflexive

3.2 Relations,Symmetric Relations,Transitive relations, 1
Antisymmetric Relations.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
3.3 Partial Order relations 1

3.4 Equivalence Relation, Irreflexive Relations. 1

3.5 Partially ordered Set, Hasse Diagram.

1
Maximal-Minimal Element, Least Upper bound, Greatest
3.6 1
Lower Bound

3.7 Equivalence Relations and Partitions ,Equivalence Class 1

3.8 Lattice- Dual Lattice,sub lattice , Properties of glb and lub 1

Properties of Lattice , Special Lattice , Complete Lattice,

3.9 Bounded Lattice, Completed Lattice, Distributive Lattice 1

Module - 4 (Generating Functions and Recurrence Relations) (9 hrs)

4.1 Generating Function , Definition and Examples 1

Exponential Generating Function.

4.2 1

First Order Linear Recurrence Relations with Constant

4.3 Coefficients (Lecture I) 1

First Order Linear Recurrence Relations with Constant

4.4 1
Coefficients (Lecture II)

4.5 Homogeneous Solution 1

4.6 Non homogeneous Solution 1

Second order linear recurrence relations with constant

4.7 1
coefficients

4.8 Homogeneous Solution 1

4.9 Non homogeneous Solution 1

Module - 5 (Algebraic Structures )( 9 hrs)

Algebraic System-Properties, Homomorphism and
5.1 1
Isomorphism

5.2 Semi group , Monoid, Cyclic monoid 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
5.3 Sub semigroup and sub monoid 1

5.4 Homomorphism and Isomorphism of Semigroup, Monoids and

1
Groups
Elementary Properties, Subgroup, Symmetric group on three
5.5 symbols 1

5.6 The direct Product of two Groups 1

5.7 Group Homomorphism, Isomorphism, Cyclic group 1

5.8 Right coset, Left coset 1

5.9 Lagrange’s Theorem 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
CST DATA CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
INTRODUCTION
201 STRUCTURES
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course aims at moulding the learner to understand the various data structures,
their organization and operations. The course helps the learners to assess the applicability of
different data structures and associated algorithms for solving real world problem which requires
to compare and select appropriate data structures to solve the problem efficiently. This course
introduces abstract concepts for data organization and manipulation using data structures such as
stacks, queues, linked lists, binary trees, heaps and graphs for designing their own data structures
to solve practical application problems in various fields of Computer Science.

Prerequisite: Topics covered under the course Programming in C (EST 102)

Design an algorithm for a computational task and calculate the time/space

CO1
complexities of that algorithm (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Identify the suitable data structure (array or linked list) to represent a data item
required to be processed to solve a given computational problem and write an
CO2
algorithm to find the solution of the computational problem (Cognitive Knowledge
Level: Apply)

Write an algorithm to find the solution of a computational problem by selecting an

CO3 appropriate data structure (binary tree/graph) to represent a data item to be processed
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Store a given dataset using an appropriate Hash Function to enable efficient access of
CO4
data in the given set (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Select appropriate sorting algorithms to be used in specific circumstances (Cognitive
CO5
Knowledge Level: Analyze)

Design and implement Data Structures for solving real world problems efficiently
CO6
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Test1 (Percentage) Test2 (Percentage) Examination Marks

Remember 30 30 30
Understand 30 30 30
Apply 40 40 40
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Analyse
Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the
syllabus and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing
remaining part of the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions
each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions
from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed
modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7
questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1

Basic Concepts of Data Structures

System Life Cycle, Algorithms, Performance Analysis, Space Complexity, Time Complexity,
Asymptotic Notation, Complexity Calculation of Simple Algorithms

Module 2

Arrays and Searching

Polynomial representation using Arrays, Sparse matrix, Stacks, Queues-Circular Queues, Priority
Queues, Double Ended Queues, Evaluation of Expressions
Linear Search and Binary Search
Module 3

Linked List and Memory Management

Self Referential Structures, Dynamic Memory Allocation, Singly Linked List-Operations on
Linked List. Doubly Linked List, Circular Linked List, Stacks and Queues using Linked List,
Polynomial representation using Linked List
Memory allocation and de-allocation-First-fit, Best-fit and Worst-fit allocation schemes

Module 4
Trees and Graphs
Trees, Binary Trees-Tree Operations, Binary Tree Representation, Tree Traversals, Binary Search
Trees- Binary Search Tree Operations
Graphs, Representation of Graphs, Depth First Search and Breadth First Search on Graphs,
Applications of Graphs

Module 5

Sorting and Hashing

Sorting Techniques – Selection Sort, Insertion Sort, Quick Sort, Merge Sort and Heap Sort
Hashing- Hashing Techniques, Collision Resolution, Overflow handling, Hashing functions –
Mid square, Division, Folding, Digit Analysis

Text Book

1. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Susan Anderson-Freed, Universities Press,

Fundamentals of Data Structures in C
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. Samanta D., Classic Data Structures, Prentice Hall India.

2. Richard F. Gilberg, Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with
C, 2/e, Cengage Learning.

3. Aho A. V., J. E. Hopcroft and J. D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms, Pearson
Publication.

4. Tremblay J. P. and P. G. Sorenson, Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, Tata

McGraw Hill.
5. Peter Brass, Advanced Data Structures, Cambridge University Press.
6. Lipschuts S., Theory and Problems of Data Structures, Schaum’s Series.
7. Wirth N., Algorithms + Data Structures = Programs, Prentice Hall.
8. Hugges J. K. and J. I. Michtm, A Structured Approach to Programming, PHI.
9. Martin Barrett, Clifford Wagner, C And Unix: Tools For Software Design, John Wiley.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1(CO1): Write an algorithm for matrix multiplication and calculate its
time complexity.

Course Outcome 2(CO2): How a linked list can be used to represent the polynomial
5x4y6+24x3y4-17x2y3+15xy2+45.Write an algorithm to add two Bivariate polynomials
represented using linked list.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Create a Binary search Tree with node representing the
following sequence 14, 15, 4, 18, 9, 16, 20, 17, 3, 7, 5, 2 and perform inorder, preorder
and postorder traversals on the above tree and print the output.

Course Outcome 4(CO4): The size of a hash table is 7. The index of the hash table
varies from 0 to 6. Consider the keys 89, 18, 49, 58, 25 in the order. Show how the keys
are stored in the hash table using Linear probing.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 5(CO5): In what circumstances does Quick Sort perform over Merge
sort.

Course Outcome 6(CO6): Design a reservation system for railways that include
waiting list. If the reservation is full “Display reservation full” and put the passenger in
in waiting list and give a waiting list number. If a passenger cancels the ticket, then the
seat should be automatically allocated to the first passenger in the waiting list.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH

DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 201

Course Name: DATA STRUCTURES

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Calculate the frequency count of the statement x = x+1; in the following code segment

for (i = 0; i< n; i++)

for (j = 0; j< n; j*=2)

x = x + 1;

2. What is the relevance of verification in System Life Cycle?

3. Write an algorithm to insert a new element in a particular position of an array.

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4. Convert the expression ((A/(B-D+E))*(F-G)*H) to postfix form. Show each step in the
conversion including the stack contents

5. Write an algorithm to count the number of occurrences of a character in a linked list (each
node contains only one character)

6. Write an algorithm for best-fit method of memory allocation

7. Draw the binary tree whose sequential representation is given below

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A B C - D E - - - - F G - - -

8. Find the Depth First Search of the following Graph

B C D

E F G

9. Write an algorithm to arrange n numbers in nonincreasing order.

10. Let the size of a hash table is 10. The index of the hash table varies from 0 to 9. Assume
the keys 73, 54, 15, 48, 89, 66, 37, 18, 41, 22, 62 are mapped using modulo operator.
Show how the keys are distributed using chaining method.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Part B

Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

11. a) Explain the System Life Cycle in detail (10)

b) How the performance of an algorithm is evaluated? (4)

OR

12. a) Write algorithms for Linear Search and Binary Search and Compare their time

complexities (10)

b) Between O(nlogn) and O(logn) which one is better and why? (4)

13. a) Write algorithms to insert and delete elements from a double ended queue.

Demonstrate with examples (10)

b) Compare and contrast Circular Queue with a Normal Queue (4)

OR

14. a) Write an algorithm to insert and delete elements from a Priority Queue (8)

b) Discuss an algorithm to convert an infix expression to a prefix expression (6)

15. a) Write an algorithm to multiply two polynomials represented using linked list (10)

b) How doubly linked list can be used to find palindromes ? (4)

OR

16. a) How is memory compaction (de-allocation) done in memory management ? (8)

b) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of First-fit, Best-fit and Worst-fit allocation

schemes (6)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

17. a) List the properties of Binary Search Tree. Write an algorithm to search an element

from a Binary Search Tree (10)

b) Write an iterative algorithm for in-order traversal of a Binary Tree (4)

OR

18. a) Give algorithms for DFS and BFS of a graph and explain with examples (8)

b) How graphs can be represented in a Computer? (6)

19. a) Write algorithms for Merge sort and Quick Sort. (10)

b) Illustrate the working of Quick sort on the following input 38, 8, 0, 28, 45, -12, 89, 66,
42 (4)

OR

20. a) With examples discuss the different hash functions used for hashing (10)

b) Apply the hash function h(x) = x mod 7 for linear probing on the data 2341, 4234,
2839, 430, 22, 397, 3920 and show the resulting hash table (4)

Teaching Plan
Module 1 :Basic Concepts of Data Structures (5 hours)

1.1 System Life Cycle, 1 hour

1.2 Algorithms , Performance Analysis 1 hour

1.3 Space Complexity, Time Complexity 1 hour

1.4 Asymptotic Notation (Big O Notation) 1 hour

1.5 Complexity Calculation of Simple Algorithms 1hour

Module 2 :Arrays and Searching (10 hours)

2.1 Polynomial representation using Arrays 1 hour

2.2 Sparse matrix (Lecture 1) 1 hour

2.3 Sparse matrix (Lecture 2) 1 hour
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

2.4 Stacks 1 hour

2.5 Queues, Circular Queues 1 hour

2.6 Priority Queues, 1 hour

2.7 Double Ended Queues, 1 hour

2.8 Conversion and Evaluation of Expressions (Lecture 1) 1 hour

2.9 Conversion and Evaluation of Expressions (Lecture 2) 1 hour

2.10 Linear Search and Binary Search 1 hour

Module 3 : Linked List and Memory Management (12 hours)

3.1 Self Referential Structures 1 hour

3.2 Dynamic Memory Allocation 1 hour

3.3 Singly Linked List-Operations on Linked List, 1 hour

3.4 Doubly Linked List 1 hour

3.5 Circular Linked List 1 hour

3.6 Stacks using Linked List 1 hour

3.7 Queues using Linked List 1 hour

3.8 Polynomial representation using Linked List (Lecture 1) 1 hour

3.9 Polynomial representation using Linked List (Lecture2) 1 hour

3.10 Memory de-allocation 1 hour

3.11 Memory allocation-First-fit 1 hour

3.12 Best-fit and Worst-fit allocation schemes 1hour

Module 4 :Trees and Graphs (8 hours)

4.1 Trees, Binary Trees 1hour

4.2 Tree Operations, Binary Tree Representation, 1hour

4.3 Tree Traversals 1hour

4.4 Binary Search Trees 1hour

4.5 Binary Search Tree Operations 1hour

4.6 Graphs, Representation of Graphs 1hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4.7 Depth First Search and Breadth First Search on Graphs 1hour
4.8 Applications of Graphs 1hour

Module 5 : Sorting and Hashing (10 hours)

5.1 Sorting Techniques – Selection Sort 1hour

5.2 Insertion Sort 1hour

5.3 Quick Sort 1hour

5.4 Merge Sort 1hour

5.5 Heap Sort 1hour

5.6 Hashing- Hashing Techniques 1hour

5.7 Collision Resolution 1hour

5.8 Overflow handling 1hour

5.9 Hashing functions – Mid square and Division methods 1hour

5.10 Folding and Digit Analysis methods 1hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

CST Category L T P Credit Year of Introduction

Logic System Design
203 PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The objective of the course is to familiarize learners with the basic concepts of
Boolean algebra and digital systems. This course covers the design of simple combinational and
sequential logic circuits, representation and arithmetic algorithms for Binary, BCD (Binary
Coded Decimal) and Floating point numbers which in turn are helpful in understanding
organization & design of a computer system and understanding how patterns of ones and zeros
can be used to store information on computers, including multimedia data.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO# CO

Illustrate decimal, binary, octal, hexadecimal and BCD number systems, perform
conversions among them and do the operations - complementation, addition,
CO1
subtraction, multiplication and division on binary numbers (Cognitive Knowledge
level: Understand)
Simplify a given Boolean Function and design a combinational circuit to implement
CO2 the simplified function using Digital Logic Gates (Cognitive Knowledge level:
Apply)
Design combinational circuits - Adders, Code Convertors, Decoders, Magnitude
CO3 Comparators, Parity Generator/Checker and design the Programmable Logic Devices -
ROM and PLA. (Cognitive Knowledge level: Apply)
Design sequential circuits - Registers, Counters and Shift Registers. (Cognitive
CO4
Knowledge level: Apply)
Use algorithms to perform addition and subtraction on binary, BCD and floating point
CO5
numbers (Cognitive Knowledge level: Understand)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern:

End Semester
Bloom’s Category Test 1 (%) Test 2 (%)
Examination Marks (%)

Remember 20 20 20
Understand 35 35 35

Apply 45 45 45
Analyse

Evaluate
Create
Mark Distribution: COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

SYLLABUS
Module I
Number systems, Operations & Codes
Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Number Systems- Number Base Conversions.
Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division of binary numbers. Representation of
negative numbers- Complements, Subtraction with complements. Addition and subtraction of
BCD, Octal and Hexadecimal numbers. Binary codes- Decimal codes, Error detection codes,
Reflected code, Character coding schemes – ASCII, EBCDIC.

Module II
Boolean Algebra
Postulates of Boolean Algebra. Basic theorems and Properties of Boolean Algebra. Boolean
Functions - Canonical and Standard forms. Simplification of Boolean Functions- Using
Karnaugh- Map Method (upto five variables), Don’t care conditions, Product of sums
 COMPUTER
simplification, Tabulation Method. Digital Logic SCIENCE
Gates- Implementation AND ENGINEERING
of Boolean functions
using basic and universal gates.

Module III
Combinational Logic Circuits
Design Procedure & Implementation of combinational logic circuits- Binary adders and
subtractors, Binary Parallel adder, Carry look ahead adder, BCD adder, Code converter,
Magnitude comparator, Decoder, Demultiplexer, Encoder, Multiplexer, Parity generator/
Checker.

Module IV
Sequential logic circuits:
Flip-flops- SR, JK, T and D. Triggering of flip-flops- Master slave flip- flops, Edge- triggered
flip- flops. Excitation table and characteristic equation. Registers- register with parallel load.
Counter design: Asynchronous counters- Binary and BCD counters, timing sequences and state
diagrams. Synchronous counters- Binary Up- down counter, BCD counter.

Module V
Shift registers
Shift registers – Serial In Serial Out, Serial In Parallel Out, Bidirectional Shift Register with
Parallel load. Ring counter. Johnson counter- timing sequences and state diagrams.

Arithmetic algorithms
Algorithms for addition and subtraction of binary numbers in signed magnitude and 2’s
complement representations. Algorithm for addition and subtraction of BCD numbers.
Representation of floating point numbers, Algorithm for addition and subtraction of floating
point numbers.

Programmable Logic devices

ROM. Programmable Logic Array(PLA)- Implementation of simple circuits using PLA.

Text Books:
1. M. Morris Mano, Digital Logic & Computer Design, 4/e, Pearson Education, 2013
2. Thomas L Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, 10/e, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. M. Morris Mano, Computer System Architecture, 3/e, Pearson Education, 2007.

Reference Books:
1. M. Morris Mano, Michael D Ciletti , Digital Design With An Introduction to the Verilog
HDL, 5/e, Pearson Education, 2013.
2. Donald D Givone, Digital Principles and Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003
Sample Course Level Assessment Questions COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Course Outcome1(CO1): Perform the following number base conversions:

a) (250.55)
! 10 to Hexadecimal b) (357)
! 8 to Decimal

Course Outcome 2(CO2): Given a Boolean function F and don’t care conditions D, using
Karnaugh map obtain the simplified expression in (i) SOP and (ii) POS:
! F(A, B, C, D) = A′B′D′ + A′CD + A′BC
! D(A, B, C, D) = A′BC′D + ACD + A B′D

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Design a BCD to Excess-3 Code Convertor.

Course Outcome 4(CO4): Design a 4- bit binary ripple counter.

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Demonstrate floating-point addition algorithm.

 COMPUTER
Model Question Paper SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
QP CODE: PAGES: 2

Reg No:_______________
Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH

DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 203

Course name : LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN

Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART-A

(Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. Represent the decimal numbers (459)10 and (859)10 in hexadecimal and perform

addition of these hexadecimal numbers.

2. Subtract (1101)
! 2 from !(11010)2 using: i) !2′s complement and ii) 1′
! s complement
arithmetic.

3. Find the dual and complement of the boolean function F

! = A B′ + B(A + B′).

4. Using K-map, reduce the expression: A

! B + A BC + A BC + BC.

5. Design a half subtractor with NAND gates only.

6. Design a combinational circuit that multiplies an input decimal digit by 5 represented in

BCD. The output is also in BCD. Show that the outputs can be obtained from the input
lines without using any logic gates.
7. Differentiate between ripple counter and synchronous counter.

8. Construct D flip- flop using NAND gates. Also give its truth table.
9. Explain how a shift register is used for serial data transfer?

10. Write short notes on ROM.

PART-B
(Answer any one full question from each module) (14X5=70)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

11. (a) Perform the following operations using 2’s complement arithmetic: (8)
(i) !8810 + (−37)10 (ii) !(−20)10 + (−12)10

(b) Perform the following base conversions: (i) (101011.11)

! 2 to octal (6)
(ii) (3F 9B)16 to binary (iii) (121)10 to binary (iv) (3077)8 to binary

OR

12. (a) Find the 12 bit 2′

! s complement representation of the following decimal (6)
numbers.
(i) – 97 (ii) – 224 (iii) - 197.5

(b) Perform the following operations (8)

(i) (520)8 + (488)8 (ii) (520)16 − (488)16

13. (a) Prove that (i) A! B + A(B + C ) + B(B + C ) = B + AC (4)

(ii) A
! B + A(B + C ) + B(B + D) = A

(b) Using K-map, simplify the Boolean function F in sum of products form, (10
using the don’t care conditions d:
!F(w, x, y, z) = w′(x′y + x′y′ + x yz) + x′z′(y + w)
!d(w, x, y, z) = w′ x (y′z + yz′) + w yz

OR
14. (a) Simplify the following expressions using Karnaugh- map method. (8)
(i) !F = Σ(0,2,4,6,9,11,13,15,17,21,25,27,29,31)
(ii) !F = Π(0,2,5,7)

(b) Convert the following to the other canonical form: (6)

∑
(i) !F(x, y, z, a) = (1,3,7)

(ii) !F(x, y, z) = Π(0,3,6,7)

(iii) F(A,
! B, C, D) = Π(0,1,2,3,4,6,12)

15. (a) Implement Full adder circuit using NAND gate only. (4)

(b) Design a code converter for converting BCD to Excess 3 code (10)
OR

16. (a) With a neat diagram explain 4-bit carry look-ahead adder. (6)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
(b) Design a Gray to binary code converter using a 4x1 MUX. Draw the (8)
circuit diagram and explain.

17. (a) Design a counter that count the states 0,3,5,6,0… using T flip- flops. (10)

(b) Write the characteristics equation, excitation table of JK, T and D flipflop. (4)
OR

18. (a) Explain race around condition and how it can be avoided. (6)
(b) Design a synchronous Binary Up-Down Counter. (8)

19. (a) With a neat diagram explain universal shift register. (8)

(b) Explain Johnson Counter with timing diagram. (6)

OR

20. (a) Write algorithm for floating point addition and subtraction. (8)
(b) Implement the functions Y
! 1 = A B′C′ + A B′C + A BC and Y
! 2 = BC + AC (6)
using minimum gates Programmable Logic Array.

Teaching Plan

(7
Module 1: Number systems, Operations & Codes (No algorithms)
hours)
Number Systems: Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number systems,
1.1 1 hour
Number Base Conversions.

Binary Arithmetic: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division of

1.2 1 hour
Binary Numbers. (Lecture 1)

Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division of Binary Numbers. (Lecture

1.3 1 hour
2)
Representation of Negative Numbers- Complements, subtraction with 1 hour
1.4
complements.

1.5 BCD Arithmetic: Addition and Subtraction of BCD Numbers 1 hour

Octal and Hexadecimal Arithmetic: Addition & Subtraction of Octal and

1.6 1 hour
Hexadecimal Numbers.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Binary Codes: Decimal Codes, Error detection codes, Reflected code,
1.7 1 hour
Character Coding Schemes-ASCII, EBCDIC
(9
Module 2: Boolean Algebra
hours)
2.1 Introduction to Boolean Algebra: Postulates of Boolean Algebra 1 hour

2.2 Basic theorems and Properties of Boolean Algebra 1 hour

2.3 Boolean Functions: Canonical and Standard Forms 1 hour

2.4 Simplification of Boolean Functions: Karnaugh -Map Method (upto five 1 hour
variables), Don’t care conditions (Lecture 1)
Simplification of Boolean Functions: Karnaugh -Map Method (upto five
2.5 1 hour
variables), Don’t care conditions (Lecture 2)

2.6 Product of sums simplification 1 hour

2.7 Tabulation method 1 hour

Digital Logic Gates: AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, XNOR,
2.8 Implementation of Boolean functions using basic and universal gates. (Lecture 1 hour
1)
Digital Logic Gates: AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR, XNOR,
2.9 Implementation of Boolean functions using basic and universal gates. (Lecture 1 hour
2)
(9
Module 3: Combinational Logic Circuits
hours)

3.1 Design Procedure & Implementation of Combinational Circuits 1 hour

Binary Adders:
3.2 1 hour
Implementation of Half Adder, Full Adder
Binary Subtractors:
3.3 1 hour
Implementation of Half Subtractor, Full Subtractor

Implementation of Binary Parallel Adder ,Carry look ahead Adder, BCD Adder
3.4 1 hour
(Lecture 1)

Implementation of Binary Parallel Adder ,Carry look ahead Adder, BCD Adder
3.5 1 hour
(Lecture 2)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Implementation of Various Combinational Circuits:
3.6 1 hour
Code Converters, Magnitude Comparator

3.7 Implementation of Decoder, Demultiplexer 1 hour

3.8 Implementation of Encoder, Multiplexer 1 hour

3.9 Implementation of Parity Generator/Checker 1 hour

(9
Module 4: Sequential logic circuits:
hours)
Flip flops:
4.1 1 hour
SR, JK, T and D flip- flops (Lecture 1)

4.2 SR, JK, T and D flip- flops (Lecture 2) 1 hour

Triggering of flip-flops- Master slave flip- flop, Edge- triggered flip-flops

4.3 1 hour
(Lecture 1)

Triggering of flip-flops- Master slave flip- flop, Edge- triggered flip-flops

4.4 1 hour
(Lecture 2)

4.5 Excitation table and characteristic equations of flip- flops 1 hour

4.6 Registers- Register with parallel load 1 hour

Counter Design:
4.7 Asynchronous counters- Binary and BCD counters- timing sequences and state 1 hour
diagrams. (Lecture 1)
Asynchronous counters- Binary and BCD counters- timing sequences and state
4.8 1 hour
diagrams. (Lecture 2)

4.9 Synchronous counters- Binary Up- down counter, BCD counter 1 hour

(11
Module 5: Shift registers, Arithmetic algorithms & PLD’s
hours)

5.1 Shift Registers - Serial In Serial Out, Serial In Parallel Out. 1 hour

5.2 Bidirectional Shift Register with Parallel load 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Shift register counters - Ring Counter, Johnson Counter- timing sequences
5.3 1 hour
and state diagrams

Arithmetic Algorithms: Algorithm for addition and subtraction of binary

5.4 1 hour
numbers in Signed magnitude and 2’s complement representations (Lecture 1)

Algorithm for addition and subtraction of binary numbers in Signed magnitude

5.5 1 hour
and 2’s complement representations (Lecture 2)

5.6 Algorithm for addition and subtraction of BCD numbers 1 hour

5.7 Representation of floating point numbers (IEEE Standard representations). 1 hour

5.8 Algorithms for floating point addition and subtraction 1 hour

5.9 Programmable Logic devices - ROM 1 hour

5.10 PLA, Implementation of simple circuits using PLA(Lecture 1) 1 hour

5.11 PLA, Implementation of simple circuits using PLA(Lecture 2) 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

OBJECT ORIENTED YEAR OF

CST CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION
205
USING JAVA
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: The purpose of this course is to enable learners to solve problems by breaking it
down to object level while designing software and to implement it using Java. This course covers
Object Oriented Principles, Object Oriented Programming in Java, Inheritance, Exception
handling, Event handling, multithreaded programming and working with window-based
graphics. This course helps the learners to develop Desktop GUI Applications, Mobile
applications, Enterprise Applications, Scientific Applications and Web based Applications.

Prerequisite: Topics covered under the course PROGRAMMING IN C (EST 102)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Write Java programs using the object oriented concepts - classes, objects,
CO1 constructors, data hiding, inheritance and polymorphism (Cognitive Knowledge
Level: Apply)

Utilise datatypes, operators, control statements, built in packages & interfaces, Input/
CO2 Output Streams and Files in Java to develop programs (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Illustrate how robust programs can be written in Java using exception handling
CO3
mechanism (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Understand)

Write application programs in Java using multithreading and database connectivity

CO4
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Write Graphical User Interface based application programs by utilising event
CO5
handling features and Swing in Java (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO
PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability
PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work
Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom’s Category
Test1 (Marks %) Test2 (Marks %) Marks (% )

Remember 30 30 30
Understand 30 30 30

Apply 40 40 40
Analyse

Evaluate
Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First series test shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and
the second series test shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the
syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions
each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions
from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed
modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7
questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which a student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Object Oriented Programming Using Java

Module 1

Introduction:
Approaches to Software Design - Functional Oriented Design, Object Oriented Design, Case
Study of Automated Fire Alarm System.
Object Modeling Using Unified Modeling Language (UML) – Basic Object Oriented concepts,
UML diagrams, Use case model, Class diagram, Interaction diagram, Activity diagram, State
chart diagram.
Introduction to Java - Java programming Environment and Runtime Environment, Development
Platforms -Standard, Enterprise. Java Virtual Machine (JVM), Java compiler, Bytecode, Java
applet, Java Buzzwords, Java program structure, Comments, Garbage Collection, Lexical Issues.

Module 2

Core Java Fundamentals:

Primitive Data types - Integers, Floating Point Types, Characters, Boolean. Literals, Type
Conversion and Casting, Variables, Arrays, Strings, Vector class.
Operators - Arithmetic Operators, Bitwise Operators, Relational Operators, Boolean Logical
Operators, Assignment Operator, Conditional (Ternary) Operator, Operator Precedence.
Control Statements - Selection Statements, Iteration Statements and Jump Statements.
Object Oriented Programming in Java - Class Fundamentals, Declaring Objects, Object
Reference, Introduction to Methods, Constructors, this Keyword, Method Overloading, Using
Objects as Parameters, Returning Objects, Recursion, Access Control, Static Members, Final
Variables, Inner Classes, Command Line Arguments, Variable Length Arguments.
Inheritance - Super Class, Sub Class, The Keyword super, protected Members, Calling Order of
Constructors, Method Overriding, the Object class, Abstract Classes and Methods, using final
with Inheritance.
Module 3

More features of Java:

Packages and Interfaces - Defining Package, CLASSPATH, Access Protection, Importing
Packages, Interfaces.
Exception Handling - Checked Exceptions, Unchecked Exceptions, try Block and catch Clause,
Multiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements, throw, throws and finally.
Input/Output - I/O Basics, Reading Console Input, Writing Console Output, PrintWriter Class,
Object Streams and Serialization, Working with Files.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Module 4
Advanced features of Java:
Java Library - String Handling – String Constructors, String Length, Special String Operations -
Character Extraction, String Comparison, Searching Strings, Modifying Strings, using valueOf(),
Comparison of StringBuffer and String.
Collections framework - Collections overview, Collections Interfaces- Collection Interface, List
Interface.
Collections Class – ArrayList class. Accessing a Collection via an Iterator.
Event handling - Event Handling Mechanisms, Delegation Event Model, Event Classes, Sources
of Events, Event Listener Interfaces, Using the Delegation Model.
Multithreaded Programming - The Java Thread Model, The Main Thread, Creating Thread,
Creating Multiple Threads, Synchronization, Suspending, Resuming and Stopping Threads.

Module 5

Graphical User Interface and Database support of Java:

Swings fundamentals - Swing Key Features, Model View Controller (MVC), Swing Controls,
Components and Containers, Swing Packages, Event Handling in Swings, Swing Layout
Managers, Exploring Swings –JFrame, JLabel, The Swing Buttons, JTextField.
Java DataBase Connectivity (JDBC) - JDBC overview, Creating and Executing Queries – create
table, delete, insert, select.

Text Books:

1. Herbert Schildt, Java: The Complete Reference, 8/e, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Rajib Mall, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, 4th edition, PHI, 2014.
3. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, Java How to Program, Early Objects 11th Edition, Pearson,
2018.

Reference Books:

1. Y. Daniel Liang, Introduction to Java Programming, 7/e, Pearson, 2013.

2. Nageswararao R., Core Java: An Integrated Approach, Dreamtech Press, 2008.
3. Flanagan D., Java in A Nutshell, 5/e, O'Reilly, 2005.
4. Barclay K., J. Savage, Object Oriented Design with UML and Java, Elsevier, 2004.
5. Sierra K., Head First Java, 2/e, O'Reilly, 2005.
6. Balagurusamy E., Programming JAVA a Primer, 5/e, McGraw Hill, 2014.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1(CO1): For the following passage develop UML diagrams and then
implement it as a Java program in accordance with your UML design.

Passage: College Office collects semester fee and college bus fee for each student. A
clerk at the college office collects the fees from each student. The bus fee is calculated
depending on the distance of the corresponding bus stop from the college. The semester
fee varies depending upon the semester as well as branch of each student. Students are
supposed to pay the fees in full. Economically backward students are eligible for 50%
discount in semester fee. The consolidated fees receipt is issued to each student by the
clerk, which contains the student name, admission number, semester and branch of
student along with details of fees collected. Students can log in and view the details of
fees remitted and dues if any. The system allows students and clerk level login to the
system. Clerk is able to view reports of each class showing status of fees payment of
each student.

Course Outcome 2(CO2): Write a Java program to evaluate a post fix expression
containing two operands and a single operator using stack. Stack should be implemented
as a separate entity so as to reflect OOP concepts.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Write a program to demonstrate the start, run, sleep and join
methods in Thread class.

Course Outcome 4(CO4): Write a GUI based program with separate buttons to add,
delete and display student details i.e. name, student ID, current semester and branch of
study based on student ID.

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Using Swing create a JFrame with a JLabel and two
JButtons. Set the texts of JButtons as “Yes” and “No” respectively. Set the JLabel’s text
to the text of the button currently being pressed. Initially the JLabel’s text is blank.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 205

Course Name: Object Oriented Programming using Java

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Briefly explain the portable, secure and robust features of Java.

2. Describe the concepts of object and class with a suitable Java program.
3. Explain the concept of method overriding with an example.
4. What is the use of the keyword final in Java?
5. Explain the concept of streams.
6. Explain any two applications of Serialization.
7. Distinguish the usage of “==” and equals() method when comparing String type?
8. What are Collections in Java? Explain any one Collection interface in Java.
9. Explain any two properties of Swing components in Java.
10. Explain JLabel component. With suitable examples explain any two of its constructors.
Part B
Answer any one question completely from each module

11.
(a) Describe in detail any three Object Oriented Programming principles. Illustrate with
suitable examples.
(9)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

(b) What is Java Runtime Environment? What is the role of Java Virtual Machine in it?
(5)
OR
12.
(a) Compare and contrast Java standard edition and Java enterprise edition.
(5)
(b) Why is Java considered to be platform independent? What is the role of Bytecode in
making Java platform independent?
(9)

13.
(a) Explain in detail the primitive data types in Java.
(8)
(b) Explain automatic type conversion in Java with an example. What are the two
conditions required for it?
(6)
OR
14.
(a) Using a suitable Java program explain the difference between private and public
members in the context of inheritance.
(8)
(b) Is it possible to use the keyword super within a static method? Give justification for
your answer.
(6)

15.
(a) Explain in detail about byte streams and character streams with suitable code
samples.
(6)
(b) Describe in detail about exception handling, try block and catch clause with the help
of a suitable Java program.
(8)
OR
16.
(a) Explain object streams in Java. Explain the role of Serializable interface with a
suitable code sample.
(8)
(b) Explain throw, throws and finally constructs with the help of a Java program.
(6)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

17.
(a) Describe in detail the creation of a thread using the Runnable interface and the
Thread class with suitable examples.
(10)
(b) Explain List Interface. Mention any two exceptions thrown by its methods.
(4)
OR
18.
(a) Explain in detail the Delegation Event model for event handling in Java.
(7)
(b) Write a simple program by extending appropriate class to demonstrate the working of
threads in java.
(7)

19.
(a) Write a Java program to demonstrate the use of JLabel and JButton by adding them
to JFrame.
(7)
(b) Explain step-by-step procedure of using Java DataBase Connectivity in Java
programs.
(7)
OR
20.
(a) Explain the class hierarchy of Java Swing components.
(7)
(b) Write a Java Program to create a student table and to add student details to it using
JDBC.
(7)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan

Module 1 : Introduction (8 hours)

Approaches to Software Design- Functional Oriented Design, Object-

1.1 1 hour
Oriented Design, Case Study of Automated Fire Alarm System.
1.2 Object Modeling Using UML – Basic object oriented concepts 1 hour

1.3 Basic object oriented concepts 1 hour

1.4 UML diagrams, Use case model 1hour

1.5 Class diagram, Interaction diagram 1hour

1.6 Activity diagram, State chart diagram 1hour

Java programming Environment and Runtime Environment,

1.7 Development Platforms -Standard, Enterprise. JVM, Java compiler, 1hour
Bytecode
Java applet, Java Buzzwords, Java program structure, Comments,
1.8 1hour
Garbage Collection, Lexical Issues

Module 2: Core Java Fundamentals (11 hours)

Core Java Fundamentals: Primitive Data types, Integers, Floating
2.1 1 hour
Point Types, Characters, Boolean

Literals, Type Conversion and Casting, Variables, Arrays, Strings,

2.2 1 hour
Vector class.
Operators: Arithmetic Operators, Bitwise Operators, Relational
2.3 Operators, Boolean Logical Operators, Assignment Operator, 1 hour
Conditional (Ternary) Operator, Operator Precedence.

Control Statements: Selection Statements, Iteration Statements and

2.4 1 hour
Jump Statements.
Object Oriented Programming in Java: Class Fundamentals, Declaring
2.5 1 hour
Objects, Object Reference, Introduction to Methods

Constructors, this Keyword, Method Overloading, Using Objects as

2.6 1 hour
Parameters
2.7 Returning Objects, Recursion, Access Control, static Members 1 hour
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Final Variables, Inner Classes, Command-Line Arguments, Variable

2.8 1 hour
Length Arguments
Inheritance : Super class, Sub class, the keywords super, protected
2.9 1 hour
Members,

2.10 Calling Order of Constructors, Method Overriding, the Object class, 1 hour
2.11 Abstract Classes and Methods, Using final with Inheritance 1 hour

Module 3: More features of Java (8 hours)

Packages and Interfaces: Defining Package, CLASSPATH, Access
3.1 1 hour
Protection, Importing Packages

3.2 Interfaces 1 hour

Input / Output: I/O Basics, Reading Console Input, Writing Console
3.3 1 hour
Output, PrintWriter Class
3.4 Object Streams and Serialization 1 hour
3.5 Working with Files 1 hour

Exception Handling: Checked Exceptions, Unchecked Exceptions, try

3.6 1 hour
Block and catch Clause
3.7 Multiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements 1 hour
3.8 throw, throws and finally 1 hour
Module 4:Advanced features of Java (10 hours)

Java Library: String Handling – String Constructors, String Length,

4.1 1hour
Special String Operations
Character Extraction, String Comparison, Searching Strings,
4.2 Modifying Strings Using valueOf( ), Comparison of String Buffer 1hour
and String.

Collections framework – Collections overview, Collections Interfaces-

4.3 1hour
Collection Interface
4.4 List Interface, Collections Class – ArrayList Class 1hour

4.5 Accessing Collections via an Iterator. 1hour

Event handling: Event Handling Mechanisms, Delegation Event
4.6 1hour
Model

4.7 Delegation Event Model, Event Classes 1hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Sources of Events, Event Listener Interfaces, Using the Delegation

4.8 1hour
Model
Multithreaded Programming: The Java Thread Model, The Main
4.9 1hour
Thread, Creating Thread

Creating Multiple Threads, Synchronization, Suspending, Resuming

4.10 1hour
and Stopping Threads.
Module 5: Graphical User Interface and Database support of Java (8 hours)

5.1 Swings fundamentals, Swing Key Features 1hour

5.2 MVC, Swing Controls, Components and Containers 1hour

5.3 Swing Packages, Event Handling in Swings. 1 hour

5.4 Swing Layout Managers 1hour

5.5 Exploring Swings –JFrame, JLabel, The Swing Buttons, JTextField. 1 hour
JDBC overview, Creating and Executing Queries – create table,
5.6 1hour
delete, insert, select (Basics only, DBMS course is not a prerequisite).

5.7 Creating and Executing Queries – create table, delete, insert, select. 1 hour
5.8 Creating and Executing Queries – create table, delete, insert, select. 1 hour
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
DATA STRUCTURES CATEGORY L T P CREDIT INTRODUCTION
CSL 201
LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2 2019

Preamble: The aim of the Course is to give hands-on experience for Learners on creating and
using different Data Structures. Data Structures are used to process data and arrange data in
different formats for many applications. The most commonly performed operations on data
structures are traversing, searching, inserting, deleting and few special operations like merging
and sorting.

Prerequisite: Topics covered under the course Programming in C (EST 102)

Write a time/space efficient program using arrays/linked lists/trees/graphs to provide

CO1 necessary functionalities meeting a given set of user requirements (Cognitive
Knowledge Level: Analyse)

Write a time/space efficient program to sort a list of records based on a given key in
CO2
the record (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Examine a given Data Structure to determine its space complexity and time
CO3
complexities of operations on it (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

CO4 Design and implement an efficient data structure to represent given data (Cognitive
Knowledge Level: Apply)

Write a time/space efficient program to convert an arithmetic expression from one

CO5
notation to another (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Write a program using linked lists to simulate Memory Allocation and Garbage
CO6
Collection (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Test End Semester

Bloom’s Category
(Internal Exam)Percentage Examination Percentage

Remember 20 20
Understand 20 20

Apply 60 60
Analyse

Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 75 75 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks

Continuous Evaluation in Lab : 30 marks

Continuous Assessment Test : 15 marks

Viva-voce : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: The marks will be distributed as Algorithm 30 marks, Program
20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100 marks which will be converted out of
15 while calculating Internal Evaluation marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern: The marks will be distributed as Algorithm 30 marks,
Program 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100 marks will be converted out
of 75 for End Semester Examination.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Operating System to Use in Lab : Linux

Compiler/Software to Use in Lab : gcc

Programming Language to Use in Lab : Ansi C

Fair Lab Record:

All Students attending the Data Structures Lab should have a Fair Record. The fair record should
be produced in the University Lab Examination. Every experiment conducted in the lab should
be noted in the fair record. For every experiment in the fair record the right hand page should
contain Experiment Heading, Experiment Number, Date of Experiment, Aim of Experiment,
Data Structure used and the operations performed on them, Details of Experiment including
algorithm and Result of Experiment. The left hand page should contain a print out of the code
used for the experiment and sample output obtained for a set of input.

SYLLABUS

1. Implementation of Polynomials and Sparse matrices using arrays**

2. Implementation of Stack , Queues, Priority Queues, DEQUEUE and Circular Queues
using arrays**

3. Application problems using stacks: Conversion of expression from one notation to

another notation . **

4. Implementation of various linked list operations. **

5. Implementation of stack, queue and their applications using linked list.pression

6. Implementation of trees using linked list

7. Representation of polynomials using linked list, addition and multiplication of

polynomials. **

8. Implementation of binary trees using linked lists and arrays- creations, insertion, deletion
and traversal. **

9. Implementation of binary search trees – creation, insertion, deletion, search

10. Any application programs using trees

11. Implementation of sorting algorithms – bubble, insertion, selection, quick, merge sort
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

and heap sort.**

12. Implementation of searching algorithms – linear search, binary search.**

13. Representation of graphs and computing various parameters (in degree, out degree etc.) -
adjacency list, adjacency matrix.

14. Implementation of BFS and DFS for each graph representations.**

15. Implementation of hash table using your own mapping functions and observe collisions
and overflow resolving schemes.**

16. Simulation of first-fit, best-fit and worst-fit allocations.

17. Simulation of a basic memory allocator and garbage collector using doubly linked list.
** mandatory.

DATA STRUCTURES LAB - PRACTICE QUESTIONS

1. Write a program to read two polynomials and store them in an array. Calculate the sum of the
two polynomials and display the first polynomial, second polynomial and the resultant
polynomial.

2. C Write a program to enter two matrices in normal form . Write a function to convert two
matrices to tuple form and display it. Also find the transpose of the two matrices represented
in tuple form and display it. Find the sum of the two matrices in tuple form and display the
sum in tuple form.

3. Write a program to enter two matrices in normal form . Write a function to convert two
matrices to tuple form and display it. Also find the transpose of the two matrices represented
in tuple form and display it. Find the sum of the two matrices in tuple form and display the
sum in tuple form.

4. Implement a circular queue using arrays with the operations:

4.1.Insert an element to the queue.
4.2.Delete an elements from the queue.
4.3.Display the contents of the queue after each operation.

5. Implement a Queue using arrays with the operations:

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

5.1.Insert elements to the Queue.

5.2.Delete elements from the Queue.
5.3.Display the contents of the Queue after each operation.

6. Implement a Stack using arrays with the operations:

6.1.Pushing elements to the Stack.
6.2.Popping elements from the Stack
6.3.Display the contents of the Stack after each operation.

7. Implement a Priority Queue using arrays with the operations:

7.1.Insert elements to the Priority Queue.
7.2.Delete elements from the Priority Queue.
7.3.Display the contents of the Priority Queue after each operation.

8. Implement a Double-Ended Queue (DEQUEUE) with the operations:

8.1.Insert elements to the Front of the queue.
8.2.Insert elements to the Rear of the queue
8.3.Delete elements from the Front of the queue.
8.4.Delete elements from the Rear of the queue.
8.5.Display the queue after each operation.

9. Using stack convert an infix expression to a postfix expression and evaluate the postfix
expression.

10. Write a program to convert an infix expression to a prefix expression using stacks.

11. Convert an infix expression to a postfix expression without using a stack

12. Write a menu driven program for performing the following operations on a Linked List:
12.1.Display
12.2.Insert at Beginning
12.3.Insert at End
12.4.Insert at a specified Position
12.5.Delete from Beginning
12.6.Delete from End
12.7.Delete from a specified Position

13. Implement a stack using linked list with the operations:

13.1.Push elements to the queue.
13.2.Pop elements from the queue.
13.3.Display the queue after each operation.

14. Implement a Queue using linked list with the operations:

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

14.1.Insert an elements to the queue.

14.2.Delete an elements from the queue.
14.3.Display the queue after each operation.

15. Write a program to reverse the content of queue using stack

16. Write a program to read two polynomials and store them using linked list. Calculate the sum
of the two polynomials and display the first polynomial, second polynomial and the resultant
polynomial.

17. Write a program to read two polynomials and store them using linked list. Find the product
of two polynomials and store the result using linked list. Display the resultant polynomial.

18. Write a program for addition of polynomials containing two variables using linked list.

19. The details of students(number, name, total-mark) are to be stored in a linked list. Write
functions for the following operations:
19.1.Insert
19.2.Delete
19.3.Search
19.4.Sort on the basis of number
19.5.Display the resultant list after every operation

20. Create a Doubly Linked List from a string taking each character from the string. Check if the
given string is palindrome in an efficient method.

21. Create a binary tree with the following operations

21.1.Insert a new node
21.2.Inorder traversal.
21.3.Preorder traversal.
21.4.Postorder traversal.
21.5.Delete a node.

22. Write a program to create a binary search tree and find the number of leaf nodes

23. Create a binary search tree with the following operations:

23.1.Insert a new node .
23.2.Inorder traversal.
23.3.Preorder traversal.
23.4.Postorder traversal.
23.5.Delete a node.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

24. Write a program to sort a set of numbers using a binary tree.

25. Represent any given graph and

25.1.Perform a depth first search .
25.2.Perform a breadth first search

26. Create a text file containing the name, height, weight of the students in a class. Perform
Quick sort and Merge sort on this data and store the resultant data in two separate files. Also
write the time taken by the two sorting methods into the respective files.
Eg. Sony Mathew 5.5 60
Arun Sajeev 5.7 58
Rajesh Kumar 6.1 70

27. Write a program to sort a set of numbers using Heap sort and find a particular number from
the sorted set using Binary Search.

28. Implement a Hash table using Chaining method. Let the size of hash table be 10 so that the
index varies from 0 to 9.

29. Implement a Hash table that uses Linear Probing for collision resolution
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

OBJECT ORIENTED YEAR OF

CSL CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
PROGRAMMING INTRODUCTION
203
LAB (IN JAVA)
PCC 0 0 3 2 2019
Preamble: The aim of the course is to provide hands-on experience to the learners on various
object oriented concepts in Java Programming. This course helps the learners to enhance the ca-
pability to design and implement various Java applications for real world problems.

Prerequisite: Topics covered under the course Programming in C (EST 102)

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to

Implement the Object Oriented concepts - constructors, inheritance, method

CO1 overloading & overriding and polymorphism in Java (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Implement programs in Java which use datatypes, operators, control statements,
CO2 built in packages & interfaces, Input/Output streams and Files (Cognitive
Knowledge Level: Apply)
Implement robust application programs in Java using exception handling
CO3
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Implement application programs in Java using multithreading and database
CO4
connectivity (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Implement Graphical User Interface based application programs by utilizing event

CO5
handling features and Swing in Java (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

CO2 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

CO3 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

CO4 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

CO5 ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
End Semester Examination
Bloom’s Category Test - Internal Exam
(Percentage)
(Percentage)

Remember 20 20
Understand 20 20

Apply 60 60
Analyse

Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 75 75 3 hours
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks

Continuous Evaluation in Lab : 30 marks

Continuous Assessment Test : 15 marks

Viva-voce : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: The marks will be distributed as Algorithm 30 marks, Pro-
gram 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100 marks which will be con-
verted out of 15 while calculating Internal Evaluation marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern: The marks will be distributed as Algorithm 30

marks, Program 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100 marks will be
converted out of 75 for End Semester Examination.

Operating System to Use in Lab : Linux

Compiler/Software to Use in Lab : gcc, javac, jdk, jre, Eclipse, NetBeans,

MySQL / PostgreSQL.

Programming Language to Use in Lab : Java

Fair Lab Record:

All Students attending the Object Oriented Programming Lab (in Java) should have a Fair
Record. The fair record should be produced in the University Lab Examination. Every experi-
ment conducted in the lab should be noted in the fair record. For every experiment in the fair
record the right hand page should contain Experiment Heading, Experiment Number, Date of
Experiment, Aim of Experiment, Operations Performed, Details of Experiment including algo-
rithm and Result of Experiment. The left hand page should contain a print out of the code used
for the experiment and sample output obtained for a set of input.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

The syllabus contains six sessions (A, B, C, D, E, F). Each session consists of three concrete
Java exercises, out of which at least two questions are mandatory.

(A) Basic programs using datatypes, operators, and control statements in Java.

1) Write a Java program that checks whether a given string is a palindrome or not.
Ex: MALAYALAM is palindrome.
2) Write a Java Program to find the frequency of a given character in a string. **
3) Write a Java program to multiply two given matrices. **

(B) Object Oriented Programming Concepts: Problem on the use of constructors, inheritance,
method overloading & overriding, polymorphism and garbage collection:

4) Write a Java program which creates a class named 'Employee' having the following
members: Name, Age, Phone number, Address, Salary. It also has a method named 'print-
Salary( )' which prints the salary of the Employee. Two classes 'Officer' and 'Manager'
inherits the 'Employee' class. The 'Officer' and 'Manager' classes have data members 'spe-
cialization' and 'department' respectively. Now, assign name, age, phone number, address
and salary to an officer and a manager by making an object of both of these classes and
print the same. (Exercise to understand inheritance). **
5) Write a java program to create an abstract class named Shape that contains an empty
method named numberOfSides( ). Provide three classes named Rectangle, Triangle and
Hexagon such that each one of the classes extends the class Shape. Each one of the class-
es contains only the method numberOfSides( ) that shows the number of sides in the giv-
en geometrical structures. (Exercise to understand polymorphism). **
6) Write a Java program to demonstrate the use of garbage collector.

(C) Handling different types of files as well as input and output management methods:

7) Write a file handling program in Java with reader/writer.

8) Write a Java program that read from a file and write to file by handling all file related ex-
ceptions. **
9) Write a Java program that reads a line of integers, and then displays each integer, and the
sum of all the integers (Use String Tokenizer class of java.util). **

(D) Exception handling and multi-threading applications:

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

10) Write a Java program that shows the usage of try, catch, throws and finally. **
11) Write a Java program that implements a multi-threaded program which has three threads.
First thread generates a random integer every 1 second. If the value is even, second
thread computes the square of the number and prints. If the value is odd the third thread
will print the value of cube of the number.
12) Write a Java program that shows thread synchronization. **

(E) Graphics Programming:

13) Write a Java program that works as a simple calculator. Arrange Buttons for digits and
the + - * % operations properly. Add a text field to display the result. Handle any possible
exceptions like divide by zero. Use Java Swing. **
14) Write a Java program that simulates a traffic light. The program lets the user select one of
three lights: red, yellow, or green. When a radio button is selected, the light is turned on,
and only one light can be on at a time. No light is on when the program starts. **
15) Write a Java program to display all records from a table using Java Database Connectivi-
ty (JDBC).

(F) Standard Searching and Sorting Algorithms using data structures and algorithms learned
from course Data Structures (CST 201):

16) Write a Java program for the following: **

1) Create a doubly linked list of elements.
2) Delete a given element from the above list.
3) Display the contents of the list after deletion.
17) Write a Java program that implements Quick sort algorithm for sorting a list of names in
ascending order. **
18) Write a Java program that implements the binary search algorithm.

** Mandatory
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

PRACTICE QUESTIONS

1) Write a Java program to reverse an given string.

2) Write a Java program to display the transpose of a given matrix.
3) Write a Java program to find the second smallest element in an array.
4) Write a Java program to check whether a given number is prime or not.
5) Write a Java program to calculate the area of different shapes namely circle, rectangle,
and triangle using the concept of method overloading.
6) Write two Java classes Employee and Engineer. Engineer should inherit from Employee
class. Employee class to have two methods display() and calcSalary(). Write a program to
display the engineer salary and to display from Employee class using a single object in-
stantiation (i.e., only one object creation is allowed).
● display() only prints the name of the class and does not return any value. Ex. “ Name
of class is Employee.”
● calcSalary() in Employee displays “Salary of employee is 10000” and calcSalary() in
Engineer displays “Salary of employee is 20000.”
7) Write a Java program to illustrate Interface inheritance.
8) Write a Java program that shows how to create a user-defined exception.
9) Write a Java program to create two threads: One for displaying all odd number between 1
and 100 and second thread for displaying all even numbers between 1 and 100.
10) Write a Java program that shows thread priorities.
11) Write a Java program that reads a file and displays the file on the screen, with a line
number before each line.
12) Write a Java program that displays the number of characters, lines and words in a text
file.
13) Write a Java program for handling mouse events.
14) Write a Java program for handling key events using Adapter classes (general).
15) Write a Java program that allows the user to draw lines, rectangles and ovals.
16) Write a Java Swing program to print a wave form on the output screen.
17) Write a program to accept rollno, name, CGPA of “n” students and store the data to a
database using JDBC connectivity. Display the list of students having CGPA greater than
7. (Use MySQL /PostgreSQL).
18) Write a Java program to implement Heap sort algorithm using array.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -3
MINOR
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
CST OBJECT ORIENTED CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
INTRODUCTION
281 PROGRAMMING
MINOR 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is the programming course for awarding B.Tech. Minor in Computer Science
and Engineering with specialization in Software Engineering. The purpose of this course is to
enable learners to solve problems by breaking it down to object level while designing software
and to implement it using Java. This course covers Object Oriented Principles, Object Oriented
Programming in Java, Inheritance, Exception handling, Event handling, multithreaded
programming and working with window-based graphics. This course helps the learners to
develop Mobile applications, Enterprise Applications, Scientific Applications and Web based
Applications.

Prerequisite: Topics covered under the course PROGRAMMING IN C (EST 102)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Write Java programs using the object oriented concepts - classes, objects,
CO1 constructors, data hiding, inheritance and polymorphism (Cognitive Knowledge
Level: Apply)

Utilise datatypes, operators, control statements, built in packages & interfaces, Input/
CO2 Output Streams and Files in Java to develop programs (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Illustrate how robust programs can be written in Java using exception handling
CO3
mechanism (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Understand)
Write application programs in Java using multithreading (Cognitive Knowledge
CO4
Level: Apply)

Write Graphical User Interface based application programs by utilising event

CO5
handling features and Swing in Java (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcome

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work
Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom’s Category
Test1 (Marks %) Test2 (Marks %) Marks (% )

Remember 30 30 30

Understand 30 30 30
Apply 40 40 40

Analyse
Evaluate

Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First series test shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and
the second series test shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the
syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions
each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions
from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed
modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7
questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains
10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students
should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which a student
should answer any one. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carry 14 marks.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Object Oriented Programming Using Java

Module 1

Introduction:
Approaches to Software Design - Functional Oriented Design, Object Oriented Design, Case
Study of Automated Fire Alarm System.
Object Modeling Using UML – Basic Object Oriented concepts, UML (Unified Modeling
Language) diagrams, Use case model, Class diagram, Interaction diagram, Activity diagram,
State chart diagram.
Introduction to Java - Java programming Environment and Runtime Environment, Development
Platforms -Standard, Enterprise. Java Virtual Machine (JVM), Java compiler, Bytecode, Java
applet, Java Buzzwords, Java program structure, Comments, Garbage Collection, Lexical Issues.

Module 2

Core Java Fundamentals:

Primitive Data types - Integers, Floating Point Types, Characters, Boolean. Literals, Type
Conversion and Casting, Variables, Arrays, Strings, Vector class.
Operators - Arithmetic Operators, Bitwise Operators, Relational Operators, Boolean Logical
Operators, Assignment Operator, Conditional (Ternary) Operator, Operator Precedence.
Control Statements - Selection Statements, Iteration Statements and Jump Statements.
Object Oriented Programming in Java - Class Fundamentals, Declaring Objects, Object
Reference, Introduction to Methods, Constructors, this Keyword, Method Overloading, Using
Objects as Parameters, Returning Objects, Recursion, Access Control, Static Members, Final
Variables, Inner Classes, Command-Line Arguments, Variable Length Arguments.
Module 3

More features of Java:

Inheritance - Super Class, Sub Class, The Keyword super, protected Members, Calling Order of
Constructors, Method Overriding, the Object class, Abstract Classes and Methods, Using final
with Inheritance.

Packages and Interfaces - Defining Package, CLASSPATH, Access Protection, Importing

Packages, Interfaces.
Exception Handling - Checked Exceptions, Unchecked Exceptions, try Block and catch Clause,
Multiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements, throw, throws and finally.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Module 4
Advanced features of Java:

Input/Output - I/O Basics, Reading Console Input, Writing Console Output, PrintWriter Class,
Object Streams and Serialization, Reading and Writing Files.
Java Library - String Handling – String Constructors, String Length, Special String Operations -
Character Extraction, String Comparison, Searching Strings, Modifying Strings, Using
valueOf(), Comparison of StringBuffer and String.
Collections framework – Collections overview, Collections Class – ArrayList. Accessing
Collections via an Iterator.

Module 5

GUI Programming, Event Handling and Multithreaded Programming:

Swing fundamentals - Swing Key Features, Model View Controller (MVC), Swing Controls,
Components and Containers, Exploring Swing - JFrame, JLabel, JButton, JTextField.

Event handling - Event Handling Mechanisms, Delegation Event Model, Event Classes, Sources
of Events, Event Listener Interfaces, Using the Delegation Model.
Multithreaded Programming - The Java Thread Model, The Main Thread, Creating Thread,
Creating Multiple Threads, Suspending, Resuming and Stopping Threads.

Text Books:

1. Herbert Schildt, Java: The Complete Reference, 8/e, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
2. Rajib Mall, Fundamentals of Software Engineering, 4th edition, PHI, 2014.
3. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, Java How to Program, Early Objects 11th Edition, Pearson,
2018.

Reference Books:

1. Y. Daniel Liang, Introduction to Java Programming, 7/e, Pearson, 2013.

2. Nageswararao R., Core Java: An Integrated Approach, Dreamtech Press, 2008.
3. Flanagan D., Java in A Nutshell, 5/e, O'Reilly, 2005.
4. Barclay K., J. Savage, Object Oriented Design with UML and Java, Elsevier, 2004.
5. Sierra K., Head First Java, 2/e, O'Reilly, 2005.
6. Balagurusamy E., Programming JAVA a Primer, 5/e, McGraw Hill, 2014.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1(CO1): For the following passage develop UML diagrams and then
implement it as a Java program in accordance with your UML design.

Passage: College Office collects semester fee and college bus fee for each student. A
clerk at the college office collects the fees from each student. The bus fee is calculated
depending on the distance of the corresponding bus stop from the college. The semester
fee varies depending upon the semester as well as branch of each student. Students are
supposed to pay the fees in full. Economically backward students are eligible for 50%
discount in semester fee. The consolidated fees receipt is issued to each student by the
clerk, which contains the student name, admission number, semester and branch of
student along with details of fees collected. Students can log in and view the details of
fees remitted and dues if any. The system allows students and clerk level login to the
system. Clerk is able to view reports of each class showing status of fees payment of
each student.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Write a Java program to prepare the rank list of students
based one their performance in the first Semester B.Tech. Degree examination at APJ
Abdul Kalam Technological University. The output should be stored in a file.

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): Write a program to demonstrate how event handling and
exception handling are supported in Java..

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Write a program to demonstrate the start, run, sleep and join
methods in Thread class..
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH (MINOR) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 281

Course Name: Object Oriented Programming using Java

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Briefly explain why Java is considered to be secure and portable.
2. Describe the concept of association among classes with an example.
3. Explain the different arithmetic operators in Java.
4. Explain the use for command line arguments with a suitable Java program
5. Explain the use of CLASSPATH with an example.
6. What are the different types of exceptions?
7. Explain file handling features available in Java.
8. Write a simple program to read and print an integer value in Java.
9. Explain the concept of main thread in multi-threading.
10. Explain any two Event classes in Java.
Part B
Answer any one question completely from each module
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

11.
(a) Describe in detail polymorphism, abstraction and inheritance with suitable examples.
(9)
(b) What is Java Virtual Machine?
(5)
OR
12.
(a) Compare and contrast Functional Oriented and Object Oriented approach by
considering a simple bus ticket reservation system.
(5)
(b) What is a class diagram? Explain with an example.
(9)

13.
(a) Explain primitive data types in Java. How are they different from other data types?
(8)
(b) Explain variables and arrays in Java.
(6)
OR
14.s
(a) Using a suitable Java program explain the concept of methods and constructors.
(8)
(b) Explain the keyword super and its usage in Java.
(6)

15.
(a) Using a table, explain the effect of access specifiers in inheritance.
(6)
(b) Describe in detail about exception handling using try block and catch clause in Java
with the help of a suitable Java program.
(8)
OR
16.
(a) What is an interface in Java? Explain with a suitable example.
(8)
(b) Explain throw, throws and finally constructs with the help of a Java program.
(6)

17.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

(a) Explain ArrayList collections framework. Also explain the use of iterator in
accessing collections.
(8)
(b) Bring out difference between “==” and equals() method with the help of a sample
program
(6)
OR
18.
(a) Compare Byte Streams and Character Streams. Write a program to demonstrate the
usage of the PrintWriter class.
(8)
(b) Explain any three String constructors with the help of sample code for each.
(6)

19.
(a) Explain in detail the Delegation Event model for event handling in Java.
(7)
(b) Describe in detail the creation of a thread using the Runnable interface.
(7)
OR
20.
(a) What are the differences between a process and a thread?
(4)
(b) Write a Graphical User Interface (GUI) based Java program to implement a simple
calculator supporting the operations addition, subtraction, multiplication and
division. Use Swing controls to implement GUI. There may be three text boxes, the
first two for operands and the last for result. Add four buttons for the above
operations. Write neat comments in your program to show how you handle events.
(10)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan

Module 1 (Introduction) (8 hours)

Approaches to Software Design- Functional Oriented Design,

1.1 Object-Oriented Design, Case Study of Automated Fire Alarm 1 hour
System.
1.2 Object Modeling Using UML – Basic object oriented concepts 1 hour

1.3 Basic object oriented concepts 1 hour

1.4 UML diagrams, Use case model 1hour

1.5 Class diagram, Interaction diagram 1hour

1.6 Activity diagram, State chart diagram 1hour

Java programming Environment and Runtime Environment,

1.7 Development Platforms -Standard, Enterprise. JVM, Java compiler, 1hour
Bytecode
Java applet, Java Buzzwords, Java program structure, Comments,
1.8 1hour
Garbage Collection, Lexical Issues

Module 2 (Core Java Fundamentals) (12 hours)

Primitive Data types - Integers, Floating Point Types, Characters,
2.1 1 hour
Boolean

Literals, Type Conversion and Casting, Variables, Arrays, Strings,

2.2 1 hour
Vector class.
Operators - Arithmetic Operators, Bitwise Operators, Relational
2.3 Operators, Boolean Logical Operators, Assignment Operator, 1 hour
Conditional (Ternary) Operator, Operator Precedence.

Control Statements - Selection Statements, Iteration Statements and

2.4 1 hour
Jump Statements.
Object Oriented Programming in Java - Class Fundamentals,
2.5 1 hour
Declaring Objects

2.6 Object Reference, Introduction to Methods 1 hour

2.7 Constructors, this Keyword 1 hour

2.8 Method Overloading, Using Objects as Parameters 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

2.9 Returning Objects, Recursion 1 hour

2.10 Access Control, static Members 1 hour

2.11 Final Variables, Inner Classes 1 hour

2.12 Command-Line Arguments, Variable Length Arguments 1 hour

Module 3 (More features of Java) (8 hours)

Inheritance - Super class, Sub class, the keyword super, protected
3.1 1 hour
Members,

3.2 Calling Order of Constructors, Method Overriding, the Object class, 1 hour
3.3 Abstract Classes and Methods, Using final with Inheritance 1 hour

Packages and Interfaces - Defining Package, CLASSPATH, Access

3.4 1 hour
Protection, Importing Packages
3.5 Interfaces 1 hour

Exception Handling - Checked Exceptions, Unchecked Exceptions,

3.6 1 hour
try Block and catch Clause
3.7 Multiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements 1 hour

3.8 throw, throws and finally 1 hour

Module 4 (Advanced features of Java) (8 hours)

4.1 Input/Output - I/O Basics, Reading Console Input 1hour

4.2 Writing Console Output, PrintWriter Class 1hour

4.3 Object Streams and Serialization 1hour

4.4 Serialization, Working with Files 1hour

4.5 Working with Files 1hour

Java Library - String Handling – String Constructors, String Length,
4.6 1hour
Special String Operations

Character Extraction, String Comparison, Searching Strings,

4.7 Modifying Strings Using valueOf( ), Comparison of StringBuffer 1hour
and String.
Collections framework – Collections overview, Collections Class –
4.8 1hour
ArrayList. Accessing Collections via an Iterator.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Module 5 (GUI Programming, Event Handling and Multithreaded

(9 hours)
Programming)
5.1 Swings fundamentals, Swing Key Features

5.2 MVC, Swing Controls, Components and Containers

5.3 Exploring Swing –JFrame, JLabel, JButton, JTextField.

Event handling - Event Handling Mechanisms, Delegation Event

5.4 1hour
Model
5.5 Delegation Event Model, Event Classes 1hour

Sources of Events, Event Listener Interfaces, Using the Delegation

5.6 1hour
Model
Multithreaded Programming - The Java Thread Model, The Main
5.7 1hour
Thread, Creating Thread

5.8 Creating Multiple Threads 1hour

5.9 Suspending, Resuming and Stopping Threads. 1hour
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Year of
CST Python for Machine Category L T P Credit
Introduction
283 Learning
MINOR 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is a programming course for awarding B. Tech. Minor in Computer Science and
Engineering with specialization in Machine Learning. The objective of the course is to provide
learners an insight into Python programming, and develop programming skills to manage the
development of software systems. It covers programming environment, important instructions,
data representations, intermediate level features, Object Oriented Programming and file data
processing of Python. This course lays the foundation to develop web applications, Machine
Learning, and Artificial Intelligence-based applications and tools, Data Science and Data
Visualization applications.

Prerequisite: Nil

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO1 Write, test and debug Python programs (Cognitive Knowledge level: Apply)

Illustrate uses of conditional (if, if-else, if-elif-else and switch-case) and iterative
CO2
(while and for) statements in Python programs (Cognitive Knowledge level: Apply)
Develop programs by utilizing the modules Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionaries in
CO3
Python (Cognitive Knowledge level: Apply)

Implement Object Oriented programs with exception handling (Cognitive Knowledge

CO4
level: Apply)
Write programs in Python to process data stored in files by utilizing the modules
CO5
Numpy, Matplotlib, and Pandas (Cognitive Knowledge level: Apply)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

CO2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

CO3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

CO4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

CO5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

#PO Broad PO #PO Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

End Semester
Test 1 (Marks in Test 2 (Marks
Bloom’s Category Examination (Marks in
percentage) in percentage)
percentage)
Remember 20 20 20

Understand 35 35 35
Apply 45 45 45

Analyse
Evaluate

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks
Internal Examination Pattern:
Each of the two internal examinations has to beCOMPUTER
conducted out ofSCIENCE AND
50 marks. The firstENGINEERING
series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series
test shall be preferably conducted after completing the remaining part of the syllabus. There will
be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from
the completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for
each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part
A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have a maximum of 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

SYLLABUS
Module I
Programming Environment and Python Basics:
Getting Started with Python Programming - Running code in the interactive shell, Editing,
Saving, and Running a script. Using editors - IDLE, Jupyter. The software development process
- Case Study.

Basic coding skills - Working with data types, Numeric data types and Character sets, Keywords,
Variables and Assignment statement, Operators, Expressions, Working with numeric data, Type
conversions, Comments in the program. Input, Processing, and Output. Formatting output. How
Python works. Detecting and correcting syntax errors. Using built in functions and modules in
math module.
Module II
Building Python Programs:
Control statements - Selection structure (if-else, switch-case), Iteration structure(for, while),
Testing the control statements, Lazy evaluation. Functions - Hiding redundancy and complexity,
Arguments and return values, Variable scopes and parameter passing, Named arguments, Main
function, Working with recursion, Lambda functions. Strings and number systems - String
function, Handling numbers in various formats.

Module III
Data Representation:
Lists - Basic list Operations and functions, List of lists, Slicing, Searching and sorting list, List
comprehension. Work with tuples. Sets. Work with dates and times. Dictionaries - Dictionary
 COMPUTER
functions, dictionary literals, adding and removing SCIENCE
keys, accessing and AND ENGINEERING
replacing values,
traversing dictionaries, reverse lookup. Case Study - Data Structure Selection.

Module IV
Object Oriented Programming:
Design with classes - Objects and Classes, Methods, Instance Variables, Constructor, Accessors
and Mutators. Structuring classes with Inheritance and Polymorphism. Abstract Classes.
Exceptions - Handle a single exception, handle multiple exceptions.

Module V
Data Processing:
The os and sys modules. Introduction to file I/O - Reading and writing text files, Manipulating
binary files. NumPy - Basics, Creating arrays, Arithmetic, Slicing, Matrix Operations, Random
numbers. Plotting and visualization. Matplotlib - Basic plot, Ticks, Labels, and Legends.
Working with CSV files. – Pandas - Reading, Manipulating, and Processing Data.

Text Books:
1. Kenneth A Lambert., Fundamentals of Python : First Programs, 2/e, Cengage Publishing,
2016
2. Wes McKinney, Python for Data Analysis, 2/e, Shroff / O’Reilly Publishers, 2017

Reference Books:
1. Allen B. Downey, Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist, 2/e, Schroff,
2016
2. Michael Urban and Joel Murach, Python Programming, Shroff/Murach, 2016
3. David M.Baezly, Python Essential Reference. Addison-Wesley Professional; 4/e, 2009.
4. Charles Severance. Python for Informatics: Exploring Information,
5. http://swcarpentry.github.io/python-novice-gapminder/

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1(CO1): What is type conversion? How is it done in Python?

Course Outcome 2(CO2): Write a Python program which takes a positive integer n as input
and finds the sum of cubes all positive even numbers less than or equal to the number.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Given is a list of of words, wordlist, and a string, name. Write a
Python function which takes wordlist and name as input and returns a tuple. The first element of
 COMPUTER
the output tuple is the number of words in the wordlist SCIENCE
which have AND ENGINEERING
name as a substring in it. The
second element of the tuple is a list showing the index at which the name occurs in each of the
words of the wordlist and a 0 if it doesn’t occur.

Course Outcome 4(CO4): Write a Python program to implement the addition, subtraction, and
multiplication of complex numbers using classes. Use constructors to create objects. The input to
the program consist of real and imaginary parts of the complex numbers.

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Given a file “auto.csv” of automobile data with the fields index,
company, body-style, wheel-base, length, engine-type, num-of-cylinders, horsepower, average-
mileage, and price, write python code to
1) Clean and Update the CSV file
2) Print total cars of all companies
3) Find the average mileage of all companies
4) Find the highest priced car of all companies.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES:

Reg No:_______________
Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH (MINOR) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 283

Course name : PYTHON FOR MACHINE LEARNING

Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART-A

(Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. Explain the basic data types available in Python, with examples.

Write a Python program to reverse a number and also find the sum of digits of the
2.
number. Prompt the user for input.
Explain the concept of scope and lifetime of variables in Python programming language,
3.
with a suitable example.
4. Discuss format specifiers and escape sequences with examples.
5. Discuss the relation between tuples, lists, and dictionaries in detail.
Discuss the following dictionary methods with an example.
6.
i. get( ) ii. Keys( ) iii. pop( ) iv. update( ) v. values( ) vi. items( )
7. What is polymorphism? Give an example in the context of OOP in Python.
8. How is exception handling accomplished in Python programs?
Write a note on the os and os.path modules in Python. Also, discuss the walk( ) and
9.
getcwd( ) methods of the os module.
10. Describe the characteristics of the CSV format.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
PART-B
(Answer any one full question from each module)
11. (a) Compare and contrast interpreted languages and compiled languages. (6)
How does it affect the quality of program development and execution
of the program?
(b) What are the possible errors in a Python program. Write a Python (8)
program to print the value of 22n+n+5 for n provided by the user.
OR
12. (a) Describe Arithmetic operators, Assignment operators, Comparison (6)
operators, Logical operators, and Bitwise operators in detail with examples.
(b) Explain the software development process in detail. (8)

13. (a) Write a Python code to check whether a given year is a leap year or not [An (5)
year is a leap year if it’s divisible by 4 but not divisible by 100 except for
those divisible by 400].
(b) Input 4 integers (+ve and −ve). Write a Python code to find the sum of (9)
negative numbers, positive numbers, and print them. Also, find the
averages of these two groups of numbers and print.
OR
14. (a) Write a Python program to find the value for sin(x) up to n terms using the (8)
series
where x is in degrees

(b) Write a Python code to determine whether the given string is a Palindrome (6)
or not using slicing. Do not use any string function.

15. (a) Write a Python code to create a function called list_of_frequency that takes (5)
a string and prints the letters in non-increasing order of the frequency of
their occurrences. Use dictionaries.
(b) Write a Python program to read a list of numbers and sort the list in a non- (9)
decreasing order without using any built in functions. Separate function
should be written to sort the list wherein the name of the list is passed as
the parameter.
OR
16.
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
(a) Illustrate the following Set methods with an example. (6)
i. intersection( ) ii. Union( ) iii. Issubset( ) iv. Difference( ) v. update( ) vi.
discard( )
(b) Write a Python program to check the validity of a password given by the (8)
user.
The Password should satisfy the following criteria:
1. Contains at least one letter between a and z
2. Contains at least one number between 0 and 9
3. Contains at least one letter between A and Z
4. Contains at least one special character from $, #, @
5. Minimum length of password: 6

17. (a) How can a class be instantiated in Python? Write a Python program to (10)
express the instances as return values to define a class RECTANGLE with
parameters height, width, corner_x, and corner_y and member functions to
find center, area, and perimeter of an instance.
(b) Explain inheritance in Python. Give examples for each type of inheritance. (4)
OR
18. (a) Write a Python class named Circle constructed by a radius and two (6)
methods which will compute the area and the perimeter of a given circle
(b) Write Python program to create a class called as Complex and implement (8)
__add__( ) method to add two complex numbers. Display the result by
overloading the + Operator.

19. (a) Write a Python program to add two matrices and also find the transpose of (8)
the resultant matrix.
(b) Given a file “auto.csv” of automobile data with the fields index, company, (6)
body-style, wheel-base, length, engine-type, num-of-cylinders, horsepower,
average-mileage, and price, write Python codes using Pandas to
1) Clean and Update the CSV file
2) Print total cars of all companies
3) Find the average mileage of all companies
4) Find the highest priced car of all companies.
OR
20.
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
(a) Write Python program to write the data given below to a CSV file.
(5)
SN Name Country Contribution Year
1 Linus Torvalds Finland Linux Kernel 1991
2 Tim Berners-Lee England World Wide Web 1990
3 Guido van Rossum Netherlands Python 1991

(b) Given the sales information of a company as CSV file with the following (9)
fields month_number, facecream, facewash, toothpaste, bathingsoap,
shampoo, moisturizer, total_units, total_profit. Write Python codes to
visualize the data as follows
1) Toothpaste sales data of each month and show it using a scatter plot
2) Face cream and face wash product sales data and show it using the
bar chart
3) Calculate total sale data for last year for each product and show it
using a Pie chart.

(14X5=70)

Teaching Plan

(10
Module 1: Programming Environment and Python Basics
hours)
Getting Started with Python Programming: Running code in the interactive
1.1 1 hour
shell Editing, Saving, and Running a script

1.2 Using editors: IDLE 1 hour

1.3 Jupyter 1 hour

1.4 The software development process: Case Study. 1 hour

Basic coding skills: Working with data types, Numeric data types and
1.5 Character sets, Keywords, Variables and Assignment statement, 1 hour
Operators, Expressions,

1.6 Working with numeric data, Type conversions, Comments in the program 1 hour
1.7 Input, Processing, and Output, Formatting output – How Python works 1 hour

1.8 How Python works – Detecting and correcting syntax errors 1 hour
1.9 Using built in functions and modules: Case – Using math module 1 hour

Using built in functions and modules: Case – Using math module

1.10 1 hour
(Examples)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Module 2: Building Python Programs (8 hours)

2.1 Control statements: Selection structure (if-else, switch-case), 1 hour

Iteration structure(for, while), Testing the control statements, Lazy
2.2 1 hour
evaluation

Functions: Hiding redundancy and complexity, Arguments and return

2.3 1 hour
values,
2.4 Variable scopes and parameter passing 1 hour

2.5 Named arguments, Main function, 1 hour

2.6 Working with recursion, Lambda functions 1 hour

2.7 Strings and number systems: String function 1 hour

2.8 Handling numbers in various format 1 hour

Module 3: Data Representation (9 hours)

3.1 Lists: Basic list Operations and functions, List of lists 1 hour

3.2 Slicing, Searching and sorting list 1 hour

3.3 List comprehension 1 hour

3.4 Work with tuples, Sets 1 hour

3.5 Work with dates and times 1 hour

3.6 Dictionaries: Dictionary functions, 1 hour

Dictionary literals, adding and removing keys, accessing & replacing
3.7 1 hour
values

3.8 Traversing dictionaries, reverse lookup 1 hour

3.9 Case Study: Data Structure Selection 1 hour

Module 4: Object Oriented Programming (8 hours)

4.1 Design with classes : Objects and Classes, Methods, Instance Variables 1 hour

4.2 Constructor, Accessors and Mutators 1 hour

4.3 Structuring classes with Inheritance 1 hour

4.4 Polymorphism 1 hour

4.5 Abstract Classes 1 hour

4.6 Abstract Classes 1 hour

4.7 Exceptions : Handle a single exception 1 hour
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
4.8 handle multiple exceptions 1 hour

Module 5: Data Processing (10 hours)

5.1 The os and sys modules 1 hour

5.2 Introduction to file I/O: Reading and writing text files 1 hour
5.3 Manipulating binary files 1 hour

5.4 NumPy : Basics, Creating arrays, Arithmetic, Slicing 1 hour

5.5 Matrix Operations, Random numbers. 1 hour

5.6 Matplotlib : Basic plot 1 hour

5.7 Matplotlib - Ticks, Labels, and Legends 1 hour

5.8 Working with CSV files 1 hour

5.9 Pandas : Reading, Manipulating 1 hour

5.10 Pandas : Processing Data and Visualize. 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Year of
CST DATA Category L T P Credit
Introduction
285 COMMUNICATION
MINOR 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is a basic course in communication for awarding B. Tech. Minor in Computer
Science and Engineering with specialization in Networing. The purpose of this course is to
prepare learners to understand the communication entities and the associated issues in the
field of Computer Science. This course covers fundamental concepts of data transmission &
media, digital & analog transmissions, multiplexing & spread spectrum, error detection &
correction and switching. Concepts in data communication help the learner to understand the
concepts in networking and mobile communication.

Prerequisite: NIL

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Describe the characteristics of signals used for Analog and Digital

CO1
transmissions (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)
Discuss the features and issues in data transmission (Cognitive knowledge:
CO2
Understand)

Select transmission media based on characteristics and propagation modes

CO3
(Cognitive knowledge: Apply)
Use appropriate signal encoding techniques for a given scenario (Cognitive
CO4
knowledge: Apply)

Illustrate multiplexing and spread spectrum technologies (Cognitive

CO5
knowledge: Understand)

Explain error detection & correction techniques and switching techniques

CO6
used in data communication (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO1
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO11
0 2

CO1 ! ! ! !

CO2 ! ! ! !

CO3 ! !

CO4 ! ! ! ! !

CO5 ! ! ! ! ! !

CO6 ! ! ! ! ! !

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of
PO4 PO10 Communication
complex problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern
End Semester
Test 1 (Marks Test 2 (Marks
Bloom’s Category Examination (Marks in
in percentage) in percentage)
percentage)

Remember 30 30 30
Understand 40 40 40

Apply 30 30 30
Analyse

Evaluate
Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution
Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration
150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second
series test shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There
will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each
from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all
questions from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out
of the 7 questions, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

Syllabus
Module 1
Data Transmission Basics
Communication model - Simplex, Half duplex, Full duplex transmission. Periodic Analog
signals - Sine wave, Amplitude, Phase, Wavelength, Time and frequency domain, Bandwidth.
Analog & digital data and signals. Transmission impairments - Attenuation, Delay distortion,
Noise. Data rate limits - Noiseless channel, Nyquist bandwidth, Noisy channel, Shannon's
capacity formula.
Module 2
Transmission Media
Guided Transmission Media - Twisted pair, Coaxial cable, Optical fiber. Unguided media -
Radio waves, Terrestrial microwave, Satellite microwave, Infrared. Wireless Propagation -
Ground wave propagation, Sky Wave propagation, Line-of-Sight (LoS) Propagation.

Module 3
Digital Transmission and Analog Transmission
Digital data to Digital signal – Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ), Return-to-Zero (RZ), Multilevel
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

binary, Biphase. Analog data to Digital signal - Sampling theorem, Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM), Delta Modulation (DM). Digital data to Analog signal: Amplitude Shift Keying
(ASK), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), Phase Shift Keying (PSK). Analog data to Analog
signal: Amplitude Modulation (AM), Frequency Modulation (FM), Phase Modulation (PM).

Module 4
Multiplexing and Spread Spectrum
Multiplexing - Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), Wave length Division Multiplexing
(WDM), Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), Characteristics, Synchronous TDM, Statistical
TDM. Spread Spectrum Techniques - Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Frequency
Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS), Code Division Multiplexing, Code Division Multiple
Access (CDMA).

Module 5
Error Detection, Correction and Switching
Digital data communication techniques - Asynchronous transmission, Synchronous
transmission. Detecting and correcting errors - Types of Errors, Parity check, Checksum,
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC), Forward Error Correction (FEC), Hamming Distance,
Hamming Code. Basic principles of Switching - Circuit Switching, Packet Switching,
Message Switching.

Text Books
1. Forouzan B. A., Data Communications and Networking, 5/e, McGraw Hill, 2013.
2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication 9/e, Pearson Education, Inc.

Reference Books
1. Schiller J., Mobile Communications, 2/e, Pearson Education, 2009.
2. Curt M. White, Fundamentals of Networking and Communication 7/e, Cengage learning.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): What is a periodic analog signal? List the main properties of
a periodic analog signal.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): What is attenuation? How can it be handled?
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): How can interference be reduced using optical fiber?
Course Outcome 4(CO4): Encode the data sequence 101011100 using Multilevel binary
and Biphase schemes.
Course Outcome 5(CO5): Explain direct sequence spread spectrum with a neat diagram.
Course Outcome 6(CO6): Using Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC), given the data-word
11110000 and the divisor 10011, show the generation of the codeword at the sender and
the checking of the codeword at the receiver.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: ___

Reg No:_______________
Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE (MINOR) EXAMINATION, MONTH &
YEAR

Course Code: CST 285

Course name : DATA COMMUNICATION
Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART-A
(Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. What is bandwidth? Find the lowest frequency, if a periodic signal has a bandwidth of 20
Hz and the highest frequency is 60 Hz. Draw the Spectrum if the signal contains all
frequencies of same amplitude.
2. Assume that a TV picture is to be transmitted over a channel with 4.5 MHz bandwidth and
a 35 dB Signal-to-Noise-Ratio. Find the capacity of the channel.
3. What is the purpose of cladding in optical fibres?
4. Which wireless propagation is suitable for satellite communication? Justify your answer.
5. Explain the working of Delta Modulation with an example.
6. Illustrate the equivalent square wave pattern of the bit string 01001101 using Non-Return-
to-Zero(NRZ) - Level and NRZ-Invert encoding schemes.
7. Distinguish between synchronous and statistical Time Division Multiplexing.
8. Apply Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum to the data 101 using the Barker sequence
10110111000. Show the encoding and decoding steps.
9. Find the minimum hamming distance for the following cases:
a) Detection of two errors
b) Correction of two errors
c) Detection of 3 errors or correction of 2 errors
d) Detection of 6 errors or correction of 2 errors
10. Find the parity bit for simple even parity check for the following.
a) 1001010
b) 0001100
c) 1000000
d) 1110111
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

PART-B
(Answer ANY one full question from each module. Each question carries 14 marks)

11. a) With the help of suitable figures, distinguish between time domain and frequency
domain. (4)

b) Describe the different types of transmission impairments.

(10)

OR

12. a) Calculate the bandwidth, if a periodic signal is decomposed into 4 sine waves with
frequencies 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 150 Hz and 200Hz. Draw the spectrum, assuming all
components having amplitude in the range 6-12 V and all are multiple of two in the
increasing order.

(6)

b) Distinguish between Nyquist bandwidth and Shannon capacity. Consider a noiseless

channel with a bandwidth of 3000 Hz transmitting a signal with (i) Two signal levels and
(ii) Four signal levels. Determine the maximum bit rate in both these cases.
(8)

13. a) Fora parabolic reflective antenna operating at 12 GHz with a diameter of 2 m, calculate
the effective area and the antenna gain.
(6)

b) List any four advantages and disadvantages of twisted pair, coaxial cable and fiber optic
cable.
(8)

OR

14. a) Compare the features of terrestrial microwave and satellite microwave.

(6)

b) With the help of suitable diagrams, differentiate Multi-mode and Single-mode optical
fibres. How the rays are propagated in Step-index and Graded-index Multi-mode fibres.

(8)

15. a) Distinguish between data rate and signal rate.

(4)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

b) What is polar encoding? Encode the pattern 010011001110 using the two Biphase
schemes.
(10)

OR

16. a) Show the equivalent analog sine wave pattern of the bit string 010011010 using
Amplitude Shift Keying, Frequency Shift Keying and Phase Shift Keying.

(4)
b) State Sampling theorem. Explain Pulse Code Modulation with suitable figures.
(10)

17. a) Four channels are multiplexed using Time Division Multiplexing. If each channel sends
100 bytes/sec and we multiplex one byte per channel, determine the frame size, duration of
a frame, frame rate and bit rate of the link.

(6)

b) With the help of an example, explain the working of Frequency Hopping Spread
Spectrum.
(8)

OR

18. a)Explain the different techniques by which the disparity in input data rate is handled by
Time Division Multiplexing.

(4)

b) Suppose Alice and Bob are communicating using Code Division Multiple Access. Alice
uses the code [+1 +1] and Bob uses the code [+1 -1]. Alice sends the data bit 0 and Bob
sends the data bit 1. Show the data in the channel and how they can detect what the other
person has sent.
(10)

19. a) Explain parity check with examples.

(4)

b) Describe the need for a switch. What are the different phases in circuit switching?

(10)

OR
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

20. a) With the help of a suitable example, explain the virtual circuit approach of packet
switching.
(6)

b) Find the Hamming code for the data-word 1011001. Assume odd parity.
(8)

Teaching Plan

Module 1 : Data Transmission Basics (8 Hours)

Introduction, Communication model - Simplex, Half duplex, Full

1.1 1
duplex transmission

Periodic Analog signals - Sine wave, Amplitude, Phase,

1.2 1
Wavelength

1.3 Time and frequency domain, Bandwidth 1

1.4 Analog data and signals 1

1.5 Digital data and signals 1

1.6 Transmission impairments - Attenuation, Delay distortion, Noise 1

1.7 Data rate limits - Noiseless channel, Nyquist bandwidth 1

1.8 Noisy channel, Shannon's capacity formula 1

Module 2: Transmission media (7 Hours)

2.1 Guided Transmission Media - Twisted pair, Coaxial cable 1

2.2 Optical fiber 1

2.3 Unguided media - Radio waves 1

2.4 Terrestrial microwave, Satellite microwave 1

2.5 Infrared 1

2.6 Wireless Propagation - Ground wave propagation 1

2.7 Wave propagation, Line-of-Sight (LoS) Propagation 1

(10
Module 3: Digital Transmission and Analog Transmission
Hours)
3.1 Digital data to Digital signal – Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) 1

3.2 Return-to-Zero (RZ), Multilevel binary 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3.3 Biphase 1
3.4 Analog data to Digital signal - Sampling theorem 1

3.5 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) 1

3.6 Delta Modulation (DM) 1

3.7 Digital data to Analog signal: Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) 1

3.8 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), Phase Shift Keying (PSK) 1

3.9 Analog data to Analog signal: Amplitude Modulation (AM) 1

3.10 Frequency Modulation (FM), Phase Modulation (PM) 1

Module 4: Multiplexing and Spread Spectrum (9 Hours)

4.1 Multiplexing - Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) 1

Wave length Division Multiplexing (WDM), Time Division
4.2 1
Multiplexing (TDM)

4.3 Synchronous TDM, Statistical TDM 1

4.4 Spread Spectrum Techniques 1

4.5 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) 1

4.6 Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) 1

4.7 Code Division Multiplexing 1

4.8 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 1

4.9 CDMA 1

Module 5: Error Detection, Correction and Switching (11 Hours)

Digital data communication techniques - Asynchronous &

5.1 1
Synchronous transmission
5.2 Detecting and correcting errors - Types of Errors 1

5.3 Parity check, Checksum 1

5.4 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 1

5.5 CRC 1

5.6 Forward Error Correction (FEC) 1

5.7 Hamming Distance, Hamming Code 1

5.8 Hamming Code 1

5.9 Basic principles of Switching - Circuit Switching 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

5.10 Packet Switching 1

5.11 Message Switching 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT

MAT 206 GRAPH THEORY BSC 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This course introduces fundamental concepts in Graph Theory, including

properties and characterisation of graph/trees and graph theoretic algorithms, which are
widely used in Mathematical modelling and has got applications across Computer Science
and other branches in Engineering.

Prerequisite: The topics covered under the course Discrete Mathematical Structures (MAT
203 )

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain vertices and their properties, types of paths, classification of graphs and
CO 1
trees & their properties. (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Understand)
Demonstrate the fundamental theorems on Eulerian and Hamiltonian graphs.
CO 2
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Understand)

Illustrate the working of Prim’s and Kruskal’s algorithms for finding minimum cost
CO 3 spanning tree and Dijkstra’s and Floyd-Warshall algorithms for finding shortest
paths. (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Explain planar graphs, their properties and an application for planar graphs.
CO 4
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Illustrate how one can represent a graph in a computer. (Cognitive Knowledge

CO 5
Level: Apply)

Explain the Vertex Color problem in graphs and illustrate an example application
CO 6
for vertex coloring. (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO PO PO PO PO
PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 7 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
1 5 6 8 9

CO 1 √ √ √ √ √

CO 2 √ √ √ √ √ √

CO 3 √ √ √ √ √ √

CO 4 √ √ √ √ √ √

CO 5 √ √ √ √ √

CO 6 √ √ √ √ √ √

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests (%) End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Examination (%)
1 2
Remember 30 30 30

Understand 30 30 30
Apply 40 40 40

Analyse
Evaluate

Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the
syllabus and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing
remaining part of the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2
questions each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module),
having 3 marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer
all questions from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out
of the 7 questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contain 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer anyone. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries
14 marks.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction to Graphs : Introduction- Basic definition – Application of graphs – finite,

infinite and bipartite graphs – Incidence and Degree – Isolated vertex, pendant
vertex and Null graph. Paths and circuits – Isomorphism, sub graphs, walks, paths
and circuits, connected graphs, disconnected graphs and components.

Module 2

Eulerian and Hamiltonian graphs : Euler graphs, Operations on graphs, Hamiltonian paths
and circuits, Travelling salesman problem. Directed graphs – types of digraphs, Digraphs and
binary relation, Directed paths, Fleury’s algorithm.

Module 3

Trees and Graph Algorithms : Trees – properties, pendant vertex, Distance and centres in a
tree - Rooted and binary trees, counting trees, spanning trees, Prim’s algorithm and Kruskal’s
algorithm, Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm, Floyd-Warshall shortest path algorithm.

Module 4

Connectivity and Planar Graphs : Vertex Connectivity, Edge Connectivity, Cut set and Cut
Vertices, Fundamental circuits, Planar graphs, Kuratowski’s theorem (proof not required),
Different representations of planar graphs, Euler's theorem, Geometric dual.

Module 5

Graph Representations and Vertex Colouring : Matrix representation of graphs-

Adjacency matrix, Incidence Matrix, Circuit Matrix, Path Matrix. Coloring- Chromatic
number, Chromatic polynomial, Matchings, Coverings, Four color problem and Five color
problem. Greedy colouring algorithm.

Text book:

1. Narsingh Deo, Graph theory, PHI,1979

Reference Books:

1. R. Diestel, Graph Theory, free online edition, 2016: diestel-graph-theory.com/

basic.html.
2. Douglas B. West, Introduction to Graph Theory, Prentice Hall India Ltd.,2001
3. Robin J. Wilson, Introduction to Graph Theory, Longman Group Ltd.,2010
4. J.A. Bondy and U.S.R. Murty. Graph theory with Applications
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions.

Course Outcome 1 (CO1):

1. Differentiate a walk, path and circuit in a graph.

2. Is it possible to construct a graph with 12 vertices such that two of the vertices have
degree 3 and the remaining vertices have degree 4? Justify

3. Prove that a simple graph with n vertices must be connected, if it has more than
(n − 1)(n − 2)
edges.
2
4. Prove the statement: If a graph (connected or disconnected) has exactly two odd degree,
then there must be a path joining these two vertices.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

1. Define Hamiltonian circuit and Euler graph. Give one example for each.

2. Define directed graphs. Differentiate between symmetric digraphs and asymmetric

digraphs.

3. Prove that a connected graph G is an Euler graph if all vertices of G are of even degree.

4. Prove that a graph G of n vertices always has a Hamiltonian path if the sum of the degrees
of every pair of vertices Vi, Vj in G satisfies the condition d(Vi) + d(Vj) =n−1
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Discuss the centre of a tree with suitable example.

(n + 1)
2. Define binary tree. Then prove that number of pendant vertices in a binary tree is
2
3. Prove that a tree with n vertices has n − 1 edges.

4. Explain Floyd Warshall algorithm.

5. Run Dijkstra’s algorithm on the following directed graph, starting at vertex S.

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Course Outcome 4 (CO4):

1. Define edge connectivity, vertex connectivity and separable graphs. Give an example for
each.

2. Prove that a connected graph with n vertices and e edges has e − n + 2 edges.

3. Prove the statement: Every cut set in a connected graph G must also contain at least one
branch of every spanning tree of G.

4. Draw the geometrical dual (G*) of the graph given below, also check whether G and G*
are self-duals or not, substantiate your answer clearly.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. Show that if A(G) is an incidence matrix of a connected graph G with n vertices, then
rank of A(G) is n−1.

2. Show that if B is a cycle matrix of a connected graph G with n vertices and m edges, then
rank B = m−n+1.

3. Derive the relations between the reduced incidence matrix, the fundamental cycle matrix,
and the fundamental cut-set matrix of a graph G.

4. Characterize simple, self-dual graphs in terms of their cycle and cut-set matrices.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):

1. Show that an n vertex graph is a tree iff its chromatic polynomial is P n(λ) = λ(λ − 1)n−1

2. Prove the statement: “A covering g of a graph is minimal if g contains no path of length

three or more.”

3. Find the chromatic polynomial of the graph

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Model Question paper

QP
Code : Total Pages: 4

Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

IV SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH and YEAR
Course Code: MAT 206
Course Name: GRAPH THEORY
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all questions, each carries3 marks. Mark
s

1 Construct a simple graph of 12 vertices with two of them having degree 1, (3)
three having degree 3 and the remaining seven having degree 10.
2 What is the largest number of vertices in a graph with 35 edges, if all (3)
vertices are of degree at least 3 ?
3 Define a Euler graph. Give an example of Eulerian graph which is not (3)
Hamiltonian
4 Give an example of a strongly connected simple digraph without a directed (3)
Hamiltonian path.
5 What is the sum of the degrees of any tree of n vertices? (3)
6 How many spanning trees are there for the following graph (3)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
7 Show that in a simple connected planar graph G having V-vertices, E-edges, (3)
and no triangles E <= 3V - 6.
8 Let G be the following disconnected planar graph. Draw its dual G*, and the (3)
dual of the dual (G*)*.

9 Consider the circuit matrix B and incidence matrix A of a simple connected (3)
graph whose columns are arranged using the same order of edges. Prove that
every row of B is orthogonal to every row of A?
10 A graph is critical if the removal of any one of its vertices (and the edges (3)
adjacent to that vertex) results in a graph with a lower chromatic number.
Show that Kn is critical for all n > 1.
PART B
Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks
11 a) Prove that for any simple graph with at least two vertices has two vertices of (6)
the same degree.
b) Prove that in a complete graph with n vertices there are (n-1)/2 edge disjoint (8)
Hamiltonian circuits and n >= 3
OR
 OR
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
​ etermine whether the following graphs ​G​1​ = (V​1​, E​1​)​ and ​G​2​ = (V​2​, E​2​) ​are isomorphic
12. a) D
12 a) Determine whether the following graphs G1 = (V1, E1) and G2 = (V2, E2) are (6)
or not. Give justification. (6)
isomorphic or not. Give justification.

b) P b) that
​ rove Prove that a graph
a simple simplewith ​n​ vertices
graph with nand ​k ​ components
vertices and k components
can have atcan have
most at (n-(8)
​(n-k)
k+1)/2​ edges.
most (n-k) (n-k+1)/2 edges (8)
13Leta)​S ​bLet
13. a) e a Ssetbeofa 5set
elements. Construct
of 5 elements. Construct ​whose
a grapha​Ggraph G vertices are subsets
whose vertices of ​S ​of size
are subsets (8)
2 and twoofsuch
S ofsubsets are two
size 2 and adjacent
such in ​G​ if they
subsets are disjoint.
are adjacent in G if they are disjoint. (8)
i. Drawi.theDraw ​G​.graph G.
graphthe
ii. How ii.
many edges
How manymust musttobe​G​ added
be added
edges ​ to order
in ordertoforG​Gin have afor
Hamiltonian
G to havecycle?
a
b) Let ​G​ be a graph with exactly
Hamiltonian two connected components, both being Eulerian. What is
cycle?
theb)
minimum
Let G number of edges
be a graph withthat need totwo
exactly be added to ​G​ to
connected obtain an Eulerian
components, graph? (6)
both being
Eulerian. What is the minimum number of edges that need to be added to G ​(6)
to obtain an Eulerian graph?
OR
14. a) Show that a ​k​-connected graph with no hamiltonian
OR cycle has an independent set of size
14k +a)1​. Show that a k-connected graph with no hamiltonian cycle has an (8)
(8)
b) independent set of size k + 1. (6)
i.b) Let ​Gi.​beLet
a graph
G bethat has exactly
a graph twoexactly
that has connected
two components, both being both
connected components,
Hamiltonian
beinggraphs. Find thegraphs.
Hamiltonian minimumFindnumber of edgesnumber
the minimum that oneofneeds to that
edges add to
G​ to obtain
oneaneeds
Hamiltonian
to add tograph.
G to obtain a Hamiltonian graph. (6)
ii. For which
ii. Forvalues
which ​n ​the graph
of values ​n ​(hyper-cube
of n ​Qthe on ​n ​vertices)onis nEulerian.
graph Qn (hyper-cube vertices) is
Eulerian.
15 a) A tree T has at least one vertex v of degree 4, and at least one vertex w of (5)
degree 3. Prove that T has at least 5 leaves.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
b) Write Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm. (9)
Consider the following weighted directed graph G.

Find the shortest path between a and every other vertices in G using
Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm.
OR
16 a) Define pendent vertices in a binary tree? Prove that the number of pendent (5)
vertices in a binary tree with n vertices is (n+1)/2.
b) (9)
Write Prim’s algorithm for finding minimum spanning tree.
Find a minimum spanning tree in the following weighted graph, using
Prim's algorithm.

Determine the number of minimum spanning trees for the given graph.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
17 a) i. State and prove Euler's Theorem relating the number of faces, edges and (9)
vertices for a planar graph.
ii. If G is a 5-regular simple graph and |V| = 10, prove that G is non-planar.
b) Let G be a connected graph and e an edge of G. Show that e is a cut-edge if (5)
and only if e belongs to every spanning tree.
OR OR
18 a) 18. a) State
State Kuratowski's
Kuratowski's theorem,
theorem, andituse
and use it to show
to show thatgraph
that the the graph G below
G below is notis not
(9)planar.
Draw
planar. G on
Draw the the
G on plane without
plane edges
without crossing.
edges YourYour
crossing. drawing should
drawing use the labelling of
should
thelabelling
use the vertices of
given.
the vertices given. (9)

b) Let G
b) be
Leta​Gconnected graph graph
​ be a connected and e and
an edge of G.ofShow
​e​ an edge that that
​G​. Show e belongs to ato a(5)
​e​ belongs loop if and
loop if only
and only if e belongs
if ​e​ belongs to notospanning
no spanning
tree.tree. (5)
19 a) 19.
Define the circuit
a) Define matrix
the circuit B(G)​Bof
matrix a ​ connected
(G) graphgraph
of a connected G with n vertices
​G​ with and and
​n​ vertices e (7)
​e​ edges with
edgesanwith an example.
example. Prove Prove that
that the theofrank
rank of​ is
​B(G) B(G) is ​.e-n+1
​e-n+1
b) Give
(7) the definition of the chromatic polynomial PG(k). Directly from the (7)
definition, prove
b) Give the that theofchromatic
definition polynomials
the chromatic of ​P
polynomial ​
and
W​Gn(k) Cn satisfy
​. Directly fromthe
the definition,
identity PWnthat
prove (k) =the
k Pchromatic polynomials of ​W​n​ and ​C​n​ satisfy the identity ​P​Wn​(k) = k P​Cn-1
Cn-1 (k – 1).

(k – 1).​ (7)
OR
OR
20 a) Define the incidence matrix of a graph G with an example. Prove that the (4)
20. a) of
rank Define the incidence
an incidence matrixmatrix
of a connected ​G ​with
of a graphgraph an nexample.
with Prove
vertices is n-1. that the rank of an
incidence matrix of a connected graph with ​n​ vertices is ​n-1. ​ (4)
b) (10)
i. A graph ​G has chromatic polynomial ​P​G​(k) = k​4​-4k​3​+5k​2​-2k​. How many vertices
and edges does ​G​ have? Is ​G​ bipartite? Justify your answers.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
b) i. A graph G has chromatic polynomial PG(k) = k4-4k3+5k2-2k. How
many vertices and edges does G have? Is G bipartite? Justify your
answers.
ii. Find a maximum matching in the graph below and use Hall's theorem
to show that it is indeed maximum.

(10)

****

Assignments

Assignment must include applications of the above theory in Computer Science.

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Teaching Plan

No. of
No Topic
Lectures

1 Module-I (Introduction to Graphs) (8)

1. Introduction- Basic definition – Application of graphs – finite and 1

infinite graphs, bipartite graphs,

2. Incidence and Degree – Isolated vertex, pendent vertex and Null graph 1

3. Paths and circuits 1

4. Isomorphism 1

5. Sub graphs, walks 1

6. Paths and circuits 1

7. Connected graphs. 1

8. Disconnected graphs and components 1

2 Module-II (Eulerian and Hamiltonian graphs) (8)

1. Euler graphs 1

2. Operations on graphs 1

3. Hamiltonian paths and circuits 1

4. Hamiltonian paths circuits 1

5. Travelling salesman problem 1

6. Directed graphs – types of digraphs, 1

7. Digraphs and binary relation, Directed paths 1

8. Fleury’s algorithm 1

3 Module-III (Trees and Graph Algorithms) (11)

1. Trees – properties 1

2. Trees – properties 1

3. Trees – properties, pendent vertex 1

4. Distance and centres in a tree 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
5. Rooted and binary tree 1

6. Counting trees 1

7. Spanning trees, Fundamental circuits 1

8. Prim’s algorithm 1

9. Kruskal’s algorithm 1

10. Dijkstra’s shortest path algorithm 1

11. Floyd-Warshall shortest path algorithm 1

4 Module-IV (Connectivity and Planar Graphs) (9)

1. Vertex Connectivity, Edge Connectivity 1

2. Cut set and Cut Vertices 1

3. Fundamental circuits 1

4. Fundamental circuits 1

5. Planar graphs 1

6. Kuratowski’s theorem 1

7. Different representations of planar graphs 1

8. Euler's theorem 1

9. Geometric dual 1

5 Module-V (Graph Representations and Vertex Colouring) (9)

1. Matrix representation of graphs- Adjacency matrix, Incidence Matrix 1

2. Circuit Matrix, Path Matrix 1

3. Colouring- chromatic number, 1

4. Chromatic polynomial 1

5. Matching 1

6. Covering 1

7. Four colour problem and five colour problem 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
8. Four colour problem and five colour problem 1

9. Greedy colouring algorithm. 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Computer YEAR OF
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CST 202 Organization INTRODUCTION
and Architecture PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble:

The course is prepared with the view of enabling the learners capable of understanding the
fundamental architecture of a digital computer. Study of Computer Organization and
Architecture is essential to understand the hardware behind the code and its execution at
physical level by interacting with existing memory and I/O structure. It helps the learners
to understand the fundamentals about computer system design so that they can extend the
features of computer organization to detect and solve problems occurring in computer
architecture.

Prerequisite : Topics covered under the course Logic System Design (CST 203)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

CO# CO

Recognize and express the relevance of basic components, I/O organization and
CO1
pipelining schemes in a digital computer (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)

Explain the types of memory systems and mapping functions used in memory systems
CO2
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Understand)
Demonstrate the control signals required for the execution of a given instruction
CO3
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply) )

Illustrate the design of Arithmetic Logic Unit and explain the usage of registers in it
CO4
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Explain the implementation aspects of arithmetic algorithms in a digital computer

CO5
(Cognitive Knowledge Level:Apply)
Develop the control logic for a given arithmetic problem (Cognitive Knowledge
CO6
Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
Test1 (%) Test2 (%) Examination Marks (%)

Remember 20 20 30

Understand 40 40 30
Apply 40 40 40

Analyze
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the
syllabus and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing
remaining part of the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions
each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions
from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed
modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7
questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

Syllabus

Module 1

Basic Structure of computers – functional units - basic operational concepts - bus structures.
Memory locations and addresses - memory operations,Instructions and instruction sequencing ,
addressing modes.

Basic processing unit – fundamental concepts – instruction cycle – execution of a complete

instruction - single bus and multiple bus organization

Module 2

Register transfer logic: inter register transfer – arithmetic, logic and shift micro operations.
Processor logic design: - processor organization – Arithmetic logic unit - design of
arithmetic circuit - design of logic circuit - Design of arithmetic logic unit - status register –
design of shifter - processor unit – design of accumulator.
Module 3

Arithmetic algorithms: Algorithms for multiplication and division (restoring method) of binary
numbers. Array multiplier , Booth’s multiplication algorithm.
Pipelining: Basic principles, classification of pipeline processors, instruction and arithmetic
pipelines (Design examples not required), hazard detection and resolution.

Module 4
Control Logic Design: Control organization – Hard_wired control-microprogram control –
control of processor unit - Microprogram sequencer,micro programmed CPU organization -
horizontal and vertical micro instructions.

Module 5

I/O organization: accessing of I/O devices – interrupts, interrupt hardware -Direct memory
access.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Memory system: basic concepts – semiconductor RAMs. memory system considerations –

ROMs, Content addressable memory, cache memories - mapping functions.

Text Books

1. Hamacher C., Z. Vranesic and S. Zaky, Computer Organization ,5/e, McGraw Hill, 2011

2. Mano M. M., Digital Logic & Computer Design, PHI, 2004

3. KaiHwang, Faye Alye Briggs, Computer architecture and parallel processing McGraw-
Hill, 1984

Reference Books

1. Mano M. M., Digital Logic & Computer Design, 3/e, Pearson Education, 2013.

2. Patterson D.A. and J. L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design, 5/e, Morgan
Kaufmann Publishers, 2013.

3. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture: Designing for Performance,

Pearson, 9/e, 2013.

4. Chaudhuri P., Computer Organization and Design, 2/e, Prentice Hall, 2008.

5. Rajaraman V. and T. Radhakrishnan, Computer Organization and Architecture, Prentice

Hall, 2011

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1(CO1): Which are the registers involved in a memory access

operation and how are they involved in it?

Course Outcome 2(CO2): Explain the steps taken by the system to handle a write miss
condition inside the cache memory.

Course Outcome 3(CO3): Generate the sequence of control signals required for the
execution of the instruction MOV [R1],R2 in a threebus organization.

Course Outcome 4(CO4): Design a 4-bit combinational logic shifter with 2 control
signals H0 and H1 that perform the following operations :
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

H1 H0 Operation

0 0 Transfer 1's to all output line

0 1 No shift operation

1 0 Shift left
1 1 Shift right

Course Outcome 5(CO5): Explain the restoring algorithm for binary division. Also
trace the algorithm to divide (1001)2 by (11)2

Course Outcome 6(CO6): Design a software control logic based on microprogramed

control to perform the addition of 2 signed numbers represented in sign magnitude form.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES:2

Reg No:_______________

Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

THIRD SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 202

Course Name: Computer organization and architecture

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Give the significance of instruction cycle.

2. Distinguish between big endian and little endian notations. Also give the significance of
these notations.

3. Compare I/O mapped I/O and memory mapped I/O.

4. Give the importance of interrupts in I/O interconnection.

5. Justify the significance of status register.

6. How does the arithmetic circuitry perform logical operations in an ALU.

7. Illustrate divide overflow with an example.

8. Write notes on arithmetic pipeline.

9. Briefly explain the role of micro program sequence.

10. Differentiate between horizontal and vertical micro instructions.

Part B

Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

11.

11.(a) What is the significance of addressing modes in computer architecture.

(4)

11.(b) Write the control sequence for the instruction DIV R1,[R2] in a three bus structure.
(10)

OR

12. Explain the concept of a single bus organization with help of a diagram. Write the control
sequence for the instruction ADD [R1],[R2].

(14)

13. Explain various register transfer logics.

(14)

OR

14.
14.(a) Design a 4 bit combinational logic shifter with 2 control signals H1 and H2 that
perform the following operations (bit values given in parenthesis are the values of
control variable H1 and H2 respectively.) : Transfer of 0’s to S (00), shift right (01),
shift left (10), no shift (11).
(5)
14.(b) Design an ALU unit which will perform arithmetic and logic operation with a given
binary adder.
(9)

15.
15.(a) Give the logic used behind Booth’s multiplication algorithm.
(4)

15.(b) Identify the appropriate algorithm available inside the system to perform the
multiplication between -14 and -9. Also trace the algorithm for the above input.
(10)
OR

16.

16.(a) List and explain the different pipeline hazards and their possible solutions

(10)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

16.(b) Design a combinational circuit for 3x2 multiplication.

(4)
17. Design a hardwared control unit used to perform addition/subtraction of 2 numbers
represented in sign magnitude form.

(14)

OR

18. Give the structure of the micro program sequencer and its role in sequencing the micro
instructions.

(14)

19.

19.(a) Explain the different ways in which interrupt priority schemes can be implemented
(10)

19.(b) Give the structure of SRAM cell.

(4)

OR

20.

20.(a) Explain the various mapping functions available in cache memory.

(9)

20.(b) Briefly explain content addressable memory.

(5)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

TEACHING PLAN
No of
No Contents Lecture
Hrs
Module 1 : (Basic Structure of computers) (9 hours)
Functional units,basic operational concepts,bus structures
1.1 1
(introduction)
1.2 Memory locations and addresses , memory operations 1

1.3 Instructions and instruction sequencing 1

1.4 Addressing modes 1

1.5 Fundamental concepts of instruction execution, instruction cycle 1

1.6 Execution of a complete instruction - single bus organization (Lecture 1) 1

1.7 Execution of a complete instruction - single bus organization (Lecture 2) 1

1.8 Execution of a complete instruction - multiple bus organization (Lecture 1) 1

1.9 Execution of a complete instruction - multiple bus organization (Lecture 2) 1

Module 2 :(Register transfer logic and Processor logic design) (10 hours)

2.1 Inter register transfer – arithmetic micro operations 1

2.2 Inter register transfer – logic and shift micro operations 1

2.3 Processor organization 1

2.4 Design of arithmetic circuit 1

2.5 Design of logic circuit 1

2.6 Design of arithmetic logic unit 1

2.7 Design of status register 1

2.8 Design of shifter - processor unit 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

2.9 Design of accumulator (Lecture 1) 1

2.10 Design of accumulator (Lecture 2) 1

Module 3 : (Arithmetic algorithms and Pipelining) (9 hours)

3.1 Algorithm for multiplication of binary numbers 1

3.2 Algorithm for division (restoring method) of binary numbers 1

3.3 Array multiplier 1

3.4 Booth’s multiplication algorithm 1
3.5 Pipelining: Basic principles 1
3.6 Classification of pipeline processors (Lecture 1) 1
3.7 Classification of pipeline processors (Lecture 2) 1
3.8 Instruction and arithmetic pipelines (Design examples not required) 1
3.9 Hazard detection and resolution 1
Module 4 :( Control Logic Design) (9 hours)

4.1 Control organization –design of hardwired control logic (Lecture 1) 1

4.2 Control organization –design of hardwired control logic (Lecture 2) 1
4.3 Control organization –design of hardwired control logic (Lecture 3) 1
4.4 Design of microprogram control logic–control of processor unit (Lecture1) 1
4.5 Design of microprogram control logic–control of processor unit (Lecture2) 1
4.6 Design of microprogram control logic–control of processor unit (Lecture3) 1
4.7 Microprogram sequencer 1
4.8 Micro programmed CPU organization 1
4.9 Microinstructions –horizontal and vertical micro instructions 1
Module 5 : (Basic processing units, I/O and memory) (8 hours)

5.1 Accessing of I/O devices –interrupts 1

5.2 Interrupt hardware 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

5.3 Direct memory access 1

5.4 Memory system: basic concepts –semiconductor RAMs 1
5.5 Memory system considerations – ROMs 1
5.6 Content addressable memory 1
5.7 Cache memories -mapping functions (Lecture 1) 1
5.8 Cache memories -mapping functions (Lecture 2) 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
CST Database Management CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
INTRODUCTION
204 Systems
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This course provides a clear understanding of fundamental principles of Database

Management Systems (DBMS) with special focus on relational databases to the learners. The
topics covered in this course are basic concepts of DBMS, Entity Relationship (ER) model,
Relational Database principles, Relational Algebra, Structured Query Language (SQL), Physical
Data Organization, Normalization and Transaction Processing Concepts. The course also gives a
glimpse of the alternative data management model, NoSQL. This course helps the learners to
manage data efficiently by identifying suitable structures to maintain data assets of
organizations and to develop applications that utilize database technologies.

Prerequisite: Topics covered under the course Data Structures (CST 201), Exposure to a High
Level Language like C/python.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Summarize and exemplify fundamental nature and characteristics of database systems

CO1
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Understand)
Model real word scenarios given as informal descriptions, using Entity Relationship
CO2
diagrams. (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Model and design solutions for efficiently representing and querying data using
CO3
relational model (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Analyze)

Demonstrate the features of indexing and hashing in database applications (Cognitive

CO4
Knowledge Level: Apply)
Discuss and compare the aspects of Concurrency Control and Recovery in Database
CO5
systems (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Explain various types of NoSQL databases (Cognitive Knowledge Level:

CO6
Understand)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work
Conduct investigations of complex
PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category Examination Marks
Test1 (%) Test2 (%)
(%)
Remember 30 30 30
Understand 40 40 40
Apply 30 30 30
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Analyze
Evaluate

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the
syllabus and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing
remaining part of the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions
each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions
from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed
modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7
questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

Syllabus

Module 1: Introduction & Entity Relationship (ER) Model

Concept & Overview of Database Management Systems (DBMS) - Characteristics of Database

system, Database Users, structured, semi-structured and unstructured data. Data Models and
Schema - Three Schema architecture. Database Languages, Database architectures and
classification.

ER model - Basic concepts, entity set & attributes, notations, Relationships and constraints,
cardinality, participation, notations, weak entities, relationships of degree 3.

Module 2: Relational Model

Structure of Relational Databases - Integrity Constraints, Synthesizing ER diagram to relational

schema

Introduction to Relational Algebra - select, project, cartesian product operations, join - Equi-join,
natural join. query examples, introduction to Structured Query Language (SQL), Data Definition
Language (DDL), Table definitions and operations – CREATE, DROP, ALTER, INSERT,
DELETE, UPDATE.

Module 3: SQL DML (Data Manipulation Language), Physical Data Organization

SQL DML (Data Manipulation Language) - SQL queries on single and multiple tables, Nested
queries (correlated and non-correlated), Aggregation and grouping, Views, assertions, Triggers,
SQL data types.

Physical Data Organization - Review of terms: physical and logical records, blocking factor,
pinned and unpinned organization. Heap files, Indexing, Singe level indices, numerical examples,
Multi-level-indices, numerical examples, B-Trees & B+-Trees (structure only, algorithms not
required), Extendible Hashing, Indexing on multiple keys – grid files.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Module 4: Normalization
Different anomalies in designing a database, The idea of normalization, Functional dependency,
Armstrong’s Axioms (proofs not required), Closures and their computation, Equivalence of
Functional Dependencies (FD), Minimal Cover (proofs not required). First Normal Form (1NF),
Second Normal Form (2NF), Third Normal Form (3NF), Boyce Codd Normal Form (BCNF),
Lossless join and dependency preserving decomposition, Algorithms for checking Lossless Join
(LJ) and Dependency Preserving (DP) properties.

Module 5: Transactions, Concurrency and Recovery, Recent Topics

Transaction Processing Concepts - overview of concurrency control, Transaction Model,

Significance of concurrency Control & Recovery, Transaction States, System Log, Desirable
Properties of transactions.
Serial schedules, Concurrent and Serializable Schedules, Conflict equivalence and conflict
serializability, Recoverable and cascade-less schedules, Locking, Two-phase locking and its
variations. Log-based recovery, Deferred database modification, check-pointing.

Introduction to NoSQL Databases, Main characteristics of Key-value DB (examples from:

Redis), Document DB (examples from: MongoDB)

Main characteristics of Column - Family DB (examples from: Cassandra) and Graph DB

(examples from : ArangoDB)

Text Books

1. Elmasri R. and S. Navathe, Database Systems: Models, Languages, Design and

Application Programming, Pearson Education, 2013.

2. Sliberschatz A., H. F. Korth and S. Sudarshan, Database System Concepts, 6/e, McGraw
Hill, 2011.

Reference Books:
1. Adam Fowler, NoSQL for Dummies, John Wiley & Sons, 2015
2. NoSQL Data Models: Trends and Challenges (Computer Engineering: Databases and Big
Data), Wiley, 2018
3. Web Resource: https://www.w3resource.com/redis/
4. web Resource: https://www.w3schools.in/category/mongodb/
5. Web Resource: https://www.tutorialspoint.com/cassandra/cassandra_introduction.htm
6. Web Resource : https://www.tutorialspoint.com/arangodb/index.htm
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1 (CO1):

1. List out any three salient features of database systems, which distinguish it from a file
system.
2. Give one example each for logical and physical data independence.

Course Outcome 2(CO2):

1. What facts about the relationships between entities EMPLOYEE and PROJECT are
conveyed by the following ER diagram?

1. Design an ER diagram for the following scenario:

There is a set of teams, each team has an ID (unique identifier), name, main stadium, and to
which city this team belongs. Each team has many players, and each player belongs to one
team. Each player has a number (unique identifier), name, DoB, start year, and shirt
number that he uses. Teams play matches, in each match there is a host team and a guest
team.

Course Outcome 3(CO3):

1. For the SQL query, SELECT A, B FROM R WHERE B=’apple’ AND C = ‘orange’ on the
table R(A, B, C, D), where A is a key, write any three equivalent relational algebra
expressions.
2. Given the FDs P→Q, P→R, QR→S, Q→T, QR→U, PR→U, write the sequence of
Armstrong’s Axioms needed to arrive at the following FDs: (a) P → T (b) PR → S (c)
QR → SU
3. Consider a relation PLAYER (PLAYER-NO, PLAYER-NAME, PLAYER-POSN,
TEAM, TEAM-COLOR, COACH-NO, COACH-NAME, TEAM-CAPTAIN). Assume
that PLAYER-NO is the only key of the relation and that the following dependencies
hold:
TEAM→{TEAM-COLOR, COACH-NO, TEAM-CAPTAIN}
COACH-NO→COACH-NAME.
i. Is the relation in 2NF? If not, decompose to 2NF.
ii. Is the relation in 3NF? If not, decompose to 3NF.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4. In the following tables foreign keys have the same name as primary keys except
DIRECTED-BY, which refers to the primary key ARTIST-ID. Consider only single-
director movies.
MOVIES(MOVIE-ID, MNAME, GENRE, LENGTH, DIRECTED-BY)
ARTIST(ARTIST-ID, ANAME)
ACTING(ARTIST-ID, MOVIE-ID)
Write SQL expressions for the following queries:
(a) Name(s) and director name(s) of movie(s) acted by ‘Jenny’.
(b) Names of actors who have never acted with ‘Rony’
(c) Count of movies genre-wise.
(d) Name(s) of movies with maximum length.

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. Consider an EMPLOYEE file with 10000 records where each record is of size 80 bytes.
The file is sorted on employee number (15 bytes long), which is the primary key.
Assuming un-spanned organization, block size of 512 bytes and block pointer size of 5
bytes. Compute the number of block accesses needed for retrieving an employee record
based on employee number if (i) No index is used (ii) Multi-level primary index is used.

Course Outcome 5(CO5):

1. Determine if the following schedule is recoverable. Is the schedule cascade-less? Justify
your answer. r1(X), r2(Z), r1(Z), r3(X), r3(Y), w1(X), c1, w3(Y), c3, r2(Y), w2(Z), w2(Y),
c2. (Note: ri(X)/wi(X) means transaction Ti issues read/write on item X; ci means
transaction Ti commits.)
2. Two-phase locking protocol ensures serializability. Justify.

Course Outcome 6(CO6):

1. List out any three salient features of NoSQL databases. Give example of a document in
MongoDB.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QPCODE
Reg No:__________________
Name:___________________
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 204
Course Name: Database Management Systems
Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks
1 List out any three salient features of a database systems.
2 When is multi-valued composite attribute used in ER modelling?
3 For the SQL query, SELECT A, B FROM R WHERE B=’apple’ AND C = ‘orange’
on the table R(A, B, C, D), where A is a key, write any two equivalent relational
algebra expressions.
4 Outline the concept of theta-join.
5 How is the purpose of where clause is different from that of having clause?
6 What is the use of a trigger?
7 When do you say that a relation is not in 1NF?
8 Given the FDs P→Q, P→R, QR→S, Q→T, QR→U, PR→U, write the sequence of
Armstrong’s Axioms needed to arrive at a. P → T b. PR → S
9 What is meant by the lost update problem?
10 What is meant by check pointing?

PART B
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks
11 a. Design an ER diagram for the following scenario: There is a set of teams, each (14)
team has an ID (unique identifier), name, main stadium, and to which city this
team belongs. Each team has many players, and each player belongs to one
team. Each player has a number (unique identifier), name, DoB, start year, and
shirt number that he uses. Teams play matches, in each match there is a host
team and a guest team. The match takes place in the stadium of the host team.
For each match we need to keep track of the following: The date on which the
game is played The final result of the match. The players participated in the
match. For each player, how many goals he scored, whether or not he took
yellow card, and whether or not he took red card. During the match, one player
may substitute another player. We want to capture this substitution and the time
at which it took place. Each match has exactly three referees. For each referee
we have an ID (unique identifier), name, DoB, years of experience. One referee
is the main referee and the other two are assistant referee.
OR
12 a. Interpret the the following ER diagram.
(8)

"

b. Distinguish between physical data independence and logical data independence (6)
with suitable examples.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

13 EMPLOYEE(ENO, NAME, ADDRESS, DOB, AGE, GENDER, SALARY, (14)

DNUM, SUPERENO)
DEPARTMENT(DNO, DNAME, DLOCATION, DPHONE, MGRENO)
PROJECT(PNO, PNAME, PLOCATION, PCOST, CDNO)

DNUM is a foreign key that identifies the department to which an employee

belongs. MGRENO is a foreign key identifying the employee who manages the
department. CDNO is a foreign key identifying the department that controls the
project. SUPERENO is a foreign key identifying the supervisor of each employee.

Write relational algebra expressions for the following queries:-

(a) Names of female employees whose salary is more than 20000.

(b) Salaries of employee from ‘Accounts’ department
(c) Names of employees along with his/her superviser’s name
(d) For each employee return name of the employee along with his department
name and the names of projects in which he/she works
(e) Names of employees working in all the departments

OR
14 a.Write SQL DDL statements for the the following (Assume suitable domain (10)
types):
i. Create the tables STUDENT(ROLLNO, NAME, CLASS, SEM,
ADVISER), FACULTY(FID, NAME, SALARY, DEPT). Assume that
ADVISER is a foreign key referring FACUTY table.
ii. Delete department with name ‘CS’ and all employees of the
department.
iii. Increment salary of every faculty by 10%.
b.Illustrate foreign key constraint with a typical example. (4)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

15 For the relation schema below, give an expression in SQL for each of the queries (14)
that follows:

employee(employee-name, street, city)

works(employee-name, company-name, salary)
company(company-name, city)
manages(employee-name, manager-name)

a) Find the names, street address, and cities of residence for all employees
who work for the Company ‘RIL Inc.' and earn more than $10,000.
b) Find the names of all employees who live in the same cities as the
companies for which they work.
c) Find the names of all employees who do not work for ‘KYS Inc.’. Assume
that all people work for exactly one company.
d) Find the names of all employees who earn more than every employee of
‘SB Corporation'. Assume that all people work for at most one company.
e) List out number of employees company-wise in the decreasing order of
number of employees.

OR
16 a. Consider an EMPLOYEE file with 10000 records where each record is of (9)
size 80 bytes. The file is sorted on employee number (15 bytes long), which
is the primary key. Assuming un-spanned organization and block size of
512 bytes compute the number of block accesses needed for selecting
records based on employee number if,
i. No index is used
ii. Single level primary index is used
iii. Multi-level primary index is used
Assume a block pointer size of 6 bytes.
b. Illustrate correlated and non-correlated nested queries with real examples. (5)

17 a. Illstrate3NF and BCNF with suitable real examples. (6)

b. Given a relation R(A1,A2,A3,A4,A5) with functional dependencies (8)

A1→A2A4 and A4→A5, check if the decomposition R1(A1,A2,A3),
R2(A1,A4), R3(A2,A4,A5) is lossless.
OR
18 a. Consider the un-normalized relation R(A, B, C, D, E, F, G) with the FDs (7)
A→B , AC→G, AD→EF, EF→G, CDE→AB. Trace the normalization
process to reach 3NF relations.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

b. Illustrate Lossless Join Decomposition and Dependency Preserving (7)

Decomposition with typical examples.
19 a. Discuss the four ACID properties and their importance. (7)

b. Determine if the following schedule is conflict serializable. Is the schedule (7)

recoverable? Is the schedule cascade-less? Justify your answers.
r1(X), r2(Z), r1(Z), r3(X), r3(Y ), w1(X), c1, w3(Y), c3, r2(Y), w2(Z),
w2(Y), c2

(Note: ri(X)/wi(X) means transaction Ti issues read/write on item X; ci

means transaction Ti commits.)
OR
20 a. Discuss the main characteristics of Key-value DB and Graph DB. (7)

b. Illustrate two-phase locking with a schedule containing three transactions. (7)

Argue that 2PL ensures serializability. Also argue that 2Pl can lead to
deadlock.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan

Hours
Course Name
(48)
Module 1: Introduction & ER Model 8
Concept & Overview of DBMS, Characteristics of DB system,
1.1 1
Database Users.
Structured, semi-structured and unstructured data. Data Models and
1.2 1
Schema

1.3 Three-Schema-architecture. Database Languages 1

1.4 Database architectures and classification 1

1.5 ER model: basic concepts, entity set & attributes, notations 1

1.6 Relationships and constraints – cardinality, participation, notations 1
1.7 Weak entities, relationships of degree 3 1
1.8 ER diagram – exercises 1
Module 2: Relational Model 7
2.1 Structure of relational Databases, Integrity Constraints 1
Synthesizing ER diagram to relational schema, Introduction to
2.2 1
relational algebra.
2.3 Relational algebra: select, project, Cartesian product operations 1
2.4 Relational Algebra: join - Equi-join, Natural join 1
2.5 Query examples 1
2.6 Introduction to SQL, important data types 1
DDL, Table definitions and operations – CREATE, DROP, ALTER,
2.7 1
INSERT, DELETE, UPDATE
Module 3: SQL DML, Physical Data Organization 11
3.1 SQL DML, SQL queries on single and multiple tables 1
3.2 Nested queries (correlated and non-correlated) 1
3.3 Aggregation and grouping 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Hours
Course Name
(48)
3.4 Views, assertions (with examples) 1
3.5 Triggers (with examples), SQL data types 1
Review of terms: physical and logical records, blocking factor,
3.6 1
pinned and unpinned organization. Heap files, Indexing
3.7 Singe level indices, numerical examples 1

3.8 Multi-level-indices, numerical examples 1

3.9 B-Trees and B+Trees (structure only, algorithms not required) 1

3.10 Extendible Hashing 1

3.11 Indexing on multiple keys – grid files 1
Module 4: Normalization 8
Different anomalies in designing a database, The idea of
4.1 1
normalization
4.2 Functional dependency, Armstrong’s Axioms (proofs not required) 1
Closures and their computation, Equivalence of FDs, minimal
4.3 1
Cover (proofs not required).
4.4 1NF, 2NF 1
4.5 3NF, BCNF 1
4.6 Lossless join and dependency preserving decomposition 1
Algorithms for checking Lossless Join and Dependency preserving
4.7 1
properties (Lecture 1)
Algorithms for checking Lossless Join and Dependency preserving
4.8 1
properties (Lecture 2)
Module 5: Transactions, Concurrency and Recovery, Recent
14
Topics
5.1 Transaction Processing Concepts: Transaction Model 1
Overview of concurrency control, Significance of concurrency
5.2 1
Control & Recovery
5.3 Transaction States, System Log 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Hours
Course Name
(48)
5.4 Desirable Properties of transactions, Serial schedules 1
5.5 Concurrent and Serializable Schedules 1
5.6 Conflict equivalence and conflict serializability 1
5.7 Recoverable and cascade-less schedules 1

5.8 Locking, Two-phase locking, strict 2PL. 1

5.9 Log-based recovery 1

5.10 Deferred database modification (serial schedule), example 1
Deferred database modification (concurrent schedule) example,
5.11 1
check-pointing
5.12 Introduction to NoSQL Databases 1
Main characteristics of Key-value DB (examples from: Redis),
5.13 Document DB (examples from: MongoDB) [detailed study not 1
expected]

Main characteristics of Column-Family DB (examples from:

5.14 Cassandra) and Graph DB (examples from : ArangoDB) [detailed 1
study not expected]
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Year of
CST OPERATING Category L T P Credit
Introduction
206 SYSTEMS
PCC 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: Study of operating system is an essential to understand the overall working of

computer system, tradeoffs between performance and functionality and the division of jobs
between hardware and software. This course introduces the concepts of memory management,
device management, process management, file management and security & protection
mechanisms available in an operating system. The course helps the learner to understand the
fundamentals about any operating system design so that they can extend the features of operating
system to detect and solve many problems occurring in operating system and to manage the
computer resources appropriately.

Prerequisite: Topics covered in the courses are Data Structures (CST 201) and Programming
in C (EST 102)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the relevance, structure and functions of Operating Systems in computing

CO1
devices. (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)

Illustrate the concepts of process management and process scheduling mechanisms

CO2
employed in Operating Systems. (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)
Explain process synchronization in Operating Systems and illustrate process
CO3 synchronization mechanisms using Mutex Locks, Semaphores and Monitors
(Cognitive knowledge: Understand)
Explain any one method for detection, prevention, avoidance and recovery for
CO4
managing deadlocks in Operating Systems. (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)

Explain the memory management algorithms in Operating Systems. (Cognitive

CO5
knowledge: Understand)
Explain the security aspects and algorithms for file and storage management in
CO6
Operating Systems. (Cognitive knowledge: Understand)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Test 1 (Marks Test 2 (Marks End Semester Examination

Bloom’s Category
in percentage) in percentage) (Marks in percentage)
Remember 30 30 30

Understand 30 30 30
Apply 40 40 40

Analyse
Evaluate

Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

Syllabus

Module I

Introduction: Operating system overview – Operations, Functions, Service – System calls,

Types – Operating System structure - Simple structure, Layered approach, Microkernel, Modules
– System boot process.

Module II

Processes - Process states, Process control block, threads, scheduling, Operations on processes -
process creation and termination – Inter-process communication - shared memory systems,
Message passing systems.
Process Scheduling – Basic concepts- Scheduling COMPUTER SCIENCE
criteria -scheduling AND ENGINEERING
algorithms- First come
First Served, Shortest Job Firs, Priority scheduling, Round robin scheduling

Module III

Process synchronization- Race conditions – Critical section problem – Peterson’s solution,

Synchronization hardware, Mutex Locks, Semaphores, Monitors – Synchronization problems -
Producer Consumer, Dining Philosophers and Readers-Writers.

Deadlocks: Necessary conditions, Resource allocation graphs, Deadlock prevention, Deadlock

avoidance – Banker’s algorithms, Deadlock detection, Recovery from deadlock.

Module IV

Memory Management: Concept of address spaces, Swapping, Contiguous memory allocation,

fixed and variable partitions, Segmentation, Paging. Virtual memory, Demand paging, Page
replacement algorithms.

Module V

File System: File concept - Attributes, Operations, types, structure – Access methods, Protection.
File-system implementation, Directory implementation. Allocation methods.
Storage Management: Magnetic disks, Solid-state disks, Disk Structure, Disk scheduling,
Disk formatting.

Text Book

Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin, Greg Gagne, ' Operating System Concepts' 9th
Edition, Wiley India 2015.

Reference Books:

1. Andrew S Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems” , 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
2. William Stallings, “Operating systems”, 6th Edition, Pearson, Global Edition, 2015.
3. Garry Nutt, Nabendu Chaki, Sarmistha Neogy, “Operating Systems”, 3rd Edition, Pearson
Education.
4. D.M.Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
5. Sibsankar Haldar, Alex A Aravind, “Operating Systems”, Pearson Education.
Sample Course Level Assessment Questions COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Course Outcome1 (CO1): What is the main advantage of the micro kernel approach to system
design? How do user program and system program interact in a microkernel architecture?

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Define process. With the help of a neat diagram explain different
states of process.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3): What do you mean by binary semaphore and counting semaphore?
With C, explain implementation of wait () and signal().

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Describe resource allocation graph for the following. a) with a
deadlock b) with a cycle but no deadlock.

Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Consider the following page reference string 1, 2, 3, 4, 2, 1, 5, 6, 2,

1, 2, 3, 7, 6, 3, 2, 1, 2, 3, 6. Find out the number of page faults if there are 4 page frames, using
the following page replacement algorithms. i) LRU ii) FIFO iii) Optimal

Course Outcome 6 (CO6): Explain the different file allocation methods with advantages and
disadvantages.

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: ___

Reg No:_______________
Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 206

Course name : OPERATING SYSTEMS

Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART-A

(Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. How does hardware find the Operating System kernel after system switch-on?

2. What is the purpose of system call in operating system?

3. Why is context switching considered as an overhead to the system?

 COMPUTER
4. How is inter process communication implement SCIENCE
using shared memory? AND ENGINEERING

5. Describe resource allocation graph for the following.

a) with a deadlock b)with a cycle but no deadlock.

6. What is critical section? What requirement should be satisfied by a solution to the critical
section problem?

7. Consider the reference string 1, 2, 3, 4, 2, 1, 5, 6, 2, 1, 2, 3, 7, 6, 3, 2, 1, 2, 3, 6. How

many page faults occur while using FCFS for the following cases.

a) frame=2 b)frame=3

8. Differentiate between internal and external fragmentations.

9. Compare sequential access and direct access methods of storage devices.

10. Define the terms (i) Disk bandwidth (ii) Seek time.

PART-B(Answer any one question from each module)

11. a) Explain the following structures of operating system (i) Monolithic systems
(ii) Layered Systems (iii) Micro Kernel (iv) Modular approach. (12)

b) Under what circumstances would a user be better of using a time sharing system than a
PC or a single user workstation? (2)

OR

12. a) What is the main advantage of the micro kernel approach to system design? How do user
program and system program interact in a microkernel architecture? (8)

b) Describe the differences between symmetric and asymmetric multiprocessing? What are
the advantages and disadvantages of multiprocessor systems? (6)

13. a) Define process. With the help of a neat diagram explain different states of process. (8)
b) Explain how a new process can be created in Unix using fork system call. (6)
OR

14 a) Find the average waiting time and average turnaround time for the processes given in the
table below using:- i) SRT scheduling algorithm ii) Priority scheduling algorithm (9)
 Process Arrival Time (ms)COMPUTER SCIENCE
CPU Burst Time (ms) AND ENGINEERING
Priority
P1 0 5 3
P2 2 4 1
P3 3 1 2
P4 5 2 4
b) What is a Process Control Block? Explain the fields used in a Process Control Block. (5)

15. Consider a system with five processes P0 through P4 and three resources of type A, B, C.
Resource type A has 10 instances, B has 5 instances and C has 7 instances. Suppose at time
t0 following snapshot of the system has been taken:

i) What will be the content of the Need matrix? Is the system in a safe state? If Yes, then what is
the safe sequence? (8)
iii)What will happen if process P1 requests one additional instance of resource type A and two
instances of resource type C? (6)

OR

16. a) State dining philosopher’s problem and give a solution using semaphores. (7)

b) What do you mean by binary semaphore and counting semaphore? With C struct, explain
implementation of wait () and signal() (7)
 COMPUTER
17. a) Consider the following page reference string SCIENCE
1, 2, 3, 4, 2, 1, 5, 6, 2, 1, 2,AND
3, 7, 6,ENGINEERING
3, 2, 1, 2,
3, 6. Find out the number of page faults if there are 4 page frames, using the following
page replacement algorithms i) LRU ii) FIFO iii) Optimal (9)

b) Explain the steps involved in handling a page fault. (5)

OR

18. a) With a diagram, explain how paging is done with TLB. (5)

b) Memory partitions of sizes 100 kb, 500 kb, 200 kb, 300 kb, 600 kb are available, how
would best ,worst and first fit algorithms place processes of size 212 kb, 417 kb, 112 kb,
426 kb in order. Rank the algorithms in terms of how efficiently they uses memory. (9)

19. a) Suppose that a disk drive has 5000 cylinders, numbered 0 to 4999. the drive currently
services a request at cylinder 143, and the previous request was at cylinder 125. the queue
of pending request in FIFO order is 86, 1470, 913, 1774, 948, 1509, 1022, 1750, 130.
Starting from the current position, what is the total distance (in cylinders) that the disk arm
moves to satisfy all pending requests for each of the following algorithms

i) FCFS ii) SSFT iii) SCAN iv) LOOK v) C-SCAN (10)

b) What is the use of access matrix in protection mechanism? (4)

OR

20. a) Explain the different file allocation operations with advantages and disadvantages. (8)
b) Explain the following i) file types ii) file operation iii) file attributes (6)

Teaching Plan

Module 1 - Introduction 5 Hours

1.1 Introduction to Operating System 1

1.2 Operating System operations, functions, service 1

1.3 System calls, Types 1

1.4 Operating System Structure: Simple, Layered, Microkernel, Modules 1

1.5 System Boot Process 1

Module 2 – Processes and Process Scheduling 9 Hours

2.1 Processes, Process states 1

2.2 Process Control Block, Threads 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
2.3 Scheduling 1

2.4 Operations on processes: process creation and termination 1

2.5 Inter-process communication: Shared memory systems, Message Passing 1

2.6 Process Scheduling – Basic concepts, Scheduling Criteria 1

2.7 Scheduling algorithms - Basics 1

2.8 First come First Served, Shortest Job First 1

2.9 Priority scheduling, Round Robin Scheduling 1

Module 3 - Process synchronization and Dead locks 13 Hours

3.1 Process synchronization, Race conditions 1

3.2 Critical Section problem, Peterson’s solution 1

3.3 Synchronization hardware, Mutex Locks 1

3.4 Semaphores 1
3.5 Monitors 1

3.6 Synchronization problem examples (Lecture 1) 1

3.7 Synchronization problem examples (Lecture 2) 1

3.8 Deadlocks: Necessary conditions, Resource Allocation Graphs 1

3.9 Deadlock prevention 1

3.10 Deadlock avoidance 1

3.11 Banker’s algorithm 1

3.12 Deadlock detection 1

3.13 Deadlock recovery 1

Module 4 - Memory Management 9 Hours

4.1 Memory Management: Concept of Address spaces 1

4.2 Swapping 1
4.3 Contiguous memory allocation, fixed and variable partitions 1

4.4 Segmentation. 1
4.5 Paging (Lecture 1) 1

4.6 Paging (Lecture 2) 1

4.7 Virtual memory, Demand Paging 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
4.8 Page replacement algorithms (Lecture 1) 1

4.9 Page replacement algorithms (Lecture 2) 1

Module 5 - File and Disk management 9 Hours

5.1 File concept, Attributes, Operations, types, structure 1

5.2 Access methods 1

5.3 Protection 1
5.4 File-System implementation 1

5.5 Directory implementation 1

5.6 Allocation methods 1

5.7 Magnetic disks, Solid-state disks, Disk structure 1

5.8 Disk scheduling 1

5.9 Disk formatting 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CSL 202 DIGITAL LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2

Preamble: This course helps the learners to get familiarized with (i) Digital Logic Design
through the implementation of Logic Circuits using ICs of basic logic gates & flip-
flops and (ii) Hardware Description Language based Digital Design. This course helps the
learners to design and implement hardware systems in areas such as games, music, digital
filters, wireless communications and graphical displays.

Prerequisite:Topics covered under the course Logic System Design (CST 203)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Design and implement combinational logic circuits using Logic Gates (Cognitive
CO 1
Knowledge Level: Apply)

Design and implement sequential logic circuits using Integrated Circuits

CO 2
(Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Simulate functioning of digital circuits using programs written in a Hardware
CO 3
Description Language (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Function effectively as an individual and in a team to accomplish a given task of

CO 4
designing and implementing digital circuits (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO 1

CO 2

CO 3

CO 4
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment
End Semester
Bloom’s Category Test (Internal Exam)
Examination (Percentage)
(Percentage)

Remember 20 20
Understand 20 20

Apply 60 60
Analyse

Evaluate
Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 75 75 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks

Continuous Evaluation in Lab : 30 marks

Continuous Assessment Test : 15 marks

Viva-voce : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: The marks will be distributed as Design/Algorithm 30

marks, Implementation/Program 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100
marks which will be converted out of 15 while calculating Internal Evaluation marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern:The marks will be distributed as Design/Algorithm 30

marks, Implementation/Program 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100
marks will be converted out of 75 for End Semester Examination.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Fair Lab Record:
All Students attending the Digital Lab should have a Fair Record. The fair record should be
produced in the University Lab Examination. Every experiment conducted in the lab should
be noted in the fair record. For every experiment in the fair record, the right hand page should
contain Experiment Heading, Experiment Number, Date of Experiment, and Aim of
Experiment. The left hand page should contain components used, circuit design or a print out
of the code used for the experiment and sample output obtained.

SYLLABUS

Conduct a minimum of 8 experiments from Part A and a minimum of 4 experiments from

Part B. The starred experiments in Part A are mandatory. The lab work should be conducted
in groups (maximum group size being 4). The performance of a student in the group should
be assessed based on teamwork, integrity and cooperation.
Part A (Any 8 Experiments)

• A 2 hour session should be spent to make the students comfortable with the use of
trainer kit/breadboard and ICs.
• The following experiments can be conducted on breadboard or trainer kits.
• Out of the 15 experiments listed below, a minimum of 8 experiments should be
completed by a student, including the mandatory experiments (5).

1. Realization of functions using basic and universal gates (SOP and POS forms).
2. Design and realization of half adder, full adder, half subtractor and full subtractor using:
a) basic gates (b) universal gates. *
3. Code converters: Design and implement BCD to Excess 3 and Binary to Gray code
converters.
4. Design and implement 4 bit adder/subtractor circuit and BCD adder using IC7483.
5. Implementation of Flip Flops: SR, D, T, JK and Master Slave JK Flip Flops using basic
gates.*
6. Asynchronous Counter: Design and implement 3 bit up/down counter.
7. Asynchronous Counter: Realization of Mod N counters (At least one up counter and one
down counter to be implemented). *
8. Synchronous Counter: Realization of 4-bit up/down counter.
9. Synchronous Counter: Realization of Mod-N counters and sequence generators. (At least
one mod N counter and one sequence generator to be implemented) *
10. Realization of Shift Register (Serial input left/right shift register), Ring counter and
Johnson Counter using flipflops. *
11. Realization of counters using IC’s (7490, 7492, 7493).
12. Design and implement BCD to Seven Segment Decoder.
13. Realization of Multiplexers and De-multiplexers using gates.
14. Realization of combinational circuits using MUX & DEMUX ICs (74150, 74154).
15. To design and set up a 2-bit magnitude comparator using basic gates.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
PART B (Any 4 Experiments)

• The following experiments aim at training the students in digital circuit design with
Verilog. The experiments will lay a foundation for digital design with Hardware
Description Languages.
• A 3 hour introductory session shall be spent to make the students aware of the
fundamentals of development using Verilog
• Out of the 8 experiments listed below, a minimum of 4 experiments should be
completed by a student
Experiment 1. Realization of Logic Gates and Familiarization of Verilog
(a) Familiarization of the basic syntax of Verilog
(b) Development of Verilog modules for basic gates and to verify truth tables.
(c) Design and simulate the HDL code to realize three and four variable Boolean
functions

Experiment 2: Half adder and full adder

(a) Development of Verilog modules for half adder in 3 modeling styles (dataflow/
structural/behavioural).
(b) Development of Verilog modules for full adder in structural modeling using half
adder.

Experiment 3: Design of code converters

Design and simulate the HDL code for

(a) 4- bit binary to gray code converter

(b) 4- bit gray to binary code converter

Experiment 4: Mux and Demux in Verilog

(a) Development of Verilog modules for a 4x1 MUX.
(b) Development of Verilog modules for a 1x4 DEMUX.

Experiment 5: Adder/Subtractor
(a) Write the Verilog modules for a 4-bit adder/subtractor
(b) Development of Verilog modules for a BCD adder

Experiment 6: Magnitude Comparator

Development of Verilog modules for a 4 bit magnitude comparator

Experiment 7: Flipflops and shiftregisters

(a) Development of Verilog modules for SR, JK, T and D flip flops.
(b) Development of Verilog modules for a Johnson/Ring counter

Experiment 8: Counters
(a) Development of Verilog modules for an asynchronous decade counter.
(b) Development of Verilog modules for a 3 bit synchronous up-down counter.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Practice Questions

PART A
1. Design a two bit parallel adder using gates and implement it using ICs of basic gates
2. A combinatorial circuit has 4 inputs and one output. The output is equal to 1 when (a)
all inputs are 1, (b) none of the inputs are 1, (c) an odd number of inputs are equal to
1. Obtain the truth table and output function for this circuit and implement the same.
3. Design and implement a parallel subtractor.
4. Design and implement a digital circuit that converts Gray code to Binary.
5. Design a combinational logic circuit that will output the 1’s compliment of a 4-bit
input number.

∑
6. Implement and test the logic function f! (A, B, C ) = m(0,1,3,6) using an 8:1 MUX
IC
7. Design a circuit that will work as a ring counter or a Johnson counter based on a mode
bit, M.
8. Design a 4-bit synchronous down counter.
9. Design a Counter to generate the binary sequence 0,1,3,7,6,4
10. Design an asynchronous mod 10 down counter
11. Design and implement a synchronous counter using JK flip flop ICs to generate the
sequence: 0 - 1 -3 - 5 - 7 - 0.

PART B
1. Develop Verilog modules for a full subtractor in structural modeling using half
subtractors.
2. Design a 4 bit parallel adder using Verilog.
3. Develop Verilog modules for a 4 bit synchronous down counter.
4. Write Verilog code for implementing a 8:1 multiplexer.
5. Develop Verilog modules for a circuit that converts Excess 3 code to binary.
6. Write the Verilog code for a JK Flip flop, and its test-bench. Use all possible
combinations of inputs to test its working
7. Write the hardware description in Verilog of a 8-bit register with shift left and shift
right modes of operations and test its functioning.
8. Write the hardware description in Verilog of a mod-N (N > 9) counter and test it.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
OPERATING CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CST 206 INTRODUCTION
SYSTEMS LAB
PCC 0 0 3 2 2019

Preamble: The course aims to offer students a hands-on experience on Operating System
concepts using a constructivist approach and problem-oriented learning. Operating systems are
the fundamental part of every computing device to run any type of software.

Prerequisite: Topics covered in the courses are Data Structures (CST 201) and Programming
in C (EST 102)

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to

Illustrate the use of systems calls in Operating Systems. (Cognitive knowledge:

CO1
Understand)

Implement Process Creation and Inter Process Communication in Operating

CO2
Systems. (Cognitive knowledge: Apply)
Implement Fist Come First Served, Shortest Job First, Round Robin and Priority-
CO3
based CPU Scheduling Algorithms. (Cognitive knowledge: Apply)

Illustrate the performance of First In First Out, Least Recently Used and Least
CO4
Frequently Used Page Replacement Algorithms. (Cognitive knowledge: Apply)
Implement modules for Deadlock Detection and Deadlock Avoidance in Operating
CO5
Systems. (Cognitive knowledge: Apply)
Implement modules for Storage Management and Disk Scheduling in Operating
CO6
Systems. (Cognitive knowledge: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern:

Continuous Assessment Test

End Semester Examination
Bloom’s Category (Internal Exam) Marks in
Marks in percentage
percentage
Remember 20 20
Understand 20 20
Apply 60 60
Analyse

Evaluate
Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution

ESE
Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Duration
Marks
150 75 75 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 15 marks

Continuous Evaluation in Lab : 30 marks

Continuous Assessment Test : 15 marks

Viva Voce : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern: The marks will be distributed as Algorithm 30 marks,

Program 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 100 marks which will be
converted out of 15 while calculating Internal Evaluation marks.

End Semester Examination Pattern: The percentage of marks will be distributed as

Algorithm 30 marks, Program 20 marks, Output 20 marks and Viva 30 marks. Total 75 marks.

Operating System to Use in Lab : Linux

Compiler/Software to Use in Lab : gcc

Progamming Language to Use in Lab : Ansi C

Fair Lab Record:

All Students attending the Operating System Lab should have a Fair Record. The fair record
should be produced in the University Lab Examination. Every experiment conducted in the
lab should be noted in the fair record. For every experiment in the fair record, the right hand
page should contain Experiment Heading, Experiment Number, Date of experiment, Aim of
the Experiment and the operations performed on them, Details of experiment including
algorithm and result of Experiment. The left hand page should contain a print out of the code
used for experiment and sample output obtained for a set of input.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS
OPERATING SYSTEMS LAB
* mandatory

1. Basic Linux commands

2. Shell programming
-Command syntax
-Write simple functions with basic tests, loops, patterns
3. System calls of Linux operating system:*
fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir
4. Write programs using the I/O system calls of Linux operating system (open, read, write)
5. Implement programs for Inter Process Communication using Shared Memory *
6. Implement Semaphores*
7. Implementation of CPU scheduling algorithms. a) Round Robin b) SJF c) FCFS d)
Priority *
8. Implementation of the Memory Allocation Methods for fixed partition*
a) First Fit b) Worst Fit c) Best Fit
9. Implement l page replacement algorithms a) FIFO b) LRU c) LFU*
10. Implement the banker’s algorithm for deadlock avoidance. *
11. Implementation of Deadlock detection algorithm
12. Simulate file allocation strategies.
b) Sequential b) Indexed c) Linked
13. Simulate disk scheduling algorithms. *
c) FCFS b)SCAN c) C-SCAN

OPERATING SYSTEMS LAB - PRACTICE QUESTIONS

1. Write a program to create a process in linux.

2. Write programs using the following system calls of Linux operating system:
fork, exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir
3. Write programs using the I/O system calls of Linux operating system (open, read, write)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4. Given the list of processes, their CPU burst times and arrival times, display/print the
Gantt chart for FCFS and SJF. For each of the scheduling policies, compute and print the
average waiting time and average turnaround time
5. Write a C program to simulate following non-preemptive CPU scheduling algorithms to
find turnaround time and waiting time.
a)FCFS b) SJF c) Round Robin (pre-emptive) d) Priority
6. Write a C program to simulate following contiguous memory allocation techniques
a) Worst-fit b) Best-fit c) First-fit
7. Write a C program to simulate paging technique of memory management.
8. Write a C program to simulate Bankers algorithm for the purpose of deadlock avoidance.
9. Write a C program to simulate disk scheduling algorithms a) FCFS b) SCAN c) C-SCAN
10. Write a C program to simulate page replacement algorithms a) FIFO b) LRU c) LFU
11. Write a C program to simulate producer-consumer problem using semaphores.
12. Write a program for file manipulation for display a file and directory in memory.
13. Write a program to simulate algorithm for deadlock prevention.
14. Write a C program to simulate following file allocation strategies.
a)Sequential b) Indexed c) Linked
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
MINOR
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

CST Programming Category L T P CREDIT YEAR OF INTRODUCTION

282 Methodologies MINOR 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is the second course for awarding B.Tech Minor in Computer Science and
Engineering with specialization in Software Engineering. The course provides the learners a
clear understanding of the main constructs of contemporary programming languages and the
various systems of ideas that have been used to guide the design of programming languages.
This course covers the concepts of Names, Bindings & Scope, Statement-Level Control
Structures, Sub Programs, support for Object Oriented Programming, Exception Handling, Event
Handling, Concurrency Control, Functional Programming and Logic Programming. This course
helps the learners to equip with the knowledge necessary for the critical evaluation of existing
and upcoming programming languages. It also enables the learner to choose the most appropriate
language for a given programming task, apply that language's approach to structure or organize
the code and classify programming languages based on their features.
Prerequisite:

1. Topics covered under the course Programming in C (EST 102)

2. Object Oriented Programming (CST 251)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the criteria for evaluating programming languages and compare Imperative,
CO1 Functional and Logic programming languages (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Understand)

Explain the characteristics of data types and variables (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
CO2
Understand)
Illustrate how control flow structures and subprograms help in developing the
CO3 structure of a program to solve a computational problem (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Explain the characteristics of Object Oriented Programming Languages (Cognitive
CO4
Knowledge Level: Understand)
Compare concurrency constructs in different programming languages (Cognitive
CO5
Knowledge Level: Understand)

1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester Examination

Bloom’s Category
Test 1 (Marks%) Test 2 (Marks%) (Marks%)

Remember 30 30 30
Understand 50 50 50
Apply 20 20 20
Analyze
Evaluate
Create

2
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a student
should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question
can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

3
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SYLLABUS

Module 1

Introduction – Role of Programming Languages, Programming Domains, Language Evaluation

Criteria, Influence on Language Design, Language Design Trade-offs, Implementation Methods.
Names, Bindings & Scope – Names, Variables, Concept of Binding, Scope and Lifetime,
Referencing Environments.
Module 2

Data Types – Primitive Data Types, Character String Types, User-Defined Ordinal Types, Array
Types, Record Types, List Types, Pointer & Reference Types, Type Checking, Strong Typing,
Type Equivalence. Expressions – Arithmetic Expressions, Overloaded Operators, Type
Conversions, Relational and Boolean Expressions, Short-Circuit Evaluation. Assignment -
Assignment Statements, Mixed-mode Assignment.

Module 3

Statement-Level Control Structures – Selection Statements, Iterative Statements,

Unconditional Branching, Guarded Commands. Subprograms – Design Issues of Subprograms,
Local Referencing Environments, Parameter Passing Methods, Subprograms as Parameters,
Overloaded Subprograms, Closures, Co-routines.

Module 4

Support for Object Oriented Programming – Inheritance, Dynamic Binding, Design Issues for Object
Oriented Languages, Support for Object Oriented Programming in C++, Implementation of Object-
Oriented Constructs. Exception Handling – Basic Concepts, Design Issues. Event Handling - Introduction
to Event Handling.

Module 5

Concurrency – Subprogram Level Concurrency, Semaphores, Monitors, Message Passing.

Functional Programming Languages – Introduction to LISP and Scheme, Comparison of
Functional and Imperative Languages. Logic Programming Languages – Basic Elements of
Prolog, Applications of Logic Programming.

Text Books

1. Robert W. Sebesta, Concepts of Programming Languages, 10th Edition, Pearson.

2. Scott M. L., Programming Language Pragmatics, 3rd Edn., Morgan Kaufmann Publishers.

4
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Reference Books:

1. Kenneth C. Louden, Programming Languages: Principles and Practice, 2nd Edn., Cengage
Learning.

2. Tucker A. B. and R. E. Noonan, Programming Languages: Principles and Paradigms, 2nd

Edn. –TMH.

3. Ravi Sethi, Programming Languages: Concepts & Constructs, 2nd Edn., Pearson
Education.

4. David A. Watt, Programming Language Design Concepts, Wiley Dreamtech

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Compare any three programming languages based on the language
evaluation criteria. Prepare a list of characteristics that affect the language evaluation criteria.
Identify the advantages and disadvantages of imperative, functional and logic programming
languages.
Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Two most important design issues that are specific to character
string types are (1) whether a string is simply a special kind of character array or a primitive type
(2) whether strings have static or dynamic length. Justify your answer.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Describe three situations where a combined counting and logical looping statement is
needed.
2. Describe the ways that aliases can occur with pass-by-reference parameters.
3. Identify the two fundamental design considerations for parameter-passing methods.
Course Outcome 4 (CO4):
1. Describe the role of a virtual method table in implementing dynamic method binding.
2. Identify one disadvantage of inheritance.
Course Outcome 5 (CO5): Evaluate the use of semaphores and monitors for providing
competition synchronization and cooperation synchronization.

5
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________ Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH (MINOR) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH &

YEAR Course Code: CST 282

Course Name: Programming Methodologies

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. Differentiate between readability and writability.

2. Define binding and binding time
3. What are the advantages of user-defined enumeration types?
4. Define narrowing and widening conversions.
5. Why for statement in C language is more flexible than that of older languages?
6. What are the advantages and disadvantages of dynamic local variables in subprograms?
7. Explain the concept of dynamic method binding with an example.
8. Is it mandatory to use constructors in object oriented languages? Justify your answer.
9. What are the applications of logical programming languages?
10. Explain the working of let and let-rec constructs in Scheme.

Part B

Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

11.
(a) Explain different criteria used for evaluating languages.
(7 marks)
(b) Explain the major methods of implementing programming languages.
(7 marks)

OR

12.
(a) Explain the meanings, purposes, advantages and disadvantages of four categories of
scalar variables according to their storage bindings.
(7 marks)

6
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

(b) What is referencing environment of a statement? Show the referencing

environment at the indicated program points (1), (2), (3) & (4) for the following
program segment. Assume that the programming language used is statically scoped.

program example;
var a, b : integer;
procedure sub1;
var x, y: integer;
begin { sub1 }
……….. (1)
end { sub1 }
procedure sub2;
var x : integer;
……..
procedure sub3;
var x: integer;
begin { sub3 }
……….. (2)
end { sub3 }
begin { sub2 }
……….. (3)
end { sub2}
begin {example}
……….. (4)
end {example } (7 Marks)

13.
(a) Explain any two problems associated with the pointer data types and also indicate
how dangling pointer problem can be solved.
(7 marks)
(b) Describe the lazy and eager approaches for reclaiming garbage.
(7 marks)
OR

14.
(a) What is meant by side effect and illustrate the advantages of referential
transparency?
(8 marks)
(b) Explain the terms: compound assignment operator, coercion and short circuit
evaluation. (6 marks)

7
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

15.
(a) Explain different categories of iteration control statements.
(8 marks)
(b) Explain techniques used for identifying correct referencing environment for a
subprogram that was sent as a parameter.
(6 marks)
OR
16.
(a) Describe the implementation models of Parameter passing.
(10 Marks)
(b) Differentiate coroutines from conventional subprograms.
(4 marks)
17.
(a) What is an exception handler? Explain how exceptions are handled in object
oriented language?
(7 Marks)
(b) What are the design issues in object oriented languages? (7 Marks)

OR

18. Explain the following object oriented features:

(i) Encapsulation
(ii) Inheritance
(iii) Constructors and Destructors
(iv) Operator Overloading
(v) Polymorphism
(14 Marks)
19.
(a) Compare functional and imperative programming languages.
(7 Marks)
(b) Explain the role of monitors in concurrency.
(7 Marks)
OR
20.
(a) Explain the searching strategies used in Prolog. Why backward chaining is preferred
over forward chaining in Prolog?
(10 Marks)
(b) How does a binary semaphore differ from an ordinary semaphore?
(4 Marks)

8
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan

Module 1 (Introduction) 9 Hours

Introduction : Reasons for studying Concepts of programming

1.1 1 Hour
languages, Programming Domains
1.2 Language Evaluation Criteria (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

1.3 Language Evaluation Criteria (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

1.4 Influence on Language Design, Language Design Trade-offs 1 Hour

1.5 Implementation Methods 1 Hour

1.6 Names, Variables 1 Hour

1.7 Concept of Binding 1 Hour

1.8 Scope and Lifetime 1 Hour

1.9 Referencing Environments 1 Hour

Module 2 (Data Types, Expressions and Assignment Statements) 8 Hours

2.1 Primitive Data Types, Character String Types 1 Hour

2.2 User-Defined Ordinal Types, Array Types 1 Hour

2.3 Record Types, List Types, Pointer and Reference Types 1 Hour

Implementation of pointer and reference types, Type Checking,

2.4 1 Hour
Strong Typing, Type Equivalence
Expressions and Assignment Statements, Arithmetic
2.5 1 Hour
Expressions
2.6 Overloaded Operators, Type Conversions 1 Hour

2.7 Relational and Boolean Expressions, Short-Circuit Evaluation 1 Hour

2.8 Assignment Statements, Mixed-mode Assignment 1 Hour

Module 3 (Statement Level Control Structures, Subprograms) 8 Hours

3.1 Selection Statements, Iterative Statements 1 Hour

3.2 Unconditional Branching 1 Hour

9
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3.3 Guarded Commands 1 Hour

3.4 Subprograms: Design Issues of Subprograms 1 Hour

3.5 Local Referencing Environments 1 Hour

3.6 Parameter Passing Methods 1 Hour

3.7 Subprograms as Parameters, Overloaded Subprograms 1 Hour

3.8 Closures, Co-routines 1 Hour

Module 4 (Support for Object Oriented Programming, Exception

10 Hours
Handling, Event handling)
4.1 Inheritance 1 Hour

4.2 Dynamic Binding 1 Hour

4.3 Design Issues for Object Oriented Languages 1 Hour

4.4 Support for Object Oriented Programming in C++ 1 Hour

4.5 Implementation of Object-Oriented Constructs (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

4.6 Implementation of Object-Oriented Constructs (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

4.7 Implementation of Object-Oriented Constructs (Lecture 3) 1 Hour

4.8 Basic Concepts 1 Hour

4.9 Exception Handling - Design Issues 1 Hour

4.10 Introduction to Event Handling 1 Hour

Module 5 (Concurrency, Functional Programming Languages, Logic

10 Hours
Programming languages)
5.1 Subprogram Level Concurrency 1 Hour

5.2 Semaphores 1 Hour

5.3 Monitors 1 Hour

5.4 Message Passing 1 Hour

5.5 Introduction to LISP and Scheme (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

5.6 Introduction to LISP and Scheme (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

5.7 Comparison of Functional and Imperative Languages 1 Hour

5.8 Basic Elements of Prolog (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

10
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

5.9 Basic Elements of Prolog (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

5.10 Applications of Logic Programming 1 Hour

11
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
CODE Mathematics for Machine CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CST 284 Learning MINOR 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This is a foundational course for awarding B. Tech. Minor in Computer Science
and Engineering with specialization in Machine Learning. The purpose of this course is to
introduce mathematical foundations of basic Machine Learning concepts among learners, on which
Machine Learning systems are built. This course covers Linear Algebra, Vector Calculus, Probability
and Distributions, Optimization and Machine Learning problems. Concepts in this course help the
learners to understand the mathematical principles in Machine Learning and aid in the creation of new
Machine Learning solutions, understand & debug existing ones, and learn about the inherent
assumptions & limitations of the current methodologies.
Prerequisite:
1. A sound background in higher secondary school Mathematics.
2. Python for Machine Learning (CST 253)
Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to
Make use of the concepts, rules and results about linear equations, matrix algebra,
CO 1 vector spaces, eigenvalues & eigenvectors and orthogonality & diagonalization to
solve computational problems (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Perform calculus operations on functions of several variables and matrices,
CO 2
including partial derivatives and gradients (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Utilize the concepts, rules and results about probability, random variables, additive
& multiplicative rules, conditional probability, probability distributions and Bayes’
CO 3
theorem to find solutions of computational problems (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)
Train Machine Learning Models using unconstrained and constrained optimization
CO 4
methods (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Illustrate how the mathematical objects - linear algebra, probability, and calculus
CO 5 can be used to design machine learning algorithms (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Understand)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 √ √ √ √ √
CO 2 √ √ √ √
CO 3 √ √ √ √ √
CO 4 √ √ √ √ √ √

CO 5 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
1 2 Examination

Remember 20% 20% 20%

Understand 40% 40% 40%

Apply 40% 40% 40%

Analyse
Evaluate

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the
syllabus and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing
remaining part of the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2
questions each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module),
having 3 marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer
all questions from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out
of the 7 questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer anyone. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries
14 marks.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Syllabus

Module 1

LINEAR ALGEBRA : Systems of Linear Equations – Matrices, Solving Systems of Linear

Equations. Vector Spaces - Linear Independence, Basis and Rank, Linear Mappings, Norms,
- Inner Products - Lengths and Distances - Angles and Orthogonality - Orthonormal Basis -
Orthogonal Complement - Orthogonal Projections. Matrix Decompositions - Determinant
and Trace, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Cholesky Decomposition, Eigen decomposition
and Diagonalization, Singular Value Decomposition, Matrix Approximation.

Module 2

VECTOR CALCULUS : Differentiation of Univariate Functions - Partial Differentiation

and Gradients, Gradients of Vector Valued Functions, Gradients of Matrices, Useful
Identities for Computing Gradients. Back propagation and Automatic Differentiation - Higher
Order Derivatives- Linearization and Multivariate Taylor Series.

Module 3

Probability and Distributions : Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete and

Continuous Probabilities, Sum Rule, Product Rule, and Bayes’ Theorem. Summary Statistics
and Independence – Important Probability distributions - Conjugacy and the Exponential
Family - Change of Variables/Inverse Transform.

Module 4

Optimization : Optimization Using Gradient Descent - Gradient Descent With Momentum,

Stochastic Gradient Descent. Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers - Convex
Optimization - Linear Programming - Quadratic Programming.

Module 5

CENTRAL MACHINE LEARNING PROBLEMS : Data and Learning Model-

Empirical Risk Minimization - Parameter Estimation - Directed Graphical Models.

Linear Regression - Bayesian Linear Regression - Maximum Likelihood as Orthogonal

Projection.

Dimensionality Reduction with Principal Component Analysis - Maximum Variance

Perspective, Projection Perspective. Eigenvector Computation and Low Rank
Approximations.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Density Estimation with Gaussian Mixture Models - Gaussian Mixture Model, Parameter
Learning via Maximum Likelihood, EM Algorithm.

Classification with Support Vector Machines - Separating Hyperplanes, Primal Support

Vector Machine, Dual Support Vector Machine, Kernels.

Text book:

1.Mathematics for Machine Learning by Marc Peter Deisenroth, A. Aldo Faisal, and
Cheng Soon Ong published by Cambridge University Press (freely available at https://
mml - book.github.io)

Reference books:

1. Linear Algebra and Its Applications, 4th Edition by Gilbert Strang

2. Linear Algebra Done Right by Axler, Sheldon, 2015 published by Springer

3. Introduction to Applied Linear Algebra by Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe,

2018 published by Cambridge University Press

4. Convex Optimization by Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe, 2004 published by

Cambridge University Press

5. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning by Christopher M Bishop, 2006, published

by Springer

6. Learning with Kernels – Support Vector Machines, Regularization, Optimization, and

Beyond by Bernhard Scholkopf and Smola, Alexander J Smola, 2002, bublished by
MIT Press

7. Information Theory, Inference, and Learning Algorithms by David J. C MacKay, 2003

published by Cambridge University Press

8. Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective by Kevin P Murphy, 2012 published by

MIT Press.

9. The Nature of Statistical Learning Theory by Vladimir N Vapnik, 2000, published by

Springer
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Sample
Sample Course
Course LevelLevel Assessment
Assessment Questions.
Questions.
Sample
Sample
Sample Course
Course
Course Level Level
Level Assessment
Assessment
Assessment Questions.
Questions.
Questions.
Course
Course Outcome
Outcome 1 (CO1):
1 (CO1):
Course
Course
Course Outcome
Outcome
Outcome 1 (CO1):
1 (CO1):
1 (CO1):
1. Find the set S of all solutions in x of the following inhomogeneous linear systems Ax = b
1. Find the set S of all solutions in x of the following inhomogeneous linear systems Ax
1.
1. 1. Find
FindFind theASset
the the
whereset set
ofSSall
and of
bof all
all solutions
solutions
solutions
are defined in
inofxxthe
inasxfollows: of following
of the following
the following inhomogeneous
inhomogeneous
inhomogeneous linear
linear
linear systems
systems
systems Ax
b == bb
Ax =Ax
=where
b,
where Awhere
where AAand
and Aare
bandand b are
bbdefined
are
are defined
defined
defined as follows:
asfollows:
as follows:
as follows:

2. Determine the inverses of the following matrix if possible

2. Determine the inverses of the following matrix if possible
2.
2. 2. Determine
Determine
Determine theinverses
the inverses
the inverses offollowing
of
of the thefollowing
the following matrix
matrix
matrix ififpossible
possible
if possible

3. Are the following sets of vectors linearly independent?

3.
3. 3.3.
Are Are
Are
the
Are the
the following
following
following
the sets
following sets
sets
of
sets of
of vectors
vectors
vectors
of linearly
linearly
linearly
vectors independent?
independent?
independent?
linearly independent?

4. 4.A set
A set
of of n linearly
n linearly independent
independent vectors
vectors in R inn R n
formsforms a basis.
a basis. Does
Does thethe
set set of vectors
of vectors (2, (2, 4,−3) ,
n
4. 4.4.
A setA set
A(0,
set1,
of of n linearly
noflinearly
1)n, linearly independent
independent
independent
(0, 1,−1) vectors
vectors
vectors
form a basis 3 in R forms a basis. Does the set of vectors (2, 4,−3) ,
n n
forinRR?inExplain
R3 forms
forms a basis.
a your
basis. DoesDoes
reasons. the of
the set setvectors
of vectors (2, 4,−3)
(2, 4,−3) , ,
4,−3) , (0, 1, 1) , (0, 1,−1) form a basis for R ? Explain your reasons.
(0, 1, (0,
(0,1)1,1, 1),1,−1)
, 1)
(0, ,(0,
(0,1,−1)
1,−1) form
formform aabasis
a basisbasis
for R for
3
for?R R33??Explain
ExplainExplainyouryour your reasons.
reasons.
reasons.
5. 5.Consider the transformation T (x, y) = (x +
Consider the transformation T (x, y) = (x + y, x + 2y, 2x y, x + 2y, 2x + 3y). Obtain
+ 3y). kerker
Obtain T and useuse this to
T and
5. 5.5. this
Consider
Consider
Consider the
the
to calculate
calculate transformation
the transformation
thetransformation
the nullity.
nullity. Also (x,TTy)
TAlso
find (x,
(x,=y)
find
the y)
(x ==+(x
the (x
y, +x+ y,+y, x2y,
transformation
transformation x ++2x2y,+2x
2y,
matrix 2x
3y).+ 3y).
+for
matrix 3y). Obtain
Obtain
T. Tker
T. ker ker
forObtain TT and
and and use
use use this
this this to
to to
calculate
calculate
calculate thenullity.
nullity.
the nullity.
the Also
AlsoAlso find
findfind thetransformation
transformation
the transformation
the matrix matrix
for T.
matrix forT.
for T.

6. 6.Find
Find
the the characteristic
characteristic equation,
equation, eigenvalues,
eigenvalues, and eigenspaces
and eigenspaces corresponding
corresponding to each to each
6. 6.6. Find
Find Find the
the the
eigenvalue characteristic
characteristic equation,
equation,
characteristic eigenvalues,
eigenvalues,
equation,
of the following matrix and
and and
eigenvalues, eigenspaces
eigenspaces corresponding
corresponding
eigenspaces to each
to each
corresponding to each
eigenvalue of the following matrix
eigenvalue
eigenvalue offollowing
of the
eigenvalue of thefollowing
the following matrix
matrix
matrix

"
7. Diagonalize the following matrix, if possible
7. 7.7. Diagonalize
Diagonalize thefollowing
following
the following
Diagonalize the matrix,
matrix, ififpossible
possible
if possible
matrix,
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
7. Diagonalize the following matrix, if possible

8. Find the singular value decomposition (SVD) of the following matrix

8. 8.Find the singular

Find the value
singular value decomposition
decomposition (SVD) (SVD)
of the of the following
following matrixmatrix

"

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

Course
Course Outcome
Outcome 2 (CO2):
2 (CO2):

1. 1. For
Fora scalar
a scalar function
function f(x,f(x, x2 +3y
y, zy,) z=) x=2 +3y
2
2 +2z+2z
2
, find
2, find the the gradient
gradient andand its magnitude
its magnitude at at the
1.thepoint
For
(1, 2, -1).
a scalar
point function f(x, y, z ) = x2 +3y2 +2z2, find the gradient and its magnitude at the
(1, 2, -1).
pointthe
2. 2. Find
Find (1, maximum
2, -1). andminimum
minimumvalues
values of
of the
the function f(x, y) 2 2
the maximum and y) == 4x
4x++4y4y- x- x-2 y- ysubject
2 to
2 2
the
Findcondition
2.subject to the
the x + y and
<=
condition
maximum x2 2.
+ y2 <= 2. values of the function f(x, y) = 4x + 4y - x 2 - y2 subject to
minimum
2 2
the condition
3. 3. Suppose x +trying
y <= 2. f(x, y) y)
= x2=+ x
2y2 + 2y2. Along
Supposeyou
youwere to to
were trying minimize
minimize f(x, + 2y + 2y2. what vector
Along what vector
3.should you
should
Suppose
travel
you from (5,(5,
travel
you werefrom
12)?
trying 12)?
to minimize f(x, y) = x2+ 2y + 2y2. Along what vector
4. should you travel from (5, 12)?
4. Find thethe
second order Taylor series expansion forfor
f(x, y) y)
= (x + y)
+ y)about (0 (0
, 0).
2 2
Find second order Taylor series expansion f(x, = (x about , 0).
5.
4.Find thethe
critical points
orderofTaylor
f(x, y)series
= x expansion
3xy+5x-2y+6y +8.y) = (x + y)2 about (0 , 0).
2– 2
Find second for f(x,
5. Find the critical points of f(x, y) = x2 – 3xy+5x-2y+6y2+8.
6. Compute the gradient of the Rectified Linear Unit (ReLU) function ReLU(z) =
5. Find the critical points of f(x, y) = x2 – 3xy+5x-2y+6y2+8.
6. Compute the gradient of the Rectified Linear Unit (ReLU) function ReLU(z) = max(0 , z).
max(0 , z).
7. 6.LetCompute
LL ==||Ax
the gradient of the Rectified Linear Unit (ReLU) function ReLU(z) = max(0 , z).
||Ax- b||
- b||2,22where
, whereAAisisa amatrix
matrixand
andx xand
andb bare
arevectors.
vectors.Derive
DerivedL
dLininterms
termsofof dx.
2
7. Let
7.dx.Let L = ||Ax - b||22, where A is a matrix and x and b are vectors. Derive dL in terms of dx.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Let J and T be independent events, where P(J)=0.4 and P(T)=0.7.
i. Find P(J∩T)
1. Let J and T be independent events, where P(J)=0.4 and P(T)=0.7.
ii. Find P(J∪T)
i. Find P(J∩T)
iii. Find P(J∩T′)
ii. Find P(J∪T)
iii. Find P(J∩T′)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Let J and T be independent events, where P(J)=0.4 and P(T)=0.7.

i. Find P(J∩T)

ii. Find P(J∪T)

iii. Find P(J∩T′)

2. Let A and B be events such that P(A)=0.45 , P(B)=0.35 and P(A∪B)=0.5. Find
P(A∣B).
2. Let A and B be events such that P(A)=0.45 , P(B)=0.35 and P(A∪B)=0.5. Find P(A∣B).
3. A random variable R has the probability distribution as shown in the following table:
3. A random variable R has the probability distribution as shown in the following table:

i.
i. Given that E(R)=2.85, find a and b.
i. Given
ii. that E(R)=2.85,
Find P(R>2). find a and b.
ii. Find P(R>2).
4. A biased coin (with probability of obtaining a head equal to p > 0) is tossed repeatedly and
4. A biasedindependently
coin (with probability
until the of obtaining
first head isaobserved.
head equalCompute
to p > 0)the
is tossed repeatedly
probability that the first head
and independently
appears at anuntil
eventhenumbered
first headtoss.
is observed. Compute the probability that the
first head appears at an even numbered toss.
5. Two players A and B are competing at a trivia quiz game involving a series of questions. On
5. Two players A and B question,
are competing at a triviathat
quiz game involving a series of are p and q
any individual the probabilities A and B give the correct answer
questions. On any individual
respectively, question,with
for all questions, the outcomes
probabilities
for that A andquestions
different B give the correct
being independent. The
answer gameare p finishes
and q respectively,
when a player for wins
all questions, with outcomes
by answering a questionforcorrectly.
differentCompute the
questions being independent.
probability that A winsThe if game finishes when a player wins by answering a
i. A answers
question correctly. Compute thethe
first question, that A wins if
probability
ii. B answers the first question.
i. A answers the first question,
6. A coin for which P(heads) = p is tossed until two successive tails are obtained. Find the
ii. Bprobability
answers the first
that thequestion.
experiment is completed on the nth toss.
6. A coin for which P(heads) = p is tossed until two successive tails are obtained. Find
7. You roll a fair dice twice. Let the random variable X be the product of the outcomes of the
the probability that the experiment is completed on the nth toss.
two rolls. What is the probability mass function of X? What are the expected value and the
7. You rollstandard
a fair dice twice. Let the random variable X be the product of the outcomes of
deviation of X?
the two rolls. What is the probability mass function of X? What are the expected value
and 8. While watching
the standard deviationaofgameX? of Cricket, you observe someone who is clearly supporting
Mumbai Indians. What is the probability that they were actually born within 25KM of
Mumbai? Assume that:
• the probability that a randomly selected person is born within 25KM of Mumbai is
1/20;
• the chance that a person born within 25KMs of Mumbai actually supports MI is
7/10 ;
• the probability that a person not born within 25KM of Mumbai supports MI with
probability 1/10.

9. What is an exponential family? Why are exponential families useful?

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
8. While watching a game of Cricket, you observe someone who is clearly supporting
Mumbai Indians. What is the probability that they were actually born within 25KM of
Mumbai? Assume that:
• the probability that a randomly selected person is born within 25KM of
Mumbai is 1/20;
• the chance that a person born within 25KMs of Mumbai actually supports MI
is 7/10 ;
• the probability that a person not born within 25KM of Mumbai supports MI
with probability 1/10.
9. What is an exponential family? Why are exponential families useful?
10. Let Z1 and Z2 be independent random variables each having the standard normal
distribution. Define the random variables X and Y by X = Z1 + 3Z2 and Y = Z1 + Z2.
Argue that the joint distribution of (X, Y) is a bivariate normal distribution. What are
the parameters of this distribution?
11. Given a continuous random variable x, with cumulative distribution function Fx(x),
show that the random variable y = Fx(x) is uniformly distributed.
12. Explain Normal distribution, Binomial distribution and Poisson distribution in the
exponential family form.

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. Find the extrema of f(x, y) = x subject to g(x, y) = x2 + 2y2 = 3.

2. Maximize the function f(x, y, z) = xy + yz + xz on the unit sphere g(x, y, z) = x2 + y2 +
z2 = 1.
3. Provide necessary and suffcient conditions under which a quadratic optimization
problem be written as a linear least squares problem.
4. Consider the univariate function f(x) = x3 + 6x2 - 3x - 5. Find its stationary points and
indicate whether they are maximum, minimum, or saddle points.
5. Consider the update equation for stochastic gradient descent. Write down the update
when we use a mini-batch size of one.
 indicate whether
indicate whether they
they are
are maximum,
maximum, minimum,
minimum, or
or saddle
saddle points.
points.

5. Consider
5. Consider the
the update
update equation
equation for
for stochastic
stochastic gradient
gradient descent.
descent. Write
Write down
down the
the update
update when
when
we use
we use aa mini-batch
mini-batch size
size of
of one.
one.
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
6. Consider
6.
6. Consider the
Consider the function
the function
function

"

i. Is f(x) a convex function? Justify your answer.

i.i. Is f(x)
Is f(x) aa convex
convex function?
function? Justify
Justify your
your answer.
answer.
ii.
ii. Is (1
Is (1 ,, -1)
-1) aa local/global
local/global minimum?
minimum? Justify
Justify your
your answer.
answer.
2 2
7. Is the
7. Is the function
function f(x,
f(x, y)
y) == 2x
2x22++yy22++6xy
6xy--xx++3y
3y- -77convex,
convex,concave,
concave,ororneither?
neither?Justify
Justify your
your
answer.answer.
8.
8. Consider
Consider the
the following
following convex
convex optimization
optimization problem
problem

"

Subject to the constraint x + y >= 4, x, y >= 1.

Subject to the constraint x + y >= 4, x, y >= 1.
Derive an
Derive an explicit
explicit form
form of
of the
the Lagrangian
Lagrangian dual
dual problem.
problem.

9. 9.
Solve the following
Solve LP problem
the following withwith
LP problem the simplex method.
the simplex method.
9. Solve the following LP problem with the simplex method.

"
subject
subject to toto constraints
the the constraints
subject the constraints

Course
Course Outcome
Outcome 5 (CO5):
5 (CO5):
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. What is a loss function? Give examples.
1. What is a loss function? Give examples.
2.1. What is
area loss
training/validation/test sets? What is cross-validation? Name one or two
function? Give examples.
2. What areoftraining/validation/test
examples sets? What is cross-validation? Name one or two examples
cross-validation methods.
2. What are training/validation/test sets? What is cross-validation? Name one or two examples
of cross-validation methods.
3. of cross-validation
Explain methods.
generalization, overfitting, model selection, kernel trick, Bayesian learning
3. Explain generalization, overfitting, model selection, kernel trick, Bayesian learning
3. Explain generalization, overfitting, model selection, kernel trick, Bayesian learning
4. Distinguish between Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE) and Maximum A Posteriori
4. Distinguish between Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE) and Maximum A Posteriori
Estimation (MAP)?
Estimation (MAP)?
5. What is the link between structural risk minimization and regularization?
5. What is the link between structural risk minimization and regularization?
6. What is a kernel? What is a dot product? Give examples of kernels that are valid dot
6. What is a kernel? What is a dot product? Give examples of kernels that are valid dot
products.
products.
 Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What is a loss function? Give examples.COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4.2. Distinguish
What are training/validation/test
between Maximum sets? What isEstimation
Likelihood cross-validation?
(MLE) Name one or two A
and Maximum examples
of cross-validation
Posteriori Estimationmethods.
(MAP)?
5.3. What
Explain generalization,
is the link between overfitting, model
structural risk selection, and
minimization kernel trick, Bayesian learning
regularization?
6.4. What
Distinguish between
is a kernel? WhatMaximum Likelihood
is a dot product? GiveEstimation
examples (MLE) andthat
of kernels Maximum
are validAdot
Posteriori
Estimation (MAP)?
products.
7.5. What
Whatisisridge
the link between How
regression? structural risktrain
can one minimization and regularization?
a ridge regression linear model?
8.6. What
What isis Principal
a kernel?Component
What is a Analysis
dot product?
(PCA)?GiveWhich
examples
eigenof value
kernels that arethevalid dot
indicates
products.of largest variance? In what sense is the representation obtained from a
direction
7. projection
What is ridge ontoregression?
the eigenHow can onecorresponding
directions train a ridge regression
the the linear
largestmodel?
eigen values
optimal for data reconstruction?
8. What is Principal Component Analysis (PCA)? Which eigen value indicates the direction of
largest variance?
9. Suppose that you In what
have sense is
a linear the representation
support vector machine obtained
(SVM) from a projection
binary classifier.onto the
eigen directions
Consider a pointcorresponding the the
that is currently largest eigen
classified valuesand
correctly, optimal
is farforaway
data reconstruction?
from the
9. decision
Supposeboundary. If you
that you have remove
a linear the point
support vectorfrom the training
machine (SVM) set, andclassifier.
binary re-train the
Consider a
classifier, will the decision boundary change or stay the same? Explain your answer
point that is currently classified correctly, and is far away from the decision boundary. If you
inremove
one sentence.
the point from the training set, and re-train the classifier, will the decision boundary
change or stay the same? Explain your answer in one sentence.
10. Suppose you have n independent and identically distributed (i.i.d) sample data points
10. xSuppose
1, ... , xnyou havedata
. These n independent
points come andfrom
identically distributed
a distribution (i.i.d)
where thesample of a x1, ... ,
data points
probability
xn. These
given data points
datapoint x is come from a distribution where the probability of a given datapoint x is

"

Prove that the MLE estimate of parameter is the sample mean.

11. Suppose the data set y1,...,yn is a drawn from a random sample consisting of i.i.d.
discrete uniform distributions with range 1 to N. Find the maximum likelihood
estimate of N.
12. Ram has two coins: one fair coin and one biased coin which lands heads with
probability 3/4. He picks one coin at random (50-50) and flips it repeatedly until he
gets a tails. Given that he observes 3 heads before the first tails, find the posterior
probability that he picked each coin.

i. What are the prior and posterior odds for the fair coin?

ii. What are the prior and posterior predictive probabilities of heads on the next
flip? Here prior predictive means prior to considering the data of the first four
flips.
 uniform distributions with range 1 to N. Find the maximum likelihood estimate of N.
12. Ram has two coins: one fair coin and one biased coin which lands heads with probability
3/4. He picks one coin at random (50-50) and flips it repeatedly until he gets a tails. Given
that he observes 3 heads before the first tails, find the posterior probability that he picked
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
each coin.
i. What are the prior and posterior odds for the fair coin?
ii. What are the prior and posterior predictive probabilities of heads on the next flip?
Here prior predictiveModel
means Question paper the data of the first four flips.
prior to considering
QP Code : Total Pages: 4
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
Model Question paper
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
IV SEMESTER
QP Code : B.TECH (MINOR) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH andPages:
Total YEAR4
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
Course Code: CST 284
APJ
Course ABDUL
Name: KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL
MATHEMATICS FOR MACHINE UNIVERSITY
LEARNING
IV SEMESTER B.TECH (HONOURS) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH and YEAR
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
Course Code: CST 274
Course Name: COMPUTATIONAL FUNDAMENTALS PART A FOR MACHINE LEARNING
Max. Marks: 100 Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks. Marks
Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
1 Show that withAnswer
the usual operation each
all questions, of scalar multiplication
carries 3 marks. but with Marks
1 Show that on
addition with the given
reals usual by
operation
x # y = of
2(xscalar
+ y) ismultiplication but with addition on
not a vector space.
reals given by x # y = 2(x + y) is not a vector space.
2 Find the eigenvalues of the following matrix in terms of k. Can you find
2 Find the eigenvalues of the following matrix in terms of k. Can you find an
an eigenvector corresponding to each of the eigenvalues?
eigenvector corresponding to each of the eigenvalues?

3 Let f(x, y, z) = xyer, where r = x2+z2-5. Calculate the gradient of f at the

3 Let f(x, y, z) = xyer, where r = x2+z2-5. Calculate the gradient of f at the point
(1,point
3, -2).(1, 3, -2).
4 Compute the Taylor polynomials Tn, n = 0 , ... , 5 of f(x) = sin(x) + cos(x) at
4 x0 Compute
= 0. the Taylor polynomials Tn, n = 0 , ... , 5 of f(x) = sin(x) + cos(x)
5 LetatXxbe a continuous random variable with probability density function on
0 = 0.
0 <= x <= 1 defined by f(x) = 3x2. Find the pdf of Y = X2.
65 Let that
Show X beifatwocontinuous
events A random variable
and B are with probability
independent, then A anddensity function
B' are independent.
7 Explain the principle of the gradient descent algorithm.
on 0 <= x <= 1 defined by f(x) = 3x2. Find the pdf of Y = X2.
6 Show that if two events A and B are independent, then A and B' are
independent.
7 Explain the principle of the gradient descent algorithm.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
8 Briey explain the difference between (batch) gradient descent and
stochastic gradient descent. Give an example of when you might prefer

8
one over the other.
Briey explain the difference between (batch) gradient descent and stochastic
8 Briey explain the difference between (batch) gradient descent and stochastic
9 What isdescent.
gradient the empirical
Give an risk? What of
example is “empirical risk minimization”?
when you might prefer one over the other.
910gradient descent.
What Give
is thethe an
empirical example
risk? of
Whatwhen you might
is “empirical prefer
risk one over the other.
minimization”?
9 What is Explain
the empirical concept
risk? of ais
What Kernel function
“empirical risk in Support
minimization”? Vector Machines.
10 Explain the concept of a Kernel function in Support Vector Machines. Why are
10 Explain Why
the concept of aso
are kernels Kernel
useful?function in Supporta Vector
What properties kernel Machines. Why
should posses to are
be
kernels so useful? What properties a kernel should posses to be used in an SVM?
kernels so
useduseful?
in an What
SVM?properties a kernel should posses to be used in an SVM?
PART B
PART
Answer any one Question from each B module. Each question carries 14 Marks
11 a)Answer i. any one
Find allQuestion
solutionsfrom PART
to theeach B linear
module.
system of Each question carries 14 Marks
equations (6)
11 a) i. Answer
Find all any
solutions to the system of linear equations
one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks (6)

11 a) i. Find all solutions to the system of linear equations (6)

ii. Prove that" all

ii. Prove that all
ii.vectors
Prove orthogonal −3, 1]T forms
to [2,orthogonal
that all vectors to a −3,
[2, subspace
1] T forms
3
W ofaRsubspace
. What is dim
T 3
vectors(W)
orthogonal
and why?
to [2, −3, 1] forms a subspace W of R . What is dim
W of R3. What is dim (W) and why?
(W) and why?
b) Use Usethethe
Gramm-Schmidt
Gramm-Schmidt process to find
process an orthogonal
to find basis for
an orthogonal the for
basis column
the space
(8) (8)
b) Use theofGramm-Schmidt
the following process
matrix to find an orthogonal basis for the column space (8)
column space of the following matrix
of the following matrix

"
OR
12 a) i. Let L be the line through the OR 2
ORorigin in R that is parallel to the vector (6)
12 a) i. Let L be 4]Tline
[3,the . Find the standard
through matrix
the origin in Rof
2 the orthogonal projection onto L. Also
that is parallel to the vector (6)
T
[3, 4] find
. Find
thethe standard
point matrixisofclosest
on L which the orthogonal projection
to the point onto
(7 , 1) and findL.the
Also
point on
find theL point
whichonis Lclosest
whichtoisthe
closest
pointto(-3
the, 5).
point (7 , 1) and find the point on
ii. Find
L which the rank-1
is closest approximation
to the point (-3 , 5).of
ii. Find the rank-1 approximation of

b) i. Find an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)

b) i. Find an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
12 a) i. Let L be the line through the origin in R2 that is parallel to the (6)
vector OR
12 a) i. Let L be the line through the origin in R2 that is parallel to the vector (6)
[3,4]4]T.T.Find
[3, Findthe
thestandard
standardmatrix
matrixofofthe
theorthogonal
orthogonalprojection
projectiononto
ontoL. Also
L. Also
find find the
the point on Lpoint
whichonisL closest
which is
to closest to (7
the point the, 1)
point
and(7find
, 1)the
and
point on
Lfind
which
theispoint
closest to which
on L the point (-3 , 5).to the point (-3 , 5).
is closest
ii. Find the rank-1 approximation of
ii. Find the rank-1 approximation of

"

b) i. Find an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)

following matrix
b) following
i. Find matrix
an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)

ii. Find a 3 × 3 orthogonal "

ii. Find
matrix S anda a33××33orthogonal matrix
diagonal matrix D Ssuch
andthat
a 3A×=3SDS
diagonal
T
. matrix D
such that A = SDST .
13 a) A skier is on a mountain with equation z = 100 – 0.4x2 – 0.3y2, where z denotes (8)
13 height.
a) A skier is on a mountain with equation z = 100 – 0.4x2 – 0.3y2, where z (8)
denotes height.
i. The skier is located at the point with xy-coordinates (1 , 1), and wants to
skii.downhill along
The skier is the steepest
located at thepossible path. xy-coordinates
point with In which direction(1 ,(indicated
1), and
by a vector (a , b) in the xy-plane) should the skier begin
wants to ski downhill along the steepest possible path. In whichskiing.
direction (indicated by a vector (a , b) in the xy-plane) should the
ii. The skier begins skiing in the direction given by the xy-vector (a , b) you
found skier begin
in part (i), skiing.
so the skier heads in a direction in space given by the
vector (a , b , c). Find the value of c.
ii. The skier begins skiing in the direction given by the xy-vector (a ,
b) b) linear
Find the you found in part (i),tosothe
approximation thefunction
skier heads
f(x,y)in=a2direction
- sin(-x -in3y)space
at the (6)
given
point (0 , π),by
andthethen
vector
use (a , b answer
your , c). Find
to the value f(0.001
estimate of c. , π).
b) Find the linear approximation to the function f(x,y) = 2 - sin(-x - (6)
3y) at the point (0 , π),OR
and then use your answer to estimate
14 a) Let g be the function given by (8)
f(0.001 , π).

OR
 OR
14 a) Let g be the function given by (8)

COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

14 a) Let g be the function given by (8)

"
i. Calculate the partial derivatives of g at (0 , 0).
i. Calculate the partial derivatives of g at (0 , 0).
ii.
ii. Show
Showthatthatggisisnot
notdifferentiable
differentiableatat(0
(0,,0).
0).
b) Find the second order Taylor series expansion for f(x,y) = e-(x2+y2) cos(xy) about (0 , (6)
b) Find the second order Taylor series expansion for f(x,y) = e-(x2+y2) cos(xy) (6)
0).
aboutare
15 a) There (0 ,two
0). bags. The first bag contains four mangos and two apples; the second (6)
15 a) There
bag are twofour
contains bags. The first
mangos andbag
fourcontains
apples. four mangos
We also haveand two apples;
a biased (6)
coin, which
the second
shows bagwith
“heads” contains four mangos
probability 0.6 andand fourwith
“tails” apples. We also0.4.
probability haveIf athe coin
biased coin, which shows “heads” with probability 0.6 and “tails” with
probability 0.4. If the coin shows “heads”. we pick a fruit at

showsrandom
“heads”.from bag 1;
we pick otherwise
a fruit at we pick a fruit at random from bag 2. Your
random fromflips
friend bag the
1; otherwise
coin (youwe pick see
cannot a fruit
theatresult),
random froma bag
picks fruit2.atYour friend
random
flips the coin (you cannot see the result), picks a fruit at random from the
from the corresponding bag, and presents you a mango.
corresponding bag, and presents you a mango.
What What
is the is the probability
probability that
that the the mango
mango was picked
was picked from2?bag 2?
from bag
b) b)
Suppose that one
Suppose thathasone
written
has awritten
computer program that
a computer sometimes
program compiles and (8)(8)
that sometimes
sometimes notand
compiles (code does not
sometimes change).
not (code doesYou decide toYou
not change). model
decidethe apparent
to model
stochasticity (success vs. no success) x of the compiler using a Bernoulli
the apparent stochasticity (success vs. no success) x of the compiler using
distribution with parameter μ:
a Bernoulli distribution with parameter μ:

"
Choose a conjugate prior for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the posterior
Choose a conjugate prior for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the
distribution p( μ | x1 , ... , xN).
posterior distribution p( μ | x1 , ... OR
, xN).

OR
16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)

i. Compute the marginal distributions for each dimension.

ii. Compute the mean, mode and median for each marginal distribution.
iii. Compute the mean and mode for the two-dimensional distribution.

b) Express the Binomial distribution as an exponential family distribution. Also (6)

express the Beta distribution is an exponential family distribution. Show that the
 Choose a conjugate
distribution prior μ:
with parameter for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the posterior
distribution p( μ | x1 , ... , xN).
OR
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Choose a conjugate prior for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the posterior
16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)
16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)
distribution p( μ | x1 , ... , xN).
OR

16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)

"

i. i.Compute
Compute the the marginal
marginal distributions
distributions for for
eacheach dimension.
dimension.
ii. ii.
Compute
Compute the mean, mode and
the mean, modemedian
andformedian
each marginal
for eachdistribution.
marginal
iii. Compute the mean and mode for the two-dimensional distribution.
distribution.
i. Compute
b) Express the marginal distributions for each dimension.
iii.the Binomial
Compute the distribution
mean and mode as an
for exponential family distribution.
the two-dimensional distribution. Also (6)
ii. Compute the mean, mode and median for each marginal distribution.
express the Betathedistribution
iii. Compute mean and mode is an for
exponential family distribution.
the two-dimensional Show that the
distribution.
product of the Beta and the Binomial distribution is also a member of the
b) b)Express
Express the Binomial
the Binomial distribution
distribution as anas exponential
an exponential family
family distribution.
distribution. Also (6)(6)
exponential family.
FindAlso
17 a) express the express
theextrema thef(x,y,z)
of Beta distribution
Beta distribution =isxan is an exponential
- yexponential
+ z subject family =family
x2 + y2 distribution.
distribution.
to g(x,y,z) +Show that the
z2 = 2. (8)
b) product
Let Show of that
the the
Betaproduct
and theof the Beta and
Binomial the Binomial
distribution distribution
is also a member is also
of athe (6)

exponential
memberfamily.
of the exponential family.
17 a) Find the extrema of f(x,y,z) = x - y + z subject to g(x,y,z) = x2 + y2 + z2 = 2. (8)
17b) a)Let Find the extrema of f(x,y,z) = x - y + z subject to g(x,y,z) = x2 + y2 + z2 = (8)(6)
2.
b) Let

Show
" that x* = (1 , 1/2 , -1) is optimal for the optimization problem
Show that x* = (1 , 1/2 , -1) is optimal for the optimization problem

(6)
OR
18 a) Derive the gradient descent trainingOR
rule assuming that the target function (8)
18 a) Derive the gradient descent training rule assuming that the target function is (8)
is represented as od = w0 + w1x1 + ... + wnxn. Define explicitly the cost/
represented as od = w0 + w1x1 + ... + wnxn. Define explicitly the cost/error function
error function E, assuming that a set of training examples D is provided,
E, assuming that a set of training examples D is provided, where each training
where each training example d ∈ D is associated with the target output td.
example d ∈ D is associated with the target output td.

b) Find the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = 3 and (6)
x,y,z >= 0.
19 a) Consider the following probability distribution (7)
18 a) Derive the gradient
represented as od = wdescent
0 + w1x1 training
+ ... + wnrule assuming
xn. Define that the
explicitly target function
the cost/error is (8)
function
represented od =a wset
E, assumingasthat 0 +of
w1training
x1 + ... +examples
wnxn. Define
D isexplicitly
provided,thewhere
cost/error
each function
training
E, assuming
example d ∈ that
D is aassociated
set of training examples
with the D is tprovided,
target output d. where each training
COMPUTER
example d ∈ D is associated with the target output td. SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
b) Find the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = 3 and (6)
b) Find the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = (6)
b) Find
x,y,z the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = 3 and (6)
>= 0.
19 a) x,y,z 3
Considerand x,y,z >= 0.
>= 0.the following probability distribution (7)
19 19
a) a)Consider the following
Consider probability
the following distribution
probability distribution (7) (7)

where θ is a parameter and x is a positive real number. Suppose you get m i.i.d.
where
where
samples is a parameter
θ isxi aθdrawn
parameter and
andthis
from xaispositive
a positive
x isdistribution. real
real number.
number.
Compute Suppose
Suppose
the you
maximumyou getmmi.i.d.
get
likelihood
samples
i.i.d.xfor
estimator drawn
isamples xfrom
θ based thisfrom
drawn
i on these distribution. ComputeCompute
this distribution.
samples. the maximum likelihood
the maximum
estimator for θ based
likelihood on these
estimator for θsamples.
based on these samples.
b) b)Consider the following
Consider Bayesian
the following network
Bayesian with with
network boolean variables.
boolean variables. (7) (7)
b) Consider the following Bayesian network with boolean variables. (7)

i. List variable(s) conditionally independent of X33 given X11 and X12

ii. List variable(s) conditionally independent of X33 and X22
iii. Write the joint probability P(X11, X12, X13, X21, X22, X31, X32, X33)
factored according to the Bayes net. How many parameters are
necessary to define the conditional probability distributions for
this Bayesian network?
iv. Write an expression for P(X13 = 0,X22 = 1,X33 = 0) in terms of the
conditional probability distributions given in your answer to part
(iii). Justify your answer.

OR
 Justify your answer.

OR
20 a) Consider the following one dimensional COMPUTER
training data set,SCIENCE
’x’ denotes AND
negative (6)
ENGINEERING
examples and ’o’ positive examples. The exact data points and their labels are
20 a) Consider the following one dimensional training data set, ’x’ denotes (6)
given in the table below. Suppose a SVM is used to classify this data.
negative examples and ’o’ positive examples. The exact data points and
their labels are given in the table below. Suppose a SVM is used to
classify this data.

"
i. Indicate which arewhich
i. Indicate the support vectors
are the andvectors
support mark theand
decision
mark boundary.
the decision
ii. Give the value of the cost function and the model parameter after training.
b) Supposeboundary.
that we are fitting a Gaussian mixture model for data items (8)
consisting of athe
ii. Give single
valuereal value,
of the costx,function
using K and
= 2 components. We haveafter
the model parameter N=
5 training cases, in which the values of x are as 5, 15, 25, 30, 40. Using the
training.
EM algorithm to find the maximum likeihood estimates for the model
parameters, what are the mixing proportions for the two components, π1
and π2, and the means for the two components, μ1 and μ2. The standard
deviations for the two components are fixed at 10.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
b) Suppose that we are fitting a Gaussian mixture model for data (8)
items consisting of a single real value, x, using K = 2 components.
We have N = 5 training cases, in which the values of x are as 5,
15, 25, 30, 40. Using the EM algorithm to find the maximum
likeihood estimates for the model parameters, what are the mixing
proportions for the two components, π1 and π2, and the means for
the two components, µ1 and µ2. The standard deviations for the
two components are fixed at 10.
Suppose that at some point in the EM algorithm, the E step found
Suppose that at some point in the EM algorithm, the E step found that the
that the responsibilities of the two components for the five data
responsibilities of the two components for the five data items were as
items were as follows:
follows:

"
What values for the parameters π1, π2 , µ1, and µ2 will be found in
What
the nextvalues forofthe
M step algorithm?π1, π2 , μ1, and μ2 will be found in the next
theparameters
M step of the algorithm? ****
****
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan
No. of
Lectures
No Topic
(45)

1 Module-I (LINEAR ALGEBRA) 8

1. Systems of Linear Equations – Matrices, Solving Systems of Linear
1
Equations. Vector Spaces - Linear Independence.
2. Vector Spaces - Basis and Rank 1
3. Linear Mappings 1

4. Norms, Inner Products, Lengths and Distances, Angles and

1
Orthogonality, Orthonormal Basis, Orthogonal Complement
5. Orthogonal Projections, Matrix Decompositions, Determinant and 1
Trace.
6. Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 1

7. Cholesky Decomposition, Eigen decomposition and Diagonalization 1

8. Singular Value Decomposition - Matrix Approximation 1
Module-II (VECTOR CALCULUS) 6

1 Differentiation of Univariate Functions, Partial Differentiation and 1

Gradients

2 Gradients of Vector Valued Functions, Gradients of Matrices 1

3 Useful Identities for Computing Gradients 1

4 Backpropagation and Automatic Differentiation 1

5 Higher Order Derivatives 1

6 Linearization and Multivariate Taylor Series 1

3 Module-III (Probability and Distributions) 10

1 Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete and Continuous 1
Probabilities (Lecture 1)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
2 Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete and Continuous 1
Probabilities (Lecture 2)
3 Sum Rule, Product Rule 1
4 Bayes’ Theorem 1
5 Summary Statistics and Independence 1
6 Important probability Distributions (Lecture 1) 1
7 Important probability Distributions (Lecture 2) 1
8 Conjugacy and the Exponential Family (Lecture 1) 1
9 Conjugacy and the Exponential Family (Lecture 2) 1
10 Change of Variables/Inverse Transform 1
4 Module-IV (Optimization) 7
1 Optimization Using Gradient Descent. 1
2 Gradient Descent With Momentum, Stochastic Gradient Descent 1
3 Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers (Lecture 1) 1
4 Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers (Lecture 2) 1
5 Convex Optimization 1
6. Linear Programming 1

7. Quadratic Programming 1
5 Module-V (CENTRAL MACHINE LEARNING PROBLEMS) 14

1. Data and Learning models - Empirical Risk Minimization, 1

2. Parameter Estimation 1

3. Directed Graphical Models 1

4. Linear Regression 1

5. Bayesian Linear Regression 1

6. Maximum Likelihood as Orthogonal Projection 1

7. Dimensionality Reduction with Principal Component Analysis - 1

Maximum Variance Perspective, Projection Perspective.
8. Eigenvector Computation and Low Rank Approximations 1

9. Density Estimation with Gaussian Mixture Models 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
10. Parameter Learning via Maximum Likelihood 1
11. EM Algorithm 1

12. Classification with Support Vector Machines - Separating 1

Hyperplanes
13. Primal Support Vector Machines, Dual Support Vector Machines 1

14. Kernels 1

*Assignments may include applications of the above theory. With respect to module V,
programming assignments may be given.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

INTRODUCTION TO Year of
CST Category L T P Credit
COMPUTER Introduction
286
NETWORKS MINOR 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is the second course for awarding B. Tech. Minor in Computer Science and
Engineering with specialization in Networking. Study of this course provides the learners a
clear understanding of how computer networks from local area networks to the massive and
global Internet are built and how they allow the usage of computers to share information and
communicate with one another. This course covers the layers of OSI Reference models and
inter-networking. This course helps the learners to compare and analyze the existing network
technologies and to choose a suitable network design for a given system.

Prerequisite: Data Communication (CST 255)

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the features of computer networks, protocols and network design

CO 1 models (Cognitive Knowledge : Understand)

Discuss the design issues of data link layer, data link layer protocols, bridges
CO 2 and switches (Cognitive Knowledge : Understand)

Illustrate wired LAN protocols (IEEE 802.3/4/5) and wireless LAN protocols
CO 3 (IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, 802.15) (Cognitive Knowledge : Understand)

Select appropriate routing algorithms, congestion control techniques and

CO 4 Quality of Service requirements for a network (Cognitive Knowledge :
Apply)

Illustrate the functions and protocols of network layer, transport layer and
CO 5 application layer in inter-networking (Cognitive Knowledge : Understand)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 ! ! ! !

CO2 ! ! ! ! !

CO3 ! ! ! ! !

CO4 ! ! ! !

CO5 ! ! ! ! ! !

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern
End Semester
Test 1 (Marks Test 2 (Marks
Bloom’s Category Examination (Marks in
in percentage) in percentage)
percentage)
Remember 40 30 30

Understand 60 50 50
Apply 20 20

Analyse
Evaluate

Create
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mark Distribution
Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration
150 50 100 3

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks
Continuous Assessment Test : 25 marks
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks. First series test shall
be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and the second series test
shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of the syllabus. There will be two
parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly completed module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A.
Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1
question from the partly completed module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions, a
student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B
contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each
question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

Syllabus

Module 1

Introduction – Uses of Computer Networks, Network Hardware, Network Software, Reference

Models – The OSI Reference Model, The TCP/IP Reference Model, Comparison of OSI and
TCP/IP Reference models.
Module 2

The Data Link Layer - Data Link layer Design Issues, Error Detection and Correction,
Elementary Data Link Protocols, Sliding Window Protocols, HDLC (High-Level Data Link
Control) Protocol. The Medium Access Control (MAC) Sub layer – The Channel Allocation
Problem, Multiple Access Protocols, Ethernet, Wireless LANs - 802.11 a/b/g/n, Bridges &
Switches.
Module 3
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Network Layer Design Issues. Routing Algorithms - The Optimality Principle, Shortest path
routing, Flooding, Distance Vector Routing, Link State Routing, Multicast Routing, Routing for
Mobile Hosts. Congestion Control Algorithms, Quality of Service (QoS) - Requirements,
Techniques for Achieving Good QoS.

Module 4

Network Layer in Internet – The IP Protocol, IP Addresses, Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP), Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP),
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Open Shortest
Path First (OSPF) Protocol, Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Internet Multicasting, IPv6,
ICMPv6.

Module 5

Transport Layer – The Transport Service – Services Provided to the Upper Layers, Transport
Service Primitives. The User Datagram Protocol (UDP), Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) –
Overview of TCP, TCP Segment Header, Connection Establishment & Release, Connection
Management Modeling, TCP Retransmission Policy, TCP Congestion Control.

Application Layer – File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Domain Name System (DNS), Electronic
mail, MIME, Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), World Wide Web – Architectural
Overview.

Text Book
Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 4/e, PHI (Prentice Hall India).
Reference Books
1. Behrouz A Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, 4/e, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Larry L Peterson and Bruce S Dave, Computer Networks – A Systems Approach, 5/e,
Morgan Kaufmann.
3. Fred Halsall, Computer Networking and the Internet, 5/e.
4. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach, 6/e.
5. Keshav, An Engineering Approach to Computer Networks, Addison Wesley, 1998.
6. W. Richard Stevens. TCP/IP Illustrated volume 1, Addison-Wesley, 2005.
7. William Stallings, Computer Networking with Internet Protocols, Prentice-Hall, 2004.
8. Request for Comments (RFC) Pages - IETF -https://www.ietf.org/rfc.html

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

CourseOutcome1 (CO1): Compare TCP/IP Reference model and OSI Reference model.
CourseOutcome2 (CO2): Distinguish between switches and bridges.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

CourseOutcome3 (CO3): Draw and explain the frame format for Ethernet.
CourseOutcome5 (CO4): Discuss remedies for count to infinity problem in routing.
CourseOutcome4 (CO5): Subnet the Class C IP Address 206.16.2.0 so that you have 30
subnets. What is the subnet mask for the maximum number of hosts? How many hosts can
each subnet have?

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: ___

Reg No:_______________
Name:_________________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE (MINOR) EXAMINATION, MONTH &
YEAR

Course Code: CST 286

Course name : INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER NETWORKS

Max Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART-A

(Answer All Questions. Each question carries 3 marks)

1. Why Layered Architecture is used in Computer Networks? Define the terms protocol and
interface?
2. What are the different service primitives in Computer Networks?
3. Draw and explain Ethernet frame format.
4. What is the output string when the bit string 0111101111101111110 is subjected to bit
stuffing?
5. Discuss the count to infinity problem in routing.
6. What is flooding? Describe any two situations where flooding is advantageous.
7. What is IP (Internet Protocol) subnetting? Illustrate with example.
8. How many octets does the smallest possible IPv6 (IP version 6) datagram contain?
9. Can TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) be used directly over a network (e.g. an
Ethernet) without using IP? Justify your answer
10. What is the role of SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)?
(10x3=30)

Part B
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

(Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks)

Module I

11. (a) With a neat diagram, explain the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) reference
Model. (8)
(b) Compare OSI Reference model and the TCP/IP model (6)

OR
12. (a) Consider two networks providing reliable connection-oriented service. One of them
offers a reliable byte stream and the other offers a reliable message stream. Are they
identical? Justify your answer. (8)
(b) Compare LAN (Local Area Networks), MAN (Metropolitan Area Networks) and
WAN (Wide Area Networks). (6)

Module II

13. (a) Discuss the different strategies used to avoid collisions in CSMA/CA (Carrier Sense
Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance) . (8)
(b) Briefly explain the working of HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control). (6)

OR

14. (a) Explain the working of IEEE 802.11. (10)

(b) Distinguish between Bridges and Switches. (4)

Module III

15. (a) Illustrate Distance Vector Routing Algorithm with an example. (8)
(b) Explain the characteristics of RIP (Routing Information Protocol). (6)

OR

16. (a) Explain an Interior Gateway protocol that uses a link state algorithm to propagate
routing information. (6)
(b) Explain how routing is performed in a Mobile network. (8)

Module IV
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

17. (a) Explain address resolution problem and RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol)
with an example network. (10)
(b) How IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) supports internet multicasting?
Explain. (4)

OR
18. (a) Subnet the class C IP address 195.1.1.0 so that you have 10 subnets with a maximum
of 12 hosts in each subnet. (6)
(b) Draw IPv6 Datagram format and explain its features (8)

Module V

19. (a) Distinguish between TCP and UDP (User Datagram Protocol) header formats. (8)
(b) Explain the principal DNS (Domain Name System) resource record types for IPv4. (6)
OR
20. (a) What is the role of SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) in E-mail? (6)
(b) With the help of a basic model explain the working of WWW (World Wide Web). (8)

Teaching Plan

Module 1 (8 Hours)

1.1 Introduction – Uses of Computer Networks. 1

1.2 Network Hardware – Local Area Networks (LAN), 1

Metropolitan Area Networks (MAN), Wide Area Networks
(WAN).
1.3 Network Hardware – Wireless Networks, Home Networks, 1
Internetworks

1.4 Network Software –– Protocol Hierarchies. 1

1.5 Network Software –– Design issues for the layers. 1

1.6 Network Software – Connection Oriented and Connectionless 1

Services, Service Primitives, Relationship of Services to
Protocols.
1.7 Reference Models – The OSI Reference Model 1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

1.8 Reference Models – The TCP/IP Reference Model, Comparison 1

of OSI and TCP/IP Reference models
Module 2 (11 Hours)

2.1 Data Link layer Design Issues. 1

2.2 Error Detection and Correction - Error Correcting Codes 1

2.3 Error Detection and Correction - Error Detecting Codes 1

2.4 Elementary Data link Protocols. 1

2.5 Sliding Window Protocols. 1

2.6 HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) Protocol 1

2.7 The Medium Access Control (MAC) Sub layer – The Channel 1
Allocation Problem, Multiple Access Protocols.
2.8 Ethernet - Ethernet Cabling, Manchester Encoding, The 1
Ethernet MAC Sub layer Protocol, The Binary Exponential
Backoff Algorithm.
2.9 Ethernet - Ethernet Performance, Switched Ethernet, Fast 1
Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, IEEE 802.2: Logical Link Control.
2.10 Wireless LANs - 802.11 a/b/g/n. 1

2.11 Bridges & Switches. 1

Module 3 (9 Hours)

3.1 Network Layer Design Issues. 1

3.2 Routing Algorithms - The Optimality Principle, Shortest path 1

routing, Flooding.

3.3 Distance Vector Routing, Link State Routing. 1

3.4 Link State Routing. 1

3.5 Multicast Routing, Routing for Mobile Hosts 1

3.6 Distance Vector Routing, Link State Routing 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3.7 Congestion control algorithms - General Principles of 1

Congestion Control, Congestion Prevention Policies,
Congestion Control in Virtual-Circuit Subnets
3.8 Congestion control algorithms - Congestion Control in 1
Datagram Subnets, Load Shedding, Jitter Control
3.9 Quality of Service – Requirements, Techniques for Achieving 1
Good Quality of Service.

Module 4 (9 Hours)

4.1 Network layer in internet, IP Protocol 1

4.2 IP Addresses – Subnets, Classless Inter Domain Routing 1

(CIDR)

4.3 IP Addresses - Network Address Translation (NAT) 1

4.4 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Address Resolution 1

Protocol (ARP), Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP),
4.5 Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), Dynamic Host Configuration 1
Protocol (DHCP)
4.6 Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Protocol 1

4.7 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) 1

4.8 Internet Multicasing. 1

4.9 IPv6, Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 (ICMPv6). 1

Module 5 (8 Hours)

5.1 The Transport Service – Services Provided to the Upper Layers, 1

Transport Service Primitives. The User Datagram Protocol
(UDP)

5.2 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – Overview of TCP, TCP 1

Segment Header, Connection Establishment & Release,
Connection Management Modeling.

5.3 TCP Retransmission Policy, TCP Congestion Control. 1

5.4 Application Layer – File Transfer Protocol (FTP). 1

5.5 Domain Name System (DNS). 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

5.6 Electronic Mail. 1

5.7 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 1

5.8 World Wide Web – Architectural Overview 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

SEMESTER -4
HONOURS
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Year of
CODE COURSE NAME CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
Introduction

CST 292 Number Theory Honours 4 0 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is the foundational course for awarding B. Tech. Honours in Computer Science and
Engineering with specialization in Security in Computing. The purpose of this course is to create
awareness among learners about the important areas of number theory used in computer science. This
course covers Divisibility & Modular Arithmetic, Primes & Congruences, Euler's Function, Quadratic
Residues and Arithmetic Functions, Sum of Squares and Continued fractions. Concepts in Number
Theory help the learner to apply them eventually in practical applications in Computer organization &
Security, Coding & Cryptography, Random number generation, Hash functions and Graphics.

Prerequisite: A sound background in Higher Secondary School Mathematics

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Illustrate modular arithmetic operations, methods and techniques (Cognitive Knowledge

CO1
Level:Understand)
Use the methods - Induction, Contraposition or Contradiction to verify the correctness of
CO2
mathematical assertions (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Utilize theorems and results about prime numbers, congruences, quadratic residues and
CO3 integer factorization for ensuring security in computing systems (Cognitive Knowledge
Level: Analyse)
Illustrate uses of Chinese Remainder Theorem & Euclidean algorithm in Cryptography and
CO4
Security (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Explain applications of arithmetic functions in Computer Science (Cognitive Knowledge
CO5
Level:Understand)
Implement Number Theoretic Algorithms using a programming language (Cognitive
CO6
Knowledge Level: Apply)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 ! ! ! ! ! !

CO2 ! ! ! ! !

CO3 ! ! ! ! ! !

CO4 ! ! ! ! ! !

CO5 ! ! ! ! ! !

CO6
! ! ! ! ! ! !

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category Examination Marks
Test1 (Percentage) Test2 (Percentage) (Percentage)

Remember 30 30 30

Understand 30 30 30

Apply 40 40 40

Analyse

Evaluate

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus
and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing remaining part of
the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions each
from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3 marks for each
question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions from Part A. Part B
contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed modules and 1 question from
the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7 questions in Part B, a student should
answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each
module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2
questions from each module of which a student should answer any one. Each question can have
maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries 14 marks.

SYLLABUS
Module 1

Divisibility and Modular Arithmetic:

Finite Fields – Groups, Rings and Fields.

Divisibility - Divisibility and Division Algorithms, Well ordering Principle,Bezout’s Identity.

Modular Arithmetic- Properties, Euclid's algorithm for the greatest common divisor, Extended Euclid’s
Algorithm, Least Common multiple, Solving Linear Diophantine Equations, Modular Division.

Module 2

Primes and Congruences:

Prime Numbers-Prime Numbers andprime-powerfactorization, Fermat and Mersenne primes.,

Primality testing and factorization.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Congruences-Linear congruences, Simultaneous linear congruences, Chinese Remainder Theorem,

Fermat’s little theorem, Wilson's theorem.

Module 3

Congruences with a Prime-Power Modulus&Euler's Function:

Congruences with a Prime-Power Modulus-Arithmetic modulo p, Pseudoprimes and Carmichael

numbers, Solving congruences modulo prime powers.

Euler's Function-Euler’s Totient function, Applications of Euler’s Totient function, Traditional

Cryptosystem, Limitations.

The Group of units- The group Un,Primitive roots, Existence of primitive roots, Applications of
primitive roots.

Module 4

Quadratic Residues & Arithmetic Functions :

Quadratic Residues- Quadratic Congruences, The group of Quadratic residues, Legendre symbol,
Jacobi Symbol, Quadratic reciprocity.

Arithmetic Functions- Definition and examples, Perfect numbers, Mobius function and its properties,
Mobius inversion formula, The Dirichlet Products.

Module 5

Sum of Squares and Continued Fractions:

Sum of Squares- Sum of two squares, The Gaussian Integers, Sum of three squares, Sum of four
squares.

Continued Fractions -Finite continued fractions, Infinite continued fractions, Pell's Equation, Solution
of Pell’s equation by continued fractions.

Text Books

1. G.A. Jones & J.M. Jones, Elementary Number Theory, Springer UTM, 2007.

2. Joseph Silverman, A Friendly introduction to Number Theory, Pearson Ed. 2009.

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Reference Books

1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security Principles and Practice, Pearson Ed.
2. Tom M.Apostol, ‘Introduction to Analytic Number Theory’, Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi, (1996).

3. Neal Koblitz, A course in Number Theory and Cryptography, 2nd Edition, Springer ,2004.

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome 1 (CO1): Describe the properties of modular arithmetic and modulo operator.

Course Outcome 2 (CO2): Prove that the equation y2 = x3 - 2 has only the integer solution (3, ±5).

Course Outcome 3 (CO3): State the law of reciprocity for Jacobi symbols and use it to determine
whether 888 is a quadratic residue or non residue of the prime 1999.

Course Outcome 4 (CO4): Using Chinese remainder theorem, solve the system of congruence x
≡2(mod 3), x ≡3(mod 5), x ≡2(mod 7)

Course Outcome 5(CO5): State and prove Dirichlet product.

Course Outcome 6 (CO6):Use extended Euclid's algorithm to solve Diophantine equations

efficiently. Given three numbers a>0, b>0, and c, the algorithm should return some x and y such that
a x + b y = c.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question Paper

QP CODE: PAGES: 03
RegNo : …............................... Name :………..……………

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

FOURTH SEMESTER BTECH (HONOURS) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH &YEAR

Course Code:CST 292 Course

Name: Number Theory

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks (10x3=30)

1. State and prove well ordering principle.
2. Find gcd d of x=525 and y=231 and express d as ax + by where a and b are integers.
3. Solve the congruence equation 103 x≡ 57 (mod 211).
4. Use Fermat’s Little theorem to show that 91 is not a prime.
5. If m is relatively prime to n , show that Φ(mn) = Φ(m) Φ(n).
6. Explain how public key cryptography can be used for digital signatures.
7. Define Mobius function and prove Mobius function is a multiplicative.
8. State and prove Dirichlet product.
9. Show that every prime of the form 4k+1 canbe represented uniquely as the sum of two
squares.
10. Find the continued fraction representation of the rational number 55/89.

Part B

Answer any one Question from each module.

Each question carries 14 Marks

11. (a) State the Euclidean algorithm and its extension with an example. (7)
(b) Find all the solutions of 24x + 34 y = 6. (7)
OR
12. (a) Describe the properties of modular arithmetic and modulo operator. (7)
(b) Explain Extended Euclidean algorithm. Using the algorithm find the
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

multiplicative inverse of 135 mod 61 (7)

13. (a) State and prove Wilson’s theorem . (7)

(b) Explain Fermat’s factorization method and use it to factor 809009 (7)

OR
14. (a) Using Chinese remainder theorem, solve the system of congruences,
x ≡2(mod 3), x ≡3(mod 5), x ≡2(mod 7) (7)
(b) Define Fermat primes. Show that any two distinct Fermat numbers are
Relatively prime. (7)

15. (a) Distinguish between public key and private key encryption techniques.
Also point out the merits and demerits of both. (7)
(b) Define Carmichael number and show that a Carmichael number must
be the product of at least three distinct primes. (7)

OR
16. (a)Define a pseudo prime to a base and find all non trivial bases for which
15 is a pseudo prime. (6)
(b) Find an element of
i) order 5 modulo 11 ii) order 4 modulo 13
iii) order 8 modulo 17 iv) order 6 modulo 19 (8)

17. (a) Determine the quadratic residues and non residues modulo 17. Also
determine whether 219 is a quadratic residue or non residue of the prime 383.
(8)
(b) State the law of quadratic reciprocity. Determine those odd primes p for
which 3 is a quadratic residue and those for which it is a non residue. (6)
OR
18. (a) State and prove properties of Legendre’s symbol. (7)
(b) State the law of reciprocity for Jacobi symbols and using it determine
whether 888 is a quadratic residue or non residue of the prime 1999. (7)

19. (a) Prove that the equation y2 = x3 - 2 has only the integer solution (3 , ±5). (7)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

(b) Define a Gaussian integer. Factorize the Gaussian integer 440 − 55i. (7)
OR
20. (a) If m, and n can be expressed as sum of four squares, then show that mn can
also be expressed the sum of four squares. (7)
(b) Find all the solutions of the Diophantine equation x2 – 6 y 2 =1. (7)

Teaching Plan

Module 1: Divisibility and Euclidean Algorithm 9 hours

1.1 Finite Fields – Groups and Rings. 1 hour

1.2 Finite Fields – Fields. 1 hour

1.3 Divisibility and Division Algorithms, Well ordering Principle. 1 hour

Decimal Expansion of a positive Integer, Greatest Common Divisor,

1.4 1 hour
Bezout’s Theorem.
Modular Arithmetic- Properties of congruences, Modular Arithmetic
1.5 1 hour
Operations, Properties of Modular Arithmetic.
Euclid's algorithm for the greatest common divisor, Extended Euclid’s
1.6 1 hour
Algorithm.

1.7 Solving Linear Diophantine Equations. 1 hour

1.8 Least Common multiple and Modular Division. 1 hour

Implementation of Euclid’s algorithm, Extended Euclid’s Algorithm and

1.9 1 hour
solution of Linear Diophantine Equations.

Module 2: Primes and Congruences 9 hours

2.1 Prime Numbersand prime-powerFactorization. 1 hour

2.2 Fermat and Mersenne primes. 1 hour

2.3 Primality testing and factorization, Miller -Rabin Test for Primality. 1 hour

2.4 Pollard's Rho Method for Factorization, Fermat’s Factorization. 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

2.5 Linear congruences, Simultaneous linear congruences. 1 hour

2.6 Chinese Remainder Theorem. 1 hour

2.7 Implementation of Chinese Remainder Theorem. 1 hour

2.8 Fermat's little theorem. 1 hour

2.9 Wilson's theorem. 1 hour

Module 3: Congruences with a Prime-Power Modulus &Euler's Function 9 hours

3.1 Congruences with a Prime-Power Modulus, Arithmetic modulo p. 1 hour

3.2 Pseudo-primes and Carmichael numbers. 1 hour

3.3 Solving congruences modulo prime powers. 1 hour

3.4 Definition of Euler Totient function, Examples and properties. 1 hour

3.5 Multiplicativity of Euler's Totient function. 1 hour

3.6 Applications of Euler’s function, Euler’s Theorem. 1 hour

3.7 Traditional Cryptosystem, Limitations, Public Key Cryptography. 1 hour

3.8 The Group of Units, Primitive Roots. 1 hour

3.9 Existence of primitive roots for Primes, Applications of primitive roots. 1 hour

Module 4: Quadratic Residues and Arithmetic Functions 9 hours

4.1 Quadratic congruences, The group of Quadratic Residues. 1 hour

4.2 Legendre symbol, Jacobi Symbol. 1 hour

4.3 Quadratic reciprocity. 1 hour

4.4 Quadratic residues for prime-power moduli. 1 hour

4.5 Arithmetic Functions: Definition and examples. 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4.6 Perfect numbers, Definition and proposition. 1 hour

4.7 Mobius inversion formula., application of the Mobius inversion formula. 1 hour

4.8 Mobius function and its properties. 1 hour

4.9 The Dirichlet Product, Definition and proof. 1 hour

Module 5: Sum of Squares and Continued Fractions 9 hours

5.1 Sum of Squares, Sum of two squares. 1 hour

5.2 The Gaussian Integers. 1 hour

5.3 Sum of three squares. 1 hour

5.4 Sum of four squares. 1 hour

5.5 Continued Fractions, Finite continued fractions. 1 hour

5.6 Continued Fractions, Finite continued fractions. 1 hour

5.7 Infinite continued fractions. 1 hour

5.8 Pell's Equation, Definition. 1 hour

5.9 Solution of Pell's equation by continued fractions. 1 hour

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
CODE Computational Fundamentals CATEGORY L T P CREDIT
CST 294 for Machine Learning HONOURS 3 1 0 4

Preamble: This is the foundational course for awarding B. Tech. Honours in Computer
Science and Engineering with specialization in Machine Learning. The purpose of this course
is to introduce mathematical foundations of basic Machine Learning concepts among learners, on
which Machine Learning systems are built. This course covers Linear Algebra, Vector Calculus,
Probability and Distributions, Optimization and Machine Learning problems. Concepts in this course
help the learners to understand the mathematical principles in Machine Learning and aid in the
creation of new Machine Learning solutions, understand & debug existing ones, and learn about the
inherent assumptions & limitations of the current methodologies.

Prerequisite: A sound background in higher secondary school Mathematics.

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Make use of the concepts, rules and results about linear equations, matrix algebra,
CO 1 vector spaces, eigenvalues & eigenvectors and orthogonality & diagonalization to
solve computational problems (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)

Perform calculus operations on functions of several variables and matrices,

CO 2
including partial derivatives and gradients (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Utilize the concepts, rules and results about probability, random variables, additive
& multiplicative rules, conditional probability, probability distributions and Bayes’
CO 3
theorem to find solutions of computational problems (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Apply)

Train Machine Learning Models using unconstrained and constrained optimization

CO 4
methods (Cognitive Knowledge Level: Apply)
Illustrate how the mathematical objects - linear algebra, probability, and calculus
CO 5 can be used to design machine learning algorithms (Cognitive Knowledge Level:
Understand)

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7 PO 8 PO 9 PO 10 PO 11 PO 12
CO 1 √ √ √ √ √
CO 2 √ √ √ √
CO 3 √ √ √ √ √
CO 4 √ √ √ √ √ √

CO 5 √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics
PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems
PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance
PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

Assessment Pattern

Continuous Assessment Tests End Semester

Bloom’s Category
1 2 Examination

Remember 20% 20% 20%

Understand 40% 40% 40%

Apply 40% 40% 40%

Analyse
Evaluate

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 marks

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Continuous Assessment Assignment : 15 marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the
syllabus and the Second Internal Examination shall be preferably conducted after completing
remaining part of the syllabus.

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2
questions each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module),
having 3 marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer
all questions from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the
completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out
of the 7 questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern: There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A
contains 10 questions with 2 questions from each module, having 3 marks for each question.
Students should answer all questions. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which
student should answer anyone. Each question can have maximum 2 sub-divisions and carries
14 marks.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Syllabus

Module 1

LINEAR ALGEBRA : Systems of Linear Equations – Matrices, Solving Systems of Linear

Equations. Vector Spaces - Linear Independence, Basis and Rank, Linear Mappings, Norms,
- Inner Products - Lengths and Distances - Angles and Orthogonality - Orthonormal Basis -
Orthogonal Complement - Orthogonal Projections. Matrix Decompositions - Determinant
and Trace, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Cholesky Decomposition, Eigen decomposition
and Diagonalization, Singular Value Decomposition, Matrix Approximation.

Module 2

VECTOR CALCULUS : Differentiation of Univariate Functions - Partial Differentiation

and Gradients, Gradients of Vector Valued Functions, Gradients of Matrices, Useful
Identities for Computing Gradients. Back propagation and Automatic Differentiation - Higher
Order Derivatives- Linearization and Multivariate Taylor Series.

Module 3

Probability and Distributions : Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete and

Continuous Probabilities, Sum Rule, Product Rule, and Bayes’ Theorem. Summary Statistics
and Independence – Important Probability distributions - Conjugacy and the Exponential
Family - Change of Variables/Inverse Transform.

Module 4

Optimization : Optimization Using Gradient Descent - Gradient Descent With Momentum,

Stochastic Gradient Descent. Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers - Convex
Optimization - Linear Programming - Quadratic Programming.

Module 5

CENTRAL MACHINE LEARNING PROBLEMS : Data and Learning Model-

Empirical Risk Minimization - Parameter Estimation - Directed Graphical Models.

Linear Regression - Bayesian Linear Regression - Maximum Likelihood as Orthogonal

Projection.

Dimensionality Reduction with Principal Component Analysis - Maximum Variance

Perspective, Projection Perspective. Eigenvector Computation and Low Rank
Approximations.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Density Estimation with Gaussian Mixture Models - Gaussian Mixture Model, Parameter
Learning via Maximum Likelihood, EM Algorithm.

Classification with Support Vector Machines - Separating Hyperplanes, Primal Support

Vector Machine, Dual Support Vector Machine, Kernels.

Text book:

1.Mathematics for Machine Learning by Marc Peter Deisenroth, A. Aldo Faisal, and
Cheng Soon Ong published by Cambridge University Press (freely available at https://
mml - book.github.io)

Reference books:

1. Linear Algebra and Its Applications, 4th Edition by Gilbert Strang

2. Linear Algebra Done Right by Axler, Sheldon, 2015 published by Springer

3. Introduction to Applied Linear Algebra by Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe,

2018 published by Cambridge University Press

4. Convex Optimization by Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe, 2004 published by

Cambridge University Press

5. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning by Christopher M Bishop, 2006, published

by Springer

6. Learning with Kernels – Support Vector Machines, Regularization, Optimization, and

Beyond by Bernhard Scholkopf and Smola, Alexander J Smola, 2002, bublished by
MIT Press

7. Information Theory, Inference, and Learning Algorithms by David J. C MacKay, 2003

published by Cambridge University Press

8. Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective by Kevin P Murphy, 2012 published by

MIT Press.

9. The Nature of Statistical Learning Theory by Vladimir N Vapnik, 2000, published by

Springer
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Sample
Sample Course
Course LevelLevel Assessment
Assessment Questions.
Questions.
Sample
Sample
Sample Course
Course
Course Level Level
Level Assessment
Assessment
Assessment Questions.
Questions.
Questions.
Course
Course Outcome
Outcome 1 (CO1):
1 (CO1):
Course
Course
Course Outcome
Outcome
Outcome 1 (CO1):
1 (CO1):
1 (CO1):
1. Find the set S of all solutions in x of the following inhomogeneous linear systems Ax = b
1. Find the set S of all solutions in x of the following inhomogeneous linear systems Ax
1.
1. 1. Find
FindFind theASset
the the
whereset set
ofSSall
and of
bof all
all solutions
solutions
solutions
are defined in
inofxxthe
inasxfollows: of following
of the following
the following inhomogeneous
inhomogeneous
inhomogeneous linear
linear
linear systems
systems
systems Ax
b == bb
Ax =Ax
=where
b,
where Awhere
where AAand
and Aare
bandand b are
bbdefined
are
are defined
defined
defined as follows:
asfollows:
as follows:
as follows:

2. Determine the inverses of the following matrix if possible

2. Determine the inverses of the following matrix if possible
2.
2. 2. Determine
Determine
Determine theinverses
the inverses
the inverses offollowing
of
of the thefollowing
the following matrix
matrix
matrix ififpossible
possible
if possible

3. Are the following sets of vectors linearly independent?

3.
3. 3.3.
Are Are
Are
the
Are the
the following
following
following
the sets
following sets
sets
of
sets of
of vectors
vectors
vectors
of linearly
linearly
linearly
vectors independent?
independent?
independent?
linearly independent?

4. 4.A set
A set
of of n linearly
n linearly independent
independent vectors
vectors in R inn R n
formsforms a basis.
a basis. Does
Does thethe
set set of vectors
of vectors (2, (2, 4,−3) ,
n
4. 4.4.
A setA set
A(0,
set1,
of of n linearly
noflinearly
1)n, linearly independent
independent
independent
(0, 1,−1) vectors
vectors
vectors
form a basis 3 in R forms a basis. Does the set of vectors (2, 4,−3) ,
n n
forinRR?inExplain
R3 forms
forms a basis.
a your
basis. DoesDoes
reasons. the of
the set setvectors
of vectors (2, 4,−3)
(2, 4,−3) , ,
4,−3) , (0, 1, 1) , (0, 1,−1) form a basis for R ? Explain your reasons.
(0, 1, (0,
(0,1)1,1, 1),1,−1)
, 1)
(0, ,(0,
(0,1,−1)
1,−1) form
formform aabasis
a basisbasis
for R for
3
for?R R33??Explain
ExplainExplainyouryour your reasons.
reasons.
reasons.
5. 5.Consider the transformation T (x, y) = (x +
Consider the transformation T (x, y) = (x + y, x + 2y, 2x y, x + 2y, 2x + 3y). Obtain
+ 3y). kerker
Obtain T and useuse this to
T and
5. 5.5. this
Consider
Consider
Consider the
the
to calculate
calculate transformation
the transformation
thetransformation
the nullity.
nullity. Also (x,TTy)
TAlso
find (x,
(x,=y)
find
the y)
(x ==+(x
the (x
y, +x+ y,+y, x2y,
transformation
transformation x ++2x2y,+2x
2y,
matrix 2x
3y).+ 3y).
+for
matrix 3y). Obtain
Obtain
T. Tker
T. ker ker
forObtain TT and
and and use
use use this
this this to
to to
calculate
calculate
calculate thenullity.
nullity.
the nullity.
the Also
AlsoAlso find
findfind thetransformation
transformation
the transformation
the matrix matrix
for T.
matrix forT.
for T.

6. 6.Find
Find
the the characteristic
characteristic equation,
equation, eigenvalues,
eigenvalues, and eigenspaces
and eigenspaces corresponding
corresponding to each to each
6. 6.6. Find
Find Find the
the the
eigenvalue characteristic
characteristic equation,
equation,
characteristic eigenvalues,
eigenvalues,
equation,
of the following matrix and
and and
eigenvalues, eigenspaces
eigenspaces corresponding
corresponding
eigenspaces to each
to each
corresponding to each
eigenvalue of the following matrix
eigenvalue
eigenvalue offollowing
of the
eigenvalue of thefollowing
the following matrix
matrix
matrix

"
7. Diagonalize the following matrix, if possible
7. 7.7. Diagonalize
Diagonalize thefollowing
following
the following
Diagonalize the matrix,
matrix, ififpossible
possible
if possible
matrix,
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
7. Diagonalize the following matrix, if possible

8. Find the singular value decomposition (SVD) of the following matrix

8. 8.Find the singular

Find the value
singular value decomposition
decomposition (SVD) (SVD)
of the of the following
following matrixmatrix

"

Course Outcome 2 (CO2):

Course
Course Outcome
Outcome 2 (CO2):
2 (CO2):

1. 1. For
Fora scalar
a scalar function
function f(x,f(x, x2 +3y
y, zy,) z=) x=2 +3y
2
2 +2z+2z
2
, find
2, find the the gradient
gradient andand its magnitude
its magnitude at at the
1.thepoint
For
(1, 2, -1).
a scalar
point function f(x, y, z ) = x2 +3y2 +2z2, find the gradient and its magnitude at the
(1, 2, -1).
pointthe
2. 2. Find
Find (1, maximum
2, -1). andminimum
minimumvalues
values of
of the
the function f(x, y) 2 2
the maximum and y) == 4x
4x++4y4y- x- x-2 y- ysubject
2 to
2 2
the
Findcondition
2.subject to the
the x + y and
<=
condition
maximum x2 2.
+ y2 <= 2. values of the function f(x, y) = 4x + 4y - x 2 - y2 subject to
minimum
2 2
the condition
3. 3. Suppose x +trying
y <= 2. f(x, y) y)
= x2=+ x
2y2 + 2y2. Along
Supposeyou
youwere to to
were trying minimize
minimize f(x, + 2y + 2y2. what vector
Along what vector
3.should you
should
Suppose
travel
you from (5,(5,
travel
you werefrom
12)?
trying 12)?
to minimize f(x, y) = x2+ 2y + 2y2. Along what vector
4. should you travel from (5, 12)?
4. Find thethe
second order Taylor series expansion forfor
f(x, y) y)
= (x + y)
+ y)about (0 (0
, 0).
2 2
Find second order Taylor series expansion f(x, = (x about , 0).
5.
4.Find thethe
critical points
orderofTaylor
f(x, y)series
= x expansion
3xy+5x-2y+6y +8.y) = (x + y)2 about (0 , 0).
2– 2
Find second for f(x,
5. Find the critical points of f(x, y) = x2 – 3xy+5x-2y+6y2+8.
6. Compute the gradient of the Rectified Linear Unit (ReLU) function ReLU(z) =
5. Find the critical points of f(x, y) = x2 – 3xy+5x-2y+6y2+8.
6. Compute the gradient of the Rectified Linear Unit (ReLU) function ReLU(z) = max(0 , z).
max(0 , z).
7. 6.LetCompute
LL ==||Ax
the gradient of the Rectified Linear Unit (ReLU) function ReLU(z) = max(0 , z).
||Ax- b||
- b||2,22where
, whereAAisisa amatrix
matrixand
andx xand
andb bare
arevectors.
vectors.Derive
DerivedL
dLininterms
termsofof dx.
2
7. Let
7.dx.Let L = ||Ax - b||22, where A is a matrix and x and b are vectors. Derive dL in terms of dx.
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):
1. Let J and T be independent events, where P(J)=0.4 and P(T)=0.7.
i. Find P(J∩T)
1. Let J and T be independent events, where P(J)=0.4 and P(T)=0.7.
ii. Find P(J∪T)
i. Find P(J∩T)
iii. Find P(J∩T′)
ii. Find P(J∪T)
iii. Find P(J∩T′)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Course Outcome 3 (CO3):

1. Let J and T be independent events, where P(J)=0.4 and P(T)=0.7.

i. Find P(J∩T)

ii. Find P(J∪T)

iii. Find P(J∩T′)

2. Let A and B be events such that P(A)=0.45 , P(B)=0.35 and P(A∪B)=0.5. Find
P(A∣B).
2. Let A and B be events such that P(A)=0.45 , P(B)=0.35 and P(A∪B)=0.5. Find P(A∣B).
3. A random variable R has the probability distribution as shown in the following table:
3. A random variable R has the probability distribution as shown in the following table:

i.
i. Given that E(R)=2.85, find a and b.
i. Given
ii. that E(R)=2.85,
Find P(R>2). find a and b.
ii. Find P(R>2).
4. A biased coin (with probability of obtaining a head equal to p > 0) is tossed repeatedly and
4. A biasedindependently
coin (with probability
until the of obtaining
first head isaobserved.
head equalCompute
to p > 0)the
is tossed repeatedly
probability that the first head
and independently
appears at anuntil
eventhenumbered
first headtoss.
is observed. Compute the probability that the
first head appears at an even numbered toss.
5. Two players A and B are competing at a trivia quiz game involving a series of questions. On
5. Two players A and B question,
are competing at a triviathat
quiz game involving a series of are p and q
any individual the probabilities A and B give the correct answer
questions. On any individual
respectively, question,with
for all questions, the outcomes
probabilities
for that A andquestions
different B give the correct
being independent. The
answer gameare p finishes
and q respectively,
when a player for wins
all questions, with outcomes
by answering a questionforcorrectly.
differentCompute the
questions being independent.
probability that A winsThe if game finishes when a player wins by answering a
i. A answers
question correctly. Compute thethe
first question, that A wins if
probability
ii. B answers the first question.
i. A answers the first question,
6. A coin for which P(heads) = p is tossed until two successive tails are obtained. Find the
ii. Bprobability
answers the first
that thequestion.
experiment is completed on the nth toss.
6. A coin for which P(heads) = p is tossed until two successive tails are obtained. Find
7. You roll a fair dice twice. Let the random variable X be the product of the outcomes of the
the probability that the experiment is completed on the nth toss.
two rolls. What is the probability mass function of X? What are the expected value and the
7. You rollstandard
a fair dice twice. Let the random variable X be the product of the outcomes of
deviation of X?
the two rolls. What is the probability mass function of X? What are the expected value
and 8. While watching
the standard deviationaofgameX? of Cricket, you observe someone who is clearly supporting
Mumbai Indians. What is the probability that they were actually born within 25KM of
Mumbai? Assume that:
• the probability that a randomly selected person is born within 25KM of Mumbai is
1/20;
• the chance that a person born within 25KMs of Mumbai actually supports MI is
7/10 ;
• the probability that a person not born within 25KM of Mumbai supports MI with
probability 1/10.

9. What is an exponential family? Why are exponential families useful?

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
8. While watching a game of Cricket, you observe someone who is clearly supporting
Mumbai Indians. What is the probability that they were actually born within 25KM of
Mumbai? Assume that:
• the probability that a randomly selected person is born within 25KM of
Mumbai is 1/20;
• the chance that a person born within 25KMs of Mumbai actually supports MI
is 7/10 ;
• the probability that a person not born within 25KM of Mumbai supports MI
with probability 1/10.
9. What is an exponential family? Why are exponential families useful?
10. Let Z1 and Z2 be independent random variables each having the standard normal
distribution. Define the random variables X and Y by X = Z1 + 3Z2 and Y = Z1 + Z2.
Argue that the joint distribution of (X, Y) is a bivariate normal distribution. What are
the parameters of this distribution?
11. Given a continuous random variable x, with cumulative distribution function Fx(x),
show that the random variable y = Fx(x) is uniformly distributed.
12. Explain Normal distribution, Binomial distribution and Poisson distribution in the
exponential family form.

Course Outcome 4(CO4):

1. Find the extrema of f(x, y) = x subject to g(x, y) = x2 + 2y2 = 3.

2. Maximize the function f(x, y, z) = xy + yz + xz on the unit sphere g(x, y, z) = x2 + y2 +
z2 = 1.
3. Provide necessary and suffcient conditions under which a quadratic optimization
problem be written as a linear least squares problem.
4. Consider the univariate function f(x) = x3 + 6x2 - 3x - 5. Find its stationary points and
indicate whether they are maximum, minimum, or saddle points.
5. Consider the update equation for stochastic gradient descent. Write down the update
when we use a mini-batch size of one.
 indicate whether
indicate whether they
they are
are maximum,
maximum, minimum,
minimum, or
or saddle
saddle points.
points.

5. Consider
5. Consider the
the update
update equation
equation for
for stochastic
stochastic gradient
gradient descent.
descent. Write
Write down
down the
the update
update when
when
we use
we use aa mini-batch
mini-batch size
size of
of one.
one.
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
6. Consider
6.
6. Consider the
Consider the function
the function
function

"

i. Is f(x) a convex function? Justify your answer.

i.i. Is f(x)
Is f(x) aa convex
convex function?
function? Justify
Justify your
your answer.
answer.
ii.
ii. Is (1
Is (1 ,, -1)
-1) aa local/global
local/global minimum?
minimum? Justify
Justify your
your answer.
answer.
2 2
7. Is the
7. Is the function
function f(x,
f(x, y)
y) == 2x
2x22++yy22++6xy
6xy--xx++3y
3y- -77convex,
convex,concave,
concave,ororneither?
neither?Justify
Justify your
your
answer.answer.
8.
8. Consider
Consider the
the following
following convex
convex optimization
optimization problem
problem

"

Subject to the constraint x + y >= 4, x, y >= 1.

Subject to the constraint x + y >= 4, x, y >= 1.
Derive an
Derive an explicit
explicit form
form of
of the
the Lagrangian
Lagrangian dual
dual problem.
problem.

9. 9.
Solve the following
Solve LP problem
the following withwith
LP problem the simplex method.
the simplex method.
9. Solve the following LP problem with the simplex method.

"
subject
subject to toto constraints
the the constraints
subject the constraints

Course
Course Outcome
Outcome 5 (CO5):
5 (CO5):
Course Outcome 5 (CO5):
1. What is a loss function? Give examples.
1. What is a loss function? Give examples.
2.1. What is
area loss
training/validation/test sets? What is cross-validation? Name one or two
function? Give examples.
2. What areoftraining/validation/test
examples sets? What is cross-validation? Name one or two examples
cross-validation methods.
2. What are training/validation/test sets? What is cross-validation? Name one or two examples
of cross-validation methods.
3. of cross-validation
Explain methods.
generalization, overfitting, model selection, kernel trick, Bayesian learning
3. Explain generalization, overfitting, model selection, kernel trick, Bayesian learning
3. Explain generalization, overfitting, model selection, kernel trick, Bayesian learning
4. Distinguish between Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE) and Maximum A Posteriori
4. Distinguish between Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE) and Maximum A Posteriori
Estimation (MAP)?
Estimation (MAP)?
5. What is the link between structural risk minimization and regularization?
5. What is the link between structural risk minimization and regularization?
6. What is a kernel? What is a dot product? Give examples of kernels that are valid dot
6. What is a kernel? What is a dot product? Give examples of kernels that are valid dot
products.
products.
 Course Outcome 5 (CO5):

1. What is a loss function? Give examples.COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

4.2. Distinguish
What are training/validation/test
between Maximum sets? What isEstimation
Likelihood cross-validation?
(MLE) Name one or two A
and Maximum examples
of cross-validation
Posteriori Estimationmethods.
(MAP)?
5.3. What
Explain generalization,
is the link between overfitting, model
structural risk selection, and
minimization kernel trick, Bayesian learning
regularization?
6.4. What
Distinguish between
is a kernel? WhatMaximum Likelihood
is a dot product? GiveEstimation
examples (MLE) andthat
of kernels Maximum
are validAdot
Posteriori
Estimation (MAP)?
products.
7.5. What
Whatisisridge
the link between How
regression? structural risktrain
can one minimization and regularization?
a ridge regression linear model?
8.6. What
What isis Principal
a kernel?Component
What is a Analysis
dot product?
(PCA)?GiveWhich
examples
eigenof value
kernels that arethevalid dot
indicates
products.of largest variance? In what sense is the representation obtained from a
direction
7. projection
What is ridge ontoregression?
the eigenHow can onecorresponding
directions train a ridge regression
the the linear
largestmodel?
eigen values
optimal for data reconstruction?
8. What is Principal Component Analysis (PCA)? Which eigen value indicates the direction of
largest variance?
9. Suppose that you In what
have sense is
a linear the representation
support vector machine obtained
(SVM) from a projection
binary classifier.onto the
eigen directions
Consider a pointcorresponding the the
that is currently largest eigen
classified valuesand
correctly, optimal
is farforaway
data reconstruction?
from the
9. decision
Supposeboundary. If you
that you have remove
a linear the point
support vectorfrom the training
machine (SVM) set, andclassifier.
binary re-train the
Consider a
classifier, will the decision boundary change or stay the same? Explain your answer
point that is currently classified correctly, and is far away from the decision boundary. If you
inremove
one sentence.
the point from the training set, and re-train the classifier, will the decision boundary
change or stay the same? Explain your answer in one sentence.
10. Suppose you have n independent and identically distributed (i.i.d) sample data points
10. xSuppose
1, ... , xnyou havedata
. These n independent
points come andfrom
identically distributed
a distribution (i.i.d)
where thesample of a x1, ... ,
data points
probability
xn. These
given data points
datapoint x is come from a distribution where the probability of a given datapoint x is

"

Prove that the MLE estimate of parameter is the sample mean.

11. Suppose the data set y1,...,yn is a drawn from a random sample consisting of i.i.d.
discrete uniform distributions with range 1 to N. Find the maximum likelihood
estimate of N.
12. Ram has two coins: one fair coin and one biased coin which lands heads with
probability 3/4. He picks one coin at random (50-50) and flips it repeatedly until he
gets a tails. Given that he observes 3 heads before the first tails, find the posterior
probability that he picked each coin.

i. What are the prior and posterior odds for the fair coin?

ii. What are the prior and posterior predictive probabilities of heads on the next
flip? Here prior predictive means prior to considering the data of the first four
flips.
11. Suppose the data set y1,...,yn is a drawn from a random sample consisting of i.i.d. discrete
uniform distributions with range 1 to N. Find the maximum likelihood estimate of N.
12. Ram has two coins: one fair coin and one biased coin which lands heads with probability
3/4. He picks one coin at random (50-50) and flips it repeatedly until he gets a tails. Given
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
that he observes 3 heads before the first tails, find the posterior probability that he picked
each coin.
i. What are the prior and posterior odds for the fair coin?
ii. What are the prior Model Question
and posterior paper
predictive probabilities of heads on the next flip?
Here: prior predictive means prior to considering the data of the first four flips.
QP Code Total Pages: 4
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
Model
APJ ABDUL KALAM Question paperUNIVERSITY
TECHNOLOGICAL
IV SEMESTER B.TECH (HONOURS) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH and YEAR
QP Code : Total Pages: 4
Course Code: CST 294
Reg No.:_______________ Name:__________________________
Course Name: COMPUTATIONAL FUNDAMENTALS FOR MACHINE
APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY
LEARNING
IV SEMESTER B.TECH (HONOURS) DEGREE EXAMINATION, MONTH and YEAR
Max. Marks: 100 Duration: 3 Hours
Course Code: CST 274
Course Name: COMPUTATIONAL FUNDAMENTALS PART A FOR MACHINE LEARNING
Max. Marks: 100 Answer all questions, each carries 3 marks. Marks
Duration: 3 Hours
PART A
1 Show that withAnswer
the usual operation each
all questions, of scalar multiplication
carries 3 marks. but with Marks
1 Show that on
addition with the given
reals usual by
operation
x # y = of
2(xscalar
+ y) ismultiplication but with addition on
not a vector space.
reals given by x # y = 2(x + y) is not a vector space.
2 Find the eigenvalues of the following matrix in terms of k. Can you find
2 Find the eigenvalues of the following matrix in terms of k. Can you find an
an eigenvector corresponding to each of the eigenvalues?
eigenvector corresponding to each of the eigenvalues?

3 Let f(x, y, z) = xyer, where r = x2+z2-5. Calculate the gradient of f at the

3 Let f(x, y, z) = xyer, where r = x2+z2-5. Calculate the gradient of f at the point
(1,point
3, -2).(1, 3, -2).
4 Compute the Taylor polynomials Tn, n = 0 , ... , 5 of f(x) = sin(x) + cos(x) at
4 x0 Compute
= 0. the Taylor polynomials Tn, n = 0 , ... , 5 of f(x) = sin(x) + cos(x)
5 LetatXxbe a continuous random variable with probability density function on
0 = 0.
0 <= x <= 1 defined by f(x) = 3x2. Find the pdf of Y = X2.
65 Let that
Show X beifatwocontinuous
events A random variable
and B are with probability
independent, then A anddensity function
B' are independent.
7 Explain the principle of the gradient descent algorithm.
on 0 <= x <= 1 defined by f(x) = 3x2. Find the pdf of Y = X2.
6 Show that if two events A and B are independent, then A and B' are
independent.
7 Explain the principle of the gradient descent algorithm.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
8 Briey explain the difference between (batch) gradient descent and
stochastic gradient descent. Give an example of when you might prefer

8
one over the other.
Briey explain the difference between (batch) gradient descent and stochastic
8 Briey explain the difference between (batch) gradient descent and stochastic
9 What isdescent.
gradient the empirical
Give an risk? What of
example is “empirical risk minimization”?
when you might prefer one over the other.
910gradient descent.
What Give
is thethe an
empirical example
risk? of
Whatwhen you might
is “empirical prefer
risk one over the other.
minimization”?
9 What is Explain
the empirical concept
risk? of ais
What Kernel function
“empirical risk in Support
minimization”? Vector Machines.
10 Explain the concept of a Kernel function in Support Vector Machines. Why are
10 Explain Why
the concept of aso
are kernels Kernel
useful?function in Supporta Vector
What properties kernel Machines. Why
should posses to are
be
kernels so useful? What properties a kernel should posses to be used in an SVM?
kernels so
useduseful?
in an What
SVM?properties a kernel should posses to be used in an SVM?
PART B
PART
Answer any one Question from each B module. Each question carries 14 Marks
11 a)Answer i. any one
Find allQuestion
solutionsfrom PART
to theeach B linear
module.
system of Each question carries 14 Marks
equations (6)
11 a) i. Answer
Find all any
solutions to the system of linear equations
one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks (6)

11 a) i. Find all solutions to the system of linear equations (6)

ii. Prove that" all

ii. Prove that all
ii.vectors
Prove orthogonal −3, 1]T forms
to [2,orthogonal
that all vectors to a −3,
[2, subspace
1] T forms
3
W ofaRsubspace
. What is dim
T 3
vectors(W)
orthogonal
and why?
to [2, −3, 1] forms a subspace W of R . What is dim
W of R3. What is dim (W) and why?
(W) and why?
b) Use Usethethe
Gramm-Schmidt
Gramm-Schmidt process to find
process an orthogonal
to find basis for
an orthogonal the for
basis column
the space
(8) (8)
b) Use theofGramm-Schmidt
the following process
matrix to find an orthogonal basis for the column space (8)
column space of the following matrix
of the following matrix

"
OR
12 a) i. Let L be the line through the OR 2
ORorigin in R that is parallel to the vector (6)
12 a) i. Let L be 4]Tline
[3,the . Find the standard
through matrix
the origin in Rof
2 the orthogonal projection onto L. Also
that is parallel to the vector (6)
T
[3, 4] find
. Find
thethe standard
point matrixisofclosest
on L which the orthogonal projection
to the point onto
(7 , 1) and findL.the
Also
point on
find theL point
whichonis Lclosest
whichtoisthe
closest
pointto(-3
the, 5).
point (7 , 1) and find the point on
ii. Find
L which the rank-1
is closest approximation
to the point (-3 , 5).of
ii. Find the rank-1 approximation of

b) i. Find an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)

b) i. Find an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
12 a) i. Let L be the line through the origin in R2 that is parallel to the (6)
vector OR
12 a) i. Let L be the line through the origin in R2 that is parallel to the vector (6)
[3,4]4]T.T.Find
[3, Findthe
thestandard
standardmatrix
matrixofofthe
theorthogonal
orthogonalprojection
projectiononto
ontoL. Also
L. Also
find find the
the point on Lpoint
whichonisL closest
which is
to closest to (7
the point the, 1)
point
and(7find
, 1)the
and
point on
Lfind
which
theispoint
closest to which
on L the point (-3 , 5).to the point (-3 , 5).
is closest
ii. Find the rank-1 approximation of
ii. Find the rank-1 approximation of

"

b) i. Find an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)

following matrix
b) following
i. Find matrix
an orthonormal basis of R3 consisting of eigenvectors for the (8)

ii. Find a 3 × 3 orthogonal "

ii. Find
matrix S anda a33××33orthogonal matrix
diagonal matrix D Ssuch
andthat
a 3A×=3SDS
diagonal
T
. matrix D
such that A = SDST .
13 a) A skier is on a mountain with equation z = 100 – 0.4x2 – 0.3y2, where z denotes (8)
13 height.
a) A skier is on a mountain with equation z = 100 – 0.4x2 – 0.3y2, where z (8)
denotes height.
i. The skier is located at the point with xy-coordinates (1 , 1), and wants to
skii.downhill along
The skier is the steepest
located at thepossible path. xy-coordinates
point with In which direction(1 ,(indicated
1), and
by a vector (a , b) in the xy-plane) should the skier begin
wants to ski downhill along the steepest possible path. In whichskiing.
direction (indicated by a vector (a , b) in the xy-plane) should the
ii. The skier begins skiing in the direction given by the xy-vector (a , b) you
found skier begin
in part (i), skiing.
so the skier heads in a direction in space given by the
vector (a , b , c). Find the value of c.
ii. The skier begins skiing in the direction given by the xy-vector (a ,
b) b) linear
Find the you found in part (i),tosothe
approximation thefunction
skier heads
f(x,y)in=a2direction
- sin(-x -in3y)space
at the (6)
given
point (0 , π),by
andthethen
vector
use (a , b answer
your , c). Find
to the value f(0.001
estimate of c. , π).
b) Find the linear approximation to the function f(x,y) = 2 - sin(-x - (6)
3y) at the point (0 , π),OR
and then use your answer to estimate
14 a) Let g be the function given by (8)
f(0.001 , π).

OR
 OR
14 a) Let g be the function given by (8)

COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

14 a) Let g be the function given by (8)

"
i. Calculate the partial derivatives of g at (0 , 0).
i. Calculate the partial derivatives of g at (0 , 0).
ii.
ii. Show
Showthatthatggisisnot
notdifferentiable
differentiableatat(0
(0,,0).
0).
b) Find the second order Taylor series expansion for f(x,y) = e-(x2+y2) cos(xy) about (0 , (6)
b) Find the second order Taylor series expansion for f(x,y) = e-(x2+y2) cos(xy) (6)
0).
aboutare
15 a) There (0 ,two
0). bags. The first bag contains four mangos and two apples; the second (6)
15 a) There
bag are twofour
contains bags. The first
mangos andbag
fourcontains
apples. four mangos
We also haveand two apples;
a biased (6)
coin, which
the second
shows bagwith
“heads” contains four mangos
probability 0.6 andand fourwith
“tails” apples. We also0.4.
probability haveIf athe coin
biased coin, which shows “heads” with probability 0.6 and “tails” with
probability 0.4. If the coin shows “heads”. we pick a fruit at

showsrandom
“heads”.from bag 1;
we pick otherwise
a fruit at we pick a fruit at random from bag 2. Your
random fromflips
friend bag the
1; otherwise
coin (youwe pick see
cannot a fruit
theatresult),
random froma bag
picks fruit2.atYour friend
random
flips the coin (you cannot see the result), picks a fruit at random from the
from the corresponding bag, and presents you a mango.
corresponding bag, and presents you a mango.
What What
is the is the probability
probability that
that the the mango
mango was picked
was picked from2?bag 2?
from bag
b) b)
Suppose that one
Suppose thathasone
written
has awritten
computer program that
a computer sometimes
program compiles and (8)(8)
that sometimes
sometimes notand
compiles (code does not
sometimes change).
not (code doesYou decide toYou
not change). model
decidethe apparent
to model
stochasticity (success vs. no success) x of the compiler using a Bernoulli
the apparent stochasticity (success vs. no success) x of the compiler using
distribution with parameter μ:
a Bernoulli distribution with parameter μ:

"
Choose a conjugate prior for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the posterior
Choose a conjugate prior for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the
distribution p( μ | x1 , ... , xN).
posterior distribution p( μ | x1 , ... OR
, xN).

OR
16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)

i. Compute the marginal distributions for each dimension.

ii. Compute the mean, mode and median for each marginal distribution.
iii. Compute the mean and mode for the two-dimensional distribution.

b) Express the Binomial distribution as an exponential family distribution. Also (6)

express the Beta distribution is an exponential family distribution. Show that the
 Choose a conjugate
distribution prior μ:
with parameter for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the posterior
distribution p( μ | x1 , ... , xN).
OR
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Choose a conjugate prior for the Bernoulli likelihood and compute the posterior
16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)
16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)
distribution p( μ | x1 , ... , xN).
OR

16 a) Consider a mixture of two Gaussian distributions (8)

"

i. i.Compute
Compute the the marginal
marginal distributions
distributions for for
eacheach dimension.
dimension.
ii. ii.
Compute
Compute the mean, mode and
the mean, modemedian
andformedian
each marginal
for eachdistribution.
marginal
iii. Compute the mean and mode for the two-dimensional distribution.
distribution.
i. Compute
b) Express the marginal distributions for each dimension.
iii.the Binomial
Compute the distribution
mean and mode as an
for exponential family distribution.
the two-dimensional distribution. Also (6)
ii. Compute the mean, mode and median for each marginal distribution.
express the Betathedistribution
iii. Compute mean and mode is an for
exponential family distribution.
the two-dimensional Show that the
distribution.
product of the Beta and the Binomial distribution is also a member of the
b) b)Express
Express the Binomial
the Binomial distribution
distribution as anas exponential
an exponential family
family distribution.
distribution. Also (6)(6)
exponential family.
FindAlso
17 a) express the express
theextrema thef(x,y,z)
of Beta distribution
Beta distribution =isxan is an exponential
- yexponential
+ z subject family =family
x2 + y2 distribution.
distribution.
to g(x,y,z) +Show that the
z2 = 2. (8)
b) product
Let Show of that
the the
Betaproduct
and theof the Beta and
Binomial the Binomial
distribution distribution
is also a member is also
of athe (6)

exponential
memberfamily.
of the exponential family.
17 a) Find the extrema of f(x,y,z) = x - y + z subject to g(x,y,z) = x2 + y2 + z2 = 2. (8)
17b) a)Let Find the extrema of f(x,y,z) = x - y + z subject to g(x,y,z) = x2 + y2 + z2 = (8)(6)
2.
b) Let

Show
" that x* = (1 , 1/2 , -1) is optimal for the optimization problem
Show that x* = (1 , 1/2 , -1) is optimal for the optimization problem

(6)
OR
18 a) Derive the gradient descent trainingOR
rule assuming that the target function (8)
18 a) Derive the gradient descent training rule assuming that the target function is (8)
is represented as od = w0 + w1x1 + ... + wnxn. Define explicitly the cost/
represented as od = w0 + w1x1 + ... + wnxn. Define explicitly the cost/error function
error function E, assuming that a set of training examples D is provided,
E, assuming that a set of training examples D is provided, where each training
where each training example d ∈ D is associated with the target output td.
example d ∈ D is associated with the target output td.

b) Find the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = 3 and (6)
x,y,z >= 0.
19 a) Consider the following probability distribution (7)
18 a) Derive the gradient
represented as od = wdescent
0 + w1x1 training
+ ... + wnrule assuming
xn. Define that the
explicitly target function
the cost/error is (8)
function
represented od =a wset
E, assumingasthat 0 +of
w1training
x1 + ... +examples
wnxn. Define
D isexplicitly
provided,thewhere
cost/error
each function
training
E, assuming
example d ∈ that
D is aassociated
set of training examples
with the D is tprovided,
target output d. where each training
COMPUTER
example d ∈ D is associated with the target output td. SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
b) Find the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = 3 and (6)
b) Find the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = (6)
b) Find
x,y,z the maximum value of f(x,y,z) = xyz given that g(x,y,z) = x + y + z = 3 and (6)
>= 0.
19 a) x,y,z 3
Considerand x,y,z >= 0.
>= 0.the following probability distribution (7)
19 19
a) a)Consider the following
Consider probability
the following distribution
probability distribution (7) (7)

where θ is a parameter and x is a positive real number. Suppose you get m i.i.d.
where
where
samples is a parameter
θ isxi aθdrawn
parameter and
andthis
from xaispositive
a positive
x isdistribution. real
real number.
number.
Compute Suppose
Suppose
the you
maximumyou getmmi.i.d.
get
likelihood
samples
i.i.d.xfor
estimator drawn
isamples xfrom
θ based thisfrom
drawn
i on these distribution. ComputeCompute
this distribution.
samples. the maximum likelihood
the maximum
estimator for θ based
likelihood on these
estimator for θsamples.
based on these samples.
b) b)Consider the following
Consider Bayesian
the following network
Bayesian with with
network boolean variables.
boolean variables. (7) (7)
b) Consider the following Bayesian network with boolean variables. (7)

i. List variable(s) conditionally independent of X33 given X11 and X12

ii. List variable(s) conditionally independent of X33 and X22
iii. Write the joint probability P(X11, X12, X13, X21, X22, X31, X32, X33)
factored according to the Bayes net. How many parameters are
necessary to define the conditional probability distributions for
this Bayesian network?
iv. Write an expression for P(X13 = 0,X22 = 1,X33 = 0) in terms of the
conditional probability distributions given in your answer to part
(iii). Justify your answer.

OR
 Justify your answer.

OR
20 a) Consider the following one dimensional COMPUTER
training data set,SCIENCE
’x’ denotes AND
negative (6)
ENGINEERING
examples and ’o’ positive examples. The exact data points and their labels are
20 a) Consider the following one dimensional training data set, ’x’ denotes (6)
given in the table below. Suppose a SVM is used to classify this data.
negative examples and ’o’ positive examples. The exact data points and
their labels are given in the table below. Suppose a SVM is used to
classify this data.

"
i. Indicate which arewhich
i. Indicate the support vectors
are the andvectors
support mark theand
decision
mark boundary.
the decision
ii. Give the value of the cost function and the model parameter after training.
b) Supposeboundary.
that we are fitting a Gaussian mixture model for data items (8)
consisting of athe
ii. Give single
valuereal value,
of the costx,function
using K and
= 2 components. We haveafter
the model parameter N=
5 training cases, in which the values of x are as 5, 15, 25, 30, 40. Using the
training.
EM algorithm to find the maximum likeihood estimates for the model
parameters, what are the mixing proportions for the two components, π1
and π2, and the means for the two components, μ1 and μ2. The standard
deviations for the two components are fixed at 10.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
b) Suppose that we are fitting a Gaussian mixture model for data (8)
items consisting of a single real value, x, using K = 2 components.
We have N = 5 training cases, in which the values of x are as 5,
15, 25, 30, 40. Using the EM algorithm to find the maximum
likeihood estimates for the model parameters, what are the mixing
proportions for the two components, π1 and π2, and the means for
the two components, µ1 and µ2. The standard deviations for the
two components are fixed at 10.
Suppose that at some point in the EM algorithm, the E step found
Suppose that at some point in the EM algorithm, the E step found that the
that the responsibilities of the two components for the five data
responsibilities of the two components for the five data items were as
items were as follows:
follows:

"
What values for the parameters π1, π2 , µ1, and µ2 will be found in
What
the nextvalues forofthe
M step algorithm?π1, π2 , μ1, and μ2 will be found in the next
theparameters
M step of the algorithm? ****
****
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan
No. of
Lectures
No Topic
(45)

1 Module-I (LINEAR ALGEBRA) 8

1. Systems of Linear Equations – Matrices, Solving Systems of Linear
1
Equations. Vector Spaces - Linear Independence.
2. Vector Spaces - Basis and Rank 1
3. Linear Mappings 1

4. Norms, Inner Products, Lengths and Distances, Angles and

1
Orthogonality, Orthonormal Basis, Orthogonal Complement
5. Orthogonal Projections, Matrix Decompositions, Determinant and 1
Trace.
6. Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 1

7. Cholesky Decomposition, Eigen decomposition and Diagonalization 1

8. Singular Value Decomposition - Matrix Approximation 1
Module-II (VECTOR CALCULUS) 6

1 Differentiation of Univariate Functions, Partial Differentiation and 1

Gradients

2 Gradients of Vector Valued Functions, Gradients of Matrices 1

3 Useful Identities for Computing Gradients 1

4 Backpropagation and Automatic Differentiation 1

5 Higher Order Derivatives 1

6 Linearization and Multivariate Taylor Series 1

3 Module-III (Probability and Distributions) 10

1 Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete and Continuous 1
Probabilities (Lecture 1)
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
2 Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete and Continuous 1
Probabilities (Lecture 2)
3 Sum Rule, Product Rule 1
4 Bayes’ Theorem 1
5 Summary Statistics and Independence 1
6 Important probability Distributions (Lecture 1) 1
7 Important probability Distributions (Lecture 2) 1
8 Conjugacy and the Exponential Family (Lecture 1) 1
9 Conjugacy and the Exponential Family (Lecture 2) 1
10 Change of Variables/Inverse Transform 1
4 Module-IV (Optimization) 7
1 Optimization Using Gradient Descent. 1
2 Gradient Descent With Momentum, Stochastic Gradient Descent 1
3 Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers (Lecture 1) 1
4 Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers (Lecture 2) 1
5 Convex Optimization 1
6. Linear Programming 1

7. Quadratic Programming 1
5 Module-V (CENTRAL MACHINE LEARNING PROBLEMS) 14

1. Data and Learning models - Empirical Risk Minimization, 1

2. Parameter Estimation 1

3. Directed Graphical Models 1

4. Linear Regression 1

5. Bayesian Linear Regression 1

6. Maximum Likelihood as Orthogonal Projection 1

7. Dimensionality Reduction with Principal Component Analysis - 1

Maximum Variance Perspective, Projection Perspective.
8. Eigenvector Computation and Low Rank Approximations 1

9. Density Estimation with Gaussian Mixture Models 1

 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
10. Parameter Learning via Maximum Likelihood 1
11. EM Algorithm 1

12. Classification with Support Vector Machines - Separating 1

Hyperplanes
13. Primal Support Vector Machines, Dual Support Vector Machines 1

14. Kernels 1

*Assignments may include applications of the above theory. With respect to module V,
programming assignments may be given.
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

YEAR OF
Category L T P CREDIT
CST Principles of Program INTRODUCTION
296 Analysis and Verification
HONOURS 3 1 0 4 2019

Preamble: This is the foundational course for awarding B. Tech. Honours in Computer Science
and Engineering with specialization in Formal Methods. Program Analysis and Program
Verification are two important areas of study, discussing Methods, Technologies and Tools to
ensure reliability and correctness of software systems. The syllabus for this course is prepared
with the view of introducing the Foundational Concepts, Methods and Tools in Program Analysis
and Program Verification.

Prerequisite: Topics covered in the course Discrete Mathematical Structures (MAT 203).

Course Outcomes: After the completion of the course the student will be able to

Explain the concepts and results about Lattices, Chains, Fixed Points, Galois
Connections, Monotone and Distributive Frameworks, Hoare Triples, Weakest
CO1
Preconditions, Loop Invariants and Verification Conditions to perform Analysis and
Verification of programs (Cognitive knowledge level: Understand)

Illustrate methods for doing intraprocedural/interprocedural Data flow Analysis for a

CO2
given Program Analysis problem (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyse)
Formulate an Abstract Interpretation framework for a given Data flow Analysis
CO3 problem and perform the analysis using the tool WALA (Cognitive knowledge level:
Analyse)

Use Kildall’s Algorithm to perform Abstract Interpretation of Programs and compare

CO4 the results obtained by the Algorithm on Monotone and Distributive Frameworks
(Cognitive knowledge level: Apply)
Explain the concept of Loop Invariants and use them in Hoare Triple based Weakest
CO5 Precondition analysis to verify the total correctness of a code segment (Cognitive
knowledge level: Apply)

Use the tool VCC to specify and verify the correctness of a C Program with respect to
CO6
a given set of properties (Cognitive knowledge level: Analyse)

1
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

Abstract POs defined by National Board of Accreditation

PO# Broad PO PO# Broad PO

PO1 Engineering Knowledge PO7 Environment and Sustainability

PO2 Problem Analysis PO8 Ethics

PO3 Design/Development of solutions PO9 Individual and team work

Conduct investigations of complex

PO4 PO10 Communication
problems

PO5 Modern tool usage PO11 Project Management and Finance

PO6 The Engineer and Society PO12 Life long learning

2
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Assessment Pattern:

Continuous Assessment Tests

End Semester
Bloom’s Category Test 1 Test 2 Examination Marks
(Percentage) (Percentage)
Remember 30 30 30

Understand 30 30 30
Apply 40 40 40

Analyze
Evaluate

Create

Mark Distribution

Total Marks CIE Marks ESE Marks ESE Duration

150 50 100 3 hours

Continuous Internal Evaluation Pattern:

Attendance : 10 Marks

Continuous Assessment Tests : 25 Marks

Assignment : 15 Marks

Internal Examination Pattern:

Each of the two internal examinations has to be conducted out of 50 marks

First series test shall be preferably conducted after completing the first half of the syllabus and
the second series test shall be preferably conducted after completing the remaining part of the
syllabus.

3
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

There will be two parts: Part A and Part B. Part A contains 5 questions (preferably, 2 questions
each from the completed modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), having 3
marks for each question adding up to 15 marks for part A. Students should answer all questions
from Part A. Part B contains 7 questions (preferably, 3 questions each from the completed
modules and 1 question from the partly covered module), each with 7 marks. Out of the 7
questions in Part B, a student should answer any 5.

End Semester Examination Pattern:

There will be two parts; Part A and Part B. Part A contains 10 questions with 2 questions from
each module, having 3 marks for each question. Students should answer all questions from Part
A. Part B contains 2 questions from each module of which a student should answer any one, each
question carries 14 marks. Each question in part B can have a maximum 2 sub-divisions.

SYLLABUS

Module 1

Mathematical Foundations – Partially Ordered Set, Complete Lattice, Construction of

Complete Lattices, Chains, Fixed Points, Knaster-Tarski Fixed Point Theorem.

Module 2

Introduction to Program Analysis – The WHILE language, Reaching Definition Analysis, Data
Flow Analysis, Abstract Interpretation, Algorithm to find the least solutions for the Data Flow
Analysis problem.

Module 3

Intraprocedural DataFlow Analysis – Available Expressions Analysis, Reaching Definitions

Analysis, Very Busy Expressions Analysis, Live Variable Analysis, Derived Data Flow
Information, Monotone and Distributive Frameworks, Equation Solving - Maximal Fixed Point
(MFP) and Meet Over all Paths (MOP) solutions.

Interprocedural Data Flow Analysis - Structural Operational Semantics, Intraprocedural versus

Interprocedural Analysis, Making Context Explicit, Call Strings as Context, Flow Sensitivity
versus Flow Insensitivity, Implementing Interprocedural Data-flow Analysis using the Tool
WALA.

4
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Module 4

Abstract Interpretation - A Mundane Approach to Correctness, Approximations of Fixed

Points, Galois Connections, Systematic Design of Galois Connections, Induced Operations,
Kildall’s Algorithm for Abstract Interpretation.

Module 5

Program Verification - Why should we Specify and Verify Code, A framework for software
verification - A core programming Language, Hoare Triples, Partial and Total Correctness,
Program Variables and Logical Variables, Proof Calculus for Partial Correctness, Loop
Invariants, Verifying code using the tool VCC (Verifier for Concurrent C).

Text Books

1. Flemming Nielson, Henne Nielson and Chris Kankin, Principles of Program Analysis,
Springer (1998).
2. Michael Hutch and Mark Ryan, Logic in Computer Science - Modeling and Reasoning
about Systems, Cambridge University Press, Second Edition.

References

1. Julian Dolby and Manu Sridharan, Core WALA Tutorial (PLDI 2010), available online at
http://wala.sourceforge.net/files/PLDI_WALA_Tutorial.pdf

2. Ernie & Hillebrand, Mark & Tobies, Stephan (2012), Verifying C Programs: A VCC
Tutorial.

5
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Sample Course Level Assessment Questions

Course Outcome1 (CO1):

1. Find a lattice to represent the data states of a given program and propose a sound abstract
interpretation framework to do a given analysis on the program.
2. When is an abstract interpretation framework said to be sound? Illustrate with an
example.
3. When is an abstract interpretation framework said to be precise? Illustrate with an
example.

Course Outcome2 (CO2):

1. Illustrate how one can do Intraprocedural Available Expression Analysis on a program.

2. Illustrate how one can do Intraprocedural Reaching Definition Analysis on a program.
3. Illustrate how one can do Intraprocedural Live Variable Analysis on a program.

Course Outcome3 (CO3):

1. Illustrate how one can do Interprocedural Data Flow Analysis using the tool WALA.

Course Outcome4 (CO4):

1. Illustrate the working of Kildall’s algorithm to do Intraprocedural Available Expression

Analysis on a program.
2. Compare the results obtained by applying Kildall’s algorithms for Abstract Interpretation
in Monotone and Distributive Frameworks.

Course Outcome5 (CO5):

1. Illustrate the process of obtaining verification conditions (VCs) using weakest

precondition analysis.
2. Explain the concepts of partials and total correctness of programs.
3. Explain the necessity of obtaining loop invariants in verifying the total correctness of a
program.

Course Outcome6 (CO6):

1. Using the tool VCC prove that a given code segment satisfies a given property.

6
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Model Question paper

QP CODE: PAGES:3

Reg No:______________ Name :______________

APJ ABDUL KALAM TECHNOLOGICAL UNIVERSITY

4th SEMESTER B.TECH DEGREE (HONOURS) EXAMINATION, MONTH & YEAR

Course Code: CST 296

Course Name: Principles of Program Analysis and Verification

Max.Marks:100 Duration: 3 Hours

PART A

Answer all Questions. Each question carries 3 Marks

1. What is a complete lattice? Give an example of a complete lattice.

2. Show that every chain is a lattice.
3. Write a program in while language to find the factorial of a number. Explain the
statements of your program.
4. Consider a program that calculates x! y through repeated multiplications. Draw the flow
graph of the program.
5. What is Available Expression (AE) analysis? Give an application for AE analysis.
6. What is Live variable (LV) analysis? Give an application for LV analysis.
7. Let P be a program analysis problem (like LV, AE etc.) and (A,
! FA, γAC ) and (B,
! FB, γBC )
be two abstract interpretations such that B ! is more abstract than A! . Let α
! and γ! be the
abstraction and concretization functions between A ! and B
! . Then, what are the conditions
required for !α and !γ to form a Galois Connection?
8. When is Kildall’s algorithm for abstract interpretation guaranteed to terminate? Justify
your answer.
9. Is it possible to verify total correctness of a program using Hoare Logic? If yes, how is it
possible?
10. Define loop invariant. Show a simple loop with a loop invariant.

7
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

PART B
Answer any one Question from each module. Each question carries 14 Marks

11.
a. What is an infinite ascending chain in a lattice? Show an example lattice with an
infinite ascending chain. Is it possible for a complete lattice to contain an infinite
ascending chain? (7 marks)
b. State and prove Knaster-Tarski fixed point theorem. (7 marks)

OR

12.
a. Consider the lattice (ℕ,! ≤ ) . Let f! : ℕ → ℕ , be a function defined as follows:
when x! < 100 , f! (x) = x + 1 , when x! > 100 , f! (x) = x − 1 , otherwise f! (x) = x .
Then, show the following for f! : (i) the set of all fixpoints, (ii) the set of all pre-
fixpoints and (iii) the set of all post-fixpoints. (7 marks)
b. Let (D,
! ≤ ) be a lattice with a least upper bound for each subset of D ! . Then, prove
that every subset of D! has a greatest lower bound. (7 marks)
13.
a. With a suitable example, explain the equational approach in Data Flow Analysis.
(7 marks)
b. With a suitable example, explain how you obtain the collecting semantics of a
program point. (7 marks)

OR
14.
a. With an example, explain the Constrained Based Approach in Data Flow
Analysis. (7 marks)
b. Discuss the properties of an algorithm to solve the problem of computing the least
solution to the program analysis problems in Data Flow Analysis. (7 marks)
15.
a. Using Intraprocedural Reaching Definition Analysis, find the assignments killed
and generated by each of the blocks in the program
[x:=5]1;
[y:=1]2 ;
while [x>1]3 do
([y:=x*y]4 ; [x:=x-1]5)
(7 marks)
b. Analyse the following program using Intraprocedural Very Busy Expression
analysis

8
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

if [a>b]1 then
([x: =b-a]2 ; [y: =a-b]3)
else
([y: =b-a]4; [x: =a-b]5)
(7 marks)

OR
16.
a. Find Maximal Fixed Point (MFP) solution for the program
[x: =a+b]1;
[y: =a*b]2 ;
while [y>a+b]3 do
([a: =a+l]4; [x: =a+b]5)
(7 marks)
b. With examples, explain the difference between flow sensitive and flow insensitive
analysis. (7 marks)
17.
a. Prove that (L,
! α, γ, M ) is an adjunction if and only if (L,
! α, γ, M ) is a Galois
connection. (7 marks)
b. Prove that if α
! : L → M is completely additive then there exists γ! : M → L such
that (L,
! α, γ, M ) is a Galois connection. Similarly, if γ! : M → L is completely
multiplicative then there exists α! : L → M such that (L,! α, γ, M ) is a Galois
connection. (7 marks)

OR
18.
a. Show that if (Li, αi, γi, Mi) are Galois connections and βi : Vi ➝ Li are
representation functions then
((α1 o β1) ↠ (α2 o β2)) (↝) = α2 o ((β1 ↠ β2) (↝)) o γ1
(7 marks)
b. Briefly explain Kildall’s algorithm for abstract interpretation (7 marks)
19.
a. Briefly explain the need of specification and verification of code. (7 marks)
b. Argue that Hoare Logic is sound. When Hoare Logic is complete? Let {A}P{B}
be a Hoare triple such that Hoare Logic is complete for the program P. Then, is it
always possible to check the validity of the Hoare Triple? If not, what is the
difficulty? (7 marks)
OR
20.
a. With suitable examples, show the difference between partial and total correctness.
(7 marks)
b. With a suitable example, show how a basic program segment can be verified
using the tool VCC. (7 marks)

9
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

Teaching Plan
Module 1 (Mathematical Foundations) 6 Hours

1.1 Partially Ordered Set 1 Hour

1.2 Complete Lattice, Construction of Complete Lattices 1 Hour

1.3 Chains 1 Hour

1.4 Fixed Points 1 Hour

1.5 Knaster-Tarski Fixed Point Theorem 1 Hour

1.6 Proof of Knaster-Tarski Fixed Point Theorem 1 Hour

Module 2 (Introduction to Program Analysis) 5 Hours

2.1 The WHILE language 1 Hour

2.2 Data Flow Analysis 1 Hour

2.3 Reaching Definition Analysis 1 Hour

2.4 Abstract Interpretation 1 Hour

2.5 Algorithm to find the least solutions for the Data Flow Analysis problem 1 Hour

Module 3 (Data flow Analysis) 15 Hours

3.1 Available Expressions Analysis, Reaching Definitions Analysis 1 Hour

3.2 Very Busy Expressions Analysis 1 Hour

3.3 Live Variable Analysis 1 Hour

3.4 Derived Data Flow Information 1 Hour

3.5 Monotone and Distributive Frameworks 1 Hour

3.6 Equation Solving - MFP Solution 1 Hour

10
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3.7 Equation Solving - MOP Solution 1 Hour

3.8 Structural Operational Semantics (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

3.9 Structural Operational Semantics (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

3.10 Intraprocedural versus Interprocedural Analysis 1 Hour

3.11 Making Context Explicit 1 Hour

3.12 Call Strings as Context 1 Hour

3.13 Flow Sensitivity versus Flow Insensitivity 1 Hour

Implementing Interprocedural Dataflow Analysis using the Tool WALA

3.14 1 Hour
(Lecture 1)
Implementing Interprocedural Dataflow Analysis using the Tool WALA
3.15 1 Hour
(Lecture 2)
Module 4 (Abstract Interpretation) 8 Hours

4.1 A Mundane Approach to Correctness 1 Hour

4.2 Approximations of Fixed Points 1 Hour

4.3 Galois Connections, 1 Hour

4.4 Systematic Design of Galois Connections (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

4.5 Systematic Design of Galois Connections (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

4.6 Induced Operations 1 Hour

4.7 Kildall’s Algorithm for Abstract Interpretation (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

4.8 Kildall’s Algorithm for Abstract Interpretation (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

Module 5 (Program Verification) 11 Hours

5.1 Why should we Specify and Verify Code 1 Hour

5.2 A framework for software verification - A core programming Language 1 Hour

11
 COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

5.3 Hoare Triples (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

5.4 Hoare Triples (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

5.5 Partial and Total Correctness 1 Hour

5.6 Program Variables and Logical Variables 1 Hour

5.7 Proof Calculus for Partial Correctness 1 Hour

5.8 Loop Invariants 1 Hour

5.9 Verifying C programs using the tool VCC (Lecture 1) 1 Hour

5.10 Verifying C programs using the tool VCC (Lecture 2) 1 Hour

5.11 Verifying C programs using the tool VCC (Lecture 3) 1 Hour

12